[go: up one dir, main page]

TWI282505B - Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad - Google Patents

Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI282505B
TWI282505B TW091114098A TW91114098A TWI282505B TW I282505 B TWI282505 B TW I282505B TW 091114098 A TW091114098 A TW 091114098A TW 91114098 A TW91114098 A TW 91114098A TW I282505 B TWI282505 B TW I282505B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
button
input
word
characters
vowel
Prior art date
Application number
TW091114098A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Min-Kyum Kim
Original Assignee
Min-Kyum Kim
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from PCT/KR2001/002267 external-priority patent/WO2002052816A1/en
Application filed by Min-Kyum Kim filed Critical Min-Kyum Kim
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI282505B publication Critical patent/TWI282505B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Input From Keyboards Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

The invention is to efficiently input characters on a keypad and, more particularly, to input various symbols by using the hiding control processing method, thereby maintaining a simple arrangement of the keypad. Furthermore, the present invention produces simple codes using the relation between characters allocated to the keypad and numerals, implements the short-cut input method using the simple codes, and enters target characters and words or phrases with a small number of strokes using the concurrent input method. With a switching server for interpreting simple codes, the user can input simple codes even when the third server requests words or phrases other than simple codes, and the switching server interprets simple codes input by the user and sends the words or phrases corresponding to the simple codes to the third server, which does not store the simple codes and the words or phrases corresponding to the simple codes.

Description

12825051282505

五、發明說明(V. Description of the invention (

Igj領域: 本發明係關於一種在小鍵盤上輸入字符的裝置和方 法。更具體而言,本發明係關於利用電話鍵盤等數字鍵較 少之小鍵盤輸入字符的裝置和方法。 曼明背景: 隨着行動通訊的進步,主要用於語音通話的無線通訊 站中一般皆增加一種接收和發送文本訊息之類數位信息 的功能。因此,無線通訊站上用來輸入電話號碼的小鍵盤 另還具有輸入字符的功能,因此行動通訊站輸入裝置的鍵 盤尺寸得以縮小,但鍵盤上按鍵數目亦因此減少。由於每 種語言的字母數目通常都超過小鍵盤上的12個鍵。因 此,電話鍵盤上按鍵單獨表示每個字符、或以兩或多種不 同擊鍵組合來表示每個字符的策略確有其提出的必要。 發明目的及概沭: 本案申請人於先前技術文獻中公開之發明(申請號·· 10-2000-0031879 和 PCT/KR00/00601)之内容簡述如下。 首先,所謂的“部分-整體選擇方法(PWSM),,係將字符 以鍵盤上每個按鍵所具之網格數表示之,因此使用者係以 按下鍵盤上一第一按鍵及一第二按鍵之方·式輸入欲輸入 字符(以下稱爲“目標字符”),其中第二按鍵為第一按鍵之 網格中字符位置相對應。例如,在圖1 - 1中,使用者可以 輸入“A = [1] + [2]”。PWSM的核心概念是使用每個包括 4 .本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^ (請先¾讀背面之注意事項窝本頁) 裝 訂· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 ί B7 五、發明說明() .基本網格單元(BLE)的按鍵的部分網格單元,第一按鍵的 基本網格單元與第二按鍵的基本網格單元一樣,以與最便 於按键組合的BLE接近次序來使用。這樣,基本網格單 元構成PWSM的核心,而利用基本網格單元槪念的鍵盤稱 •作“基本鍵盤(BK)”。 接着,所謂的“基本重覆選擇方法(BRSM),,能使使用 者按照按下基本鍵盤上按鍵的次數來選擇字符,所述基本 鍵盤被設計成以與BLE的接近次序來使用 PSWM ’即 PSWM中的按鍵組合方便次序(COBC)。BRSM能使使用者 在基本鍵盤上使用重覆選擇方法(RSM)。爲簡便起見’將 .. . ... .·· ... 僅使用 RSM的鍵盤稱爲“普通小鍵盤(PK)”,而如通常一 樣在PK中使用的 RSM方法稱爲“簡單重覆選棵方法 (SRSM),,。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 還有一種“控制處理方法(CPM)”,它包括“詞緻控制 處理方法(ACPM)”和“相繼控制處理方法(SCPM),,。詞綴控 制處理方法是透過詞綴控制和基本字符的組合來輸入帶 詞綴字符。相繼控制處理方法將一組分派給按鍵的字符定 義爲代表性的字符和其相繼字符間的關係,並且將代表性 的字符和與該代表性的字符相關的優先順序結合在一 起。例如,在圖4 - 1中,使用者可以輸入“刁=-J+ [ * ],,。Igj Field: The present invention relates to an apparatus and method for inputting characters on a keypad. More specifically, the present invention relates to an apparatus and method for inputting characters using a keypad having a few numeric keys such as a telephone keypad. Manming Background: With the advancement of mobile communication, wireless communication stations mainly used for voice calls generally add a function of receiving and transmitting digital information such as text messages. Therefore, the keypad for inputting the telephone number on the wireless communication station also has the function of inputting characters, so that the size of the keyboard of the mobile communication station input device is reduced, but the number of keys on the keyboard is also reduced. Since the number of letters in each language usually exceeds the 12 keys on the keypad. Therefore, the strategy of a button on the telephone keypad to indicate each character individually, or a combination of two or more different keystrokes to represent each character, is necessary. OBJECTS AND SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The contents of the inventions disclosed in the prior art documents (Application Nos. 10-2000-0031879 and PCT/KR00/00601) are briefly described below. First of all, the so-called "partial-to-integral selection method (PWSM), which uses the number of grids of each button on the keyboard, so the user presses a first button and a second on the keyboard. The key input type is to input characters (hereinafter referred to as "target characters"), wherein the second key corresponds to the character position in the grid of the first key. For example, in Fig. 1-1, the user can input " A = [1] + [2]". The core concept of PWSM is to use each of the four. This paper scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ^ (Please read the back of the 3⁄4 first) The book on this page) Binding · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperative Printed 1225025 ί B7 V. Invention Description () Partial grid unit of the basic grid unit (BLE) button, basic grid unit of the first button Like the basic grid unit of the second button, it is used in close proximity to the BLE with the most convenient button combination. Thus, the basic grid unit constitutes the core of the PWSM, and the keyboard that uses the basic grid unit is called "Basic". Keyboard (BK). The so-called "Basic Repeat Selection Method (BRSM)" enables the user to select characters in accordance with the number of times the keys on the basic keyboard are pressed. The basic keyboard is designed to use PSWM in the close order to BLE. The key combination in PSWM is convenient for order (COBC). BRSM enables users to use the Repetitive Selection Method (RSM) on the basic keyboard. For the sake of brevity, 'will.. . . . . . ... The keyboard using only RSM is called "normal keypad (PK)", and the RSM method used in PK as usual is called "simple weight The method of re-selection (SRSM), the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Office, and the Consumer Cooperatives also have a “Control Processing Method (CPM)”, which includes “Word Control Processing Method (ACPM)” and “Successive Control Processing Method”. (SCPM),,. The affix control process is to input affixed characters through a combination of affix control and basic characters. The successive control processing method defines a set of characters assigned to the keys as a relationship between the representative characters and their successive characters, and combines the representative characters with the priority order associated with the representative characters. For example, in Figure 4-1, the user can enter "刁=-J+ [ * ],,.

詞綴控制處理方法(ACPM)實際上與相繼字符控制程 序(SCPM)相彳《。後者比前者更廣泛,因爲特定的字符組 還包括屬於SCPM中規定次序的基本字符的帶詞綴字 符。因爲帶詞綴字符可以分解爲詞綴和基本字符,ACPM 5 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 i > __ B7 五、發明說明() •在形態上與字符組的關係非常密切,同時SCPM與次序和 發音關係密切。 CPM的優點是,透過基本字符和其相繼(或者帶詞綴) 子付之間的關係’相繼(或者帶詞綴)字符並不在小鍵盤上 •顯示,以便提供小鍵盤的簡單佈局並且沒有多意性地輸入 字符。不包括相繼字符的小鍵盤稱爲“相繼小鍵盤(SK)”, 而不包括帶詞綴字符的小鍵盤稱爲“簡便小鍵盤(AK),,。SK 和AK都稱爲‘‘簡潔小鍵盤(CK)’’>顯示所有相繼(或者詞綴) 字符的小鍵盤相對於ck被稱爲“完整小鍵盤(FK),,。 完整小鍵盤也能使用CPM輸入後續(或者詞組)字 · ... · ; ... · 符,而CK允許記住了完整小鍵盤佈局的使用者在完聱小 鍵盤上執行輸入過程。如上所述,C K可以擴展成5^,並 且使用者可以方便地透過CPM輸入相繼字符,這就保證 • ' . · 了已有技術文獻的兼容特:點。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 透過如已有技術文獻所述的代表性字符和其相繼字 •符之間的關係來“隱藏”相繼字符,控制處理方法不僅排除 了多意性,而且簡化了小鍵盤的佈局。爲簡便起見,這種 方法稱爲‘‘隱藏控制處理方法(HCPM),,。如已有技術文獻 所述’相繼(或者帶詞綴)字符可以由CPM在完全小鍵盤上 輸入,其中相繼(或者帶詞綴)字符顯示在完全小鍵盤上。 爲簡便起見,這種方法稱爲‘‘非隱藏控制處理方法 (NCPM),,。 本發明對該申請人(申請號:10 — 2000-003 1879和 PCT/KR00/0 0601)的已有技術文獻進行了改進。具體而 6 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1282505 > 产---:---- B7 五、發明說明() • a ’它提供(a) —種使用較少擊鍵次數來輸入通常使用的字 符的方法,(b)使用同時輸入方法(CIM)輸入所有目標字符 的方法’以便减少輸入擊鍵並因此提高輸入字符的方便 性,所述的同時输入方法旣與快捷輸入方法(SIM)有關又 .和完全輸入方法(FIM)有關,(c)在小鍵盤上輸入各種符號 的方法,和⑷使用作爲控制按鍵的移動鍵方法,所述的 移動鍵在字符輸入模式中並不經常使用。 . ... 發明詳細説明: 下面將以示何的方式對本發明加以詳細說明,所述的 示例並非要限制本發明的範圍。 首先,以下面的語言來說明已有技術文獻的内容。很 明顯,儘管沒有具體說明,與某種語言相關的已有技術文 獻的内容也可以應用於其它語言。 1·一般補克說明 又· 1已有技術文獻和本發明中小鍵盤的鹿用 很明顯,已有技術文獻和本發明中提出的小鍵盤可以 使用在所有具有電話鍵盤形式的應用中,包括:移動終端 或者標準鍵盤的數字鍵盤,以軟體形式在屛幕上實現的小 鍵盤’或者門鎖。儘管標準鍵盤的數字小鍵盤與已有技術 文獻和本發明的小鍵盤在數字鍵佈局上有所不同,但已有 技術文獻和本發明的小鍵盤上按鍵的佈局可以應用於鍵 盤的小鍵盤。例如,在已有技術文獻和本發明中分派终按 鍵[1 ]的字符設置給鍵盤的數字小鍵盤的數字按鍵[丨]等, 7 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先M讀背面之注意事項3寫本頁) !裝 ij· 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 1282505 A7 鼻 __B7 五、發明說明() .其中的方法可以應用於字符的輸入、簡單代碼的使用和不 同代碼的記憶。The affix control processing method (ACPM) is actually contrary to the successive character control program (SCPM). The latter is more extensive than the former because the specific character set also includes suffixes that are the basic characters of the order specified in the SCPM. Because the affixed characters can be decomposed into affixes and basic characters, ACPM 5 is based on the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). 1282505 A7 i > __ B7 V. Invention Description () • In the form The relationship between the upper and the character group is very close, and the SCPM is closely related to the order and pronunciation. The advantage of CPM is that the relationship between the basic characters and their successive (or affixed) sub-payments 'successive (or affixed) characters are not displayed on the keypad to provide a simple layout of the keypad and no multi-meaning Enter characters. A keypad that does not include successive characters is called "successful keypad (SK)", and a keypad that does not include affixed characters is called "easy keypad (AK), and both SK and AK are called ''simple keypads' (CK) ''> A keypad that displays all consecutive (or affixed) characters is referred to as a "complete keypad (FK)," relative to ck. The full keypad can also use CPM to input subsequent (or phrase) words ..., ..., ..., while CK allows users who have remembered the full keypad layout to perform the input process on the finished keyboard. As mentioned above, C K can be expanded to 5^, and the user can conveniently input successive characters through the CPM, which ensures that • '. · The compatibility of the prior art documents: points. The Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Consumers' Cooperatives Printing, "hidden" successive characters through the relationship between the representative characters as described in the prior art documents and their successive characters, and the control processing method not only excludes the multi-meaning, but also Simplified layout of the keypad. For the sake of simplicity, this method is called ‘‘Hidden Control Processing Method (HCPM),. As described in the prior art document, 'sequential (or affixed) characters can be entered by the CPM on a full keypad, with successive (or affixed) characters being displayed on the full keypad. For the sake of simplicity, this method is called ‘‘non-hidden control processing method (NCPM),. The present invention has been improved on the prior art documents of the applicants (Application Nos.: 10 to 2000-003 1879 and PCT/KR00/0 0601). Specifically, 6 paper scales apply to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) 1282505 > Production---:---- B7 V. Invention Description () • a 'It provides (a) a method of inputting commonly used characters using a small number of keystrokes, and (b) a method of inputting all target characters using a simultaneous input method (CIM) to reduce input keystrokes and thus improve the convenience of inputting characters, Simultaneous input method 有关 related to the shortcut input method (SIM), and related to the full input method (FIM), (c) a method of inputting various symbols on the keypad, and (4) using a moving key method as a control button, The move keys are not often used in character input mode. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The present invention will be described in detail below by way of example, and the examples are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. First, the contents of the prior art documents will be explained in the following languages. It is obvious that, although not specified, the content of prior art related to a certain language can be applied to other languages. 1. General Description 1. The prior art document and the deer of the keypad of the present invention are obviously used. The prior art document and the keypad proposed in the present invention can be used in all applications having the form of a telephone keypad, including: A numeric keypad of a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard, a keypad that is implemented in a software form on a curtain, or a door lock. Although the numeric keypad of the standard keyboard differs from the prior art document and the keypad of the present invention in the numeric key layout, the layout of the keys on the prior art and the keypad of the present invention can be applied to the keypad of the keyboard. For example, in the prior art document and the present invention, the character of the final button [1] is assigned to the numeric keypad of the keyboard, such as the numeric keypad [丨], and the paper size is applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210). X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back of the M first. 3 write this page)! Install ij· Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee fee cooperative cooperative printing 1225025 A7 nose __B7 V. Invention description (). The method can be Applies to character input, use of simple code, and memory of different code.

1^·^_緯延.遲m(SSDT)jg^散墼鍵延遲時間(D SDT) 對於諸如韓文和北印度語之類子音和母音交替出現 的一些語言,向每個按鍵分派一對代表性子音和母音,以 便一次擊鍵輪入子音而兩次擊鍵輪入母音。可以實現一種 算法,以便首先將在預定延遲時間(如〇1秒)卧隔中給定 按鍵的兩次擊鍵識別爲母音,並且能使使用者有效輸入母 音。鑑於在連讀按下相同按鍵中一次擊鍵通常的時間消 耗,必須確定延遲時間。爲簡便起見,這種延遲時間稱爲 “連續擊鍵延遲時間(SSDT),,。另外,可以實現一種算法, 以便首先將在預定時間(如1秒)間隔中給定按鍵的兩次擊 鍵識別爲子音。爲簡便起見,這種延遲時間稱爲“離散擊 鍵延遲時間(DSDT),,。這也可以應用於相同按鍵的三次或 者更多次擊鍵。 例如,如圖4-1或圖4-2所示,如果使用者以〇 . μ 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 •產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 秒的時間間隔按下按鍵[1]兩次,則兩次擊鍵首先作 音而識別,即"丄",並且,如果延遲時間爲i丨秒,則兩a 擊鍵首先作爲兩個子音而識別,即__π"和.·1"。如果延遲 間爲0.5秒,根據該語言中母音和子音出現―方式中表現的 相應語言結構,就能構確定使用者是要輸入一個母音還日 要輸入兩個子音。甚至如果兩次擊鍵的延遲時間是〇 Μ 或者1·1秒時,也可以根據該語言中母音和子音出現方式 1282505 A7 j B7 五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財i局員工湞費合作社印製 •中表現的相應語言結構’確定是將兩次擊鍵識別爲 音還是識別爲兩個子音。 按照慣例’固定時間間隔(如1秒鐘),以便將相應時 間内連續按下兩次按鍵識別爲兩次連續的盤4 只町單鍵,而將在比 相應時間長的時間間隔内連續兩次按下按鍵气別爲、 離散的擊键。識別兩次連續的擊鍵的基準時間(例如0\ 秒鐘)和識別兩次離散擊鍵的基準時間(例如〗秒鐘)之間 存在差異。 -- . · ' 通常’在輸入方便性方面,RSM優於已有技術文獻 中的PWSM。因此,這種具有RSM優點(即輸入規則簡單 並且方便)的方法使用母音和子音交替出現的特定語言结 構,以便避免多意性,並且以下面的這種方式來簡化算法 的實現:將SSDT與DSDT區別開,並且允許使用者指定 SSDT 和 DSDT。 1.3鏈型控制處理方法 根據已有技術文獻,ACPM實際上與SCPM相似,且 後者更廣泛。這就是說,已有技術文獻中以韓文字符爲例 就π,3和ττ之間關來說明代表性字符和其帶詞綴字符之間 的關係,即Τί=π+ {送氣子音}和3 =1+ {緊子音}。但是,由 代表性字符和其相繼字符,如1(代表性字符)、氕第二)和 π(第三)之間的關係,在本發明中也可以得到相同的結果。 對於如圖2-1所示的日文,下面說明使用SCPM進行 輸入的示例。鑑於代表性字符和其相繼字符之間的關係; 例如,南(代表性字符)、b(第二)、第三)、i(第四)和治(第 個母 (請先¾讀背面之注意事項3寫本頁)1^·^_ latitude. Late m(SSDT) jg^ 墼 key delay time (D SDT) For some languages in which sub-tones and vowels such as Korean and Hindi are alternated, assign a pair of representatives to each button. Sex and vowels, so that the keystrokes are plucked into the vowel by two keystrokes. An algorithm can be implemented to first recognize the two keystrokes of a given button in a predetermined delay time (e.g., 〇 1 second) as a vowel, and enable the user to effectively input the vowel. In view of the usual time consumption of a single keystroke in the same key press, the delay time must be determined. For the sake of brevity, this delay time is called "continuous keystroke delay time (SSDT). In addition, an algorithm can be implemented to first give two hits of a given button in a predetermined time interval (eg, 1 second) interval. The key is recognized as a consonant. For simplicity, this delay time is called the Discrete Keystroke Delay Time (DSDT). This can also be applied to three or more keystrokes of the same button. For example, as shown in Figure 4-1 or Figure 4-2, if the user presses the button [1] twice at the time interval of the printing of the 经济. μ Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Bureau of Consumers and Cooperatives, twice The keystrokes are first recognized by the sound, that is, "丄", and if the delay time is i丨 seconds, the two a keystrokes are first identified as two consonants, namely __π" and .·1". If the delay is 0.5 seconds, according to the corresponding linguistic structure of the vowel and consonant in the language, the user can determine that the user wants to input a vowel and enter two consonants. Even if the delay time of two keystrokes is 〇Μ or 1·1 second, it can also be based on the vowels and consonants in the language. 1282505 A7 j B7 V. Invention Description () Ministry of Economic Affairs, Smart Finance Bureau, Staff Covenant Cooperative The corresponding language structure of the printed • performance determines whether the two keystrokes are recognized as sounds or as two consonants. According to the convention 'fixed time interval (such as 1 second), in order to press the button twice in the corresponding time to identify two consecutive discs, only one single button, and two consecutive time intervals within a longer time interval than the corresponding time Press the button twice to make a discrete keystroke. There is a difference between the reference time (e.g., 0\ seconds) that identifies two consecutive keystrokes and the reference time (e.g., seconds) that identifies two discrete keystrokes. -- 'Normal' In terms of input convenience, RSM is superior to PWSM in the prior art literature. Therefore, this method with the advantage of RSM (ie, the input rules are simple and convenient) uses a specific language structure in which vowels and consonants alternate, in order to avoid ambiguity, and to simplify the implementation of the algorithm in the following way: SSDT and The DSDT is distinguished and allows the user to specify SSDT and DSDT. 1.3 Chain Control Processing Method According to the prior art literature, ACPM is actually similar to SCPM, and the latter is more extensive. That is to say, in the prior art, the Korean character is used as an example to illustrate the relationship between the representative character and its affixed character between π, 3 and ττ, that is, Τί=π+ {aspirating sub-tone} and 3 = 1+ {tight sound}. However, the same result can be obtained in the present invention by the relationship between the representative character and its successive characters, such as 1 (representative character), 氕 second), and π (third). For Japanese as shown in Figure 2-1, an example of input using SCPM is explained below. Given the relationship between representative characters and their successive characters; for example, South (representative character), b (second), third), i (fourth), and rule (first mother (please read 3⁄4 first) Note 3 write this page)

P 裝 訂: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( .五),态用按鍵[1]的一次擊鍵(¾丨 摁 L ’木聲擇,第二到第五 控制分派給控制按鍵(例如[*])並 ^ Μ Ψ Μ Μ χ據按下控制按鍵的 士认乂减— 和其相繼字符的組合 來輸入相繼子符。方便的是,控制 、择在方括號中轉錄 (transcribe)。當控制設置爲要在輪入 丄 土本予符之後被選擇 時,得到的輪入如下:‘⑴、W秦 1 第一} = Π] + [*]、3=知 {第三} = [1] + [*] + [*]、泛=态+ {第 七:κ }〜[]+ [ ] + [*] + [*]、 和 4+{第五}=⑴+ [*] + [*] + [*]十]。 再一次’在諸如岛(代表性字符i’w:第二(第 三)、之(第四)、右(第五)之類的代表性字符和其相繼字符之 防建立起關係。與向控制按鍵分派相繼控制並且使用她 不同,“相繼”或者“後續’,控制由特定控制按鍵的一次擊鍵 (^i ^ r*]m# 〇 ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # fij ^ ^ 入第二相繼字符(如b) ’並且使用作爲第二代表性字符前 面的字符(第二相繼字符)和“後續控制,,來輸入第三相繼字 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 符(如为。這就是說,、=b+ {後續} =[!] + [*] + [*]。同樣, 使用作爲第三代表性字符的前面的字符(第三相繼字符) 和‘‘後續控制’’來輸入第四相繼字符。這就是說,龙=後 續} = [1] + [*] + [*] + [*]。第五相繼字符也以相似的方式輸 入0 這個結果與當相繼控制(第二、第三、第四及第 五、······)被分派給作爲由RSM選擇的控制按鍵並且輸入 由代表性子符和相繼字符的組合給出時所獲得的結果一 樣。可以看出,沒有多意性的笫一代表性字符态的輸入導 10 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^282505 1P Binding: This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention description (.5), one-click key of button [1] (3⁄4丨摁L ' The wood sound selection, the second to fifth control is assigned to the control button (for example, [*]) and ^ Μ Ψ Μ Μ according to the combination of the control button and the successive characters to input the successive sub-character. Conveniently, the control is chosen to be transcribed in square brackets. When the control is set to be selected after the turn of the bauxite, the resulting round is as follows: '(1), W Qin 1 first} = Π] + [*], 3= know {third} = [1] + [*] + [*], pan = state + {seventh: κ }~[]+ [ ] + [*] + [* ], and 4+{fifth}=(1)+ [*] + [*] + [*]10]. Once again in 'such as the island (representative character i'w: second (third), its (first The relationship between the representative character such as the right (fifth) and its successive characters is established. It is different from the control to the control button and uses her different, "successive" or "subsequent", controlled by the specific control button One keystroke (^i ^ r*) m# 〇^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # fij ^ ^ Enter the second successive character (such as b) ' and use the character preceding the second representative character (second successive character) and "subsequent control," to enter the third succession The Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office staff levy cooperatives prints (if yes. That is, =b+ {follow} =[!] + [*] + [*]. Similarly, use as the third representative character The preceding character (third successive character) and ''subsequent control'' are used to enter the fourth successive character. That is to say, dragon = follow-up} = [1] + [*] + [*] + [*]. Successive characters also enter 0 in a similar manner. This result is assigned to successive control (second, third, fourth, and fifth, .....) as control buttons selected by RSM and input by representative sub- The combination of the character and the successive characters gives the same result. It can be seen that there is no multi-meaning input of the representative character state. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). PCT) ^282505 1

五、發明說明() 致後續的第二相繼字符的輸入沒有多意性。這就是說, 之=1、+{後續卜⑴+卜]+ [*],這就能構沒有多意性地輸 入因此也可以/又有多意性地输入其後的字符乏,因爲1與 “後續控制’’相結合。 爲簡便起見這種方法稱爲“鏈型相繼控制處理方法 (鏈型SCPM)’’,在其中,使用“後續,,控制而非分派給控制 按鍵的机繼控制,相繼字符由作爲新的代表性字符前面的 字符和“後續”控制的組合來輸入相繼字符。已有技術文獻 說明使用者僅僅將特定的按鍵識別爲相繼控制按鍵,即使 祖繼控制按鍵上沒有標記相繼控封。鏈型SqPM的優點在 於簡化了在控制按鍵上表示“後續控制,,。本發明使用與 鏈型SCPM ’相關的“相繼控制處理方法(SCpM),,,因爲前 者的結果與後者在已有技術中描述的結果相同。 1.4跳躍控制處理方.決(JCPM) 在ACPM中。帶詞綴字g包括“··,,和“e,,的帶詞綴字 符e可由··和e的組合來輸入。另一種選擇是,匕指示爲 基本字符’並且它的與基本字符有關的相繼字符針對形態 和優先順序被作爲相繼字符而分派,以致於帶詞綴字符可 以由基本字符和附加優先順序(例如,e(基本字符)、έ(第 二)、S(第三)···)的組合輸入。另外,重覆按下控制按鍵就 可以沒有多意性地輸入詞綴或者相繼的字符,所述的控制 按鍵被分派了僅僅與字符(即特定的數字鍵)相關時變爲 有意義的控制。 對於羅馬字母’利用法語中的1 1個帶詞綴字符,包 11 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) (請先M讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 訂· ' 經濟部智慧財i局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() .括:έ、e、e、g、a、a、ϊ、ύ、ύ、(?和6。在帶詞綴字符 中有五種類型的河綴’例如/、Λ、、、…、及s。如果巧綴 控制按S?、下面的順序選擇:/、Λ、、、…和s,則輸入必須 由a=a+[*]+[*]給出。但是,詞綴,,/,,不能帶在字符“a,, .上,因爲在法語中字符“a”僅有與‘‘、,,或者“λ,,兩種繞合。因 此詞綴被遺漏(即跳過),而詞綴“Λ”被選擇,以使得到 輸入a=a+[*]。爲簡便起見,這個系統稱爲“跳躍控制處 理方法(JCPM)”。這就是說’:^權將相繼字符的^附加優先 順序指定爲a(基本字符),έ(第二)和a(第三),以便用與控 . ... . 制處理方法相同的方式輪入相繼(或者詞綴)字符ό 同樣,在日文中,對於字符行為、妒及❺中的字符勹存 在長音,並且在字符行办、吞、纪及^中存在濁音,而半濁 曰出現在字符所在行上。因此,字符具有兩個帶詞綴 子符,即長音和濁音。而一行具有兩個帶詞綴字符,即濁 音和半濁音。因此僅僅給定詞綴控制按鍵的一次擊鍵就可 以輸入除了 6個具有兩個帶詞綴字符之外的其它字符的 帶詞綴字符。例如,當控制按鍵設置爲[*]並且控制設置 爲要在輸入基本字符之後被選擇,則得到如电=為+[*]和 和=办+[*]的輸入。對於6個都具有兩個帶詞綴字符的字 符’用按照詞綴使用頻率的次序所選擇的控制來輸入帶詞 綴字符。例如,當控制按鍵設置爲[*],並且控制設置爲 要在輸入基本字符之後被選擇,則輸入可以這樣給出: d忒=技〇 +[*]、及忒=泣+ [*]+[*]。這就是說, 控制按知這樣的方式來選擇:能與基本字符相結合的控制 12 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------- 裝 i I (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項|!^寫本頁) 訂·- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製. 1282505V. INSTRUCTIONS () The subsequent input of the second successive character is not intentional. That is to say, =1, +{subsequent Bu (1) + Bu] + [*], which can be constructed without multi-meaning input, so it is also possible/more interesting to input the following characters, because 1 Combined with "subsequent control". For the sake of simplicity, this method is called "chain-type sequential control processing method (chain-type SCPM)", in which "subsequent, control, rather than dispatching to control buttons" is used. Following the control, successive characters are entered as successive characters by a combination of the character preceding the new representative character and the "subsequent" control. The prior art document states that the user only recognizes a particular key as a successive control button, even if the ancestor control button There is no mark on the successive control seals. The advantage of the chain type SqPM is that it simplifies the expression "subsequent control" on the control buttons. The present invention uses the "Successive Control Processing Method (SCpM) associated with the chained SCPM', because the results of the former are the same as those described in the prior art. 1.4 Skip Control Processing. JCPM in ACPM The affixed word g includes "··,, and "e," with the suffix character e can be input by a combination of ·· and e. Another option is that 匕 indicates the basic character ' and its related to the basic character Successive characters are assigned as successive characters for morphological and prioritized order, so that affixed characters can be composed of basic characters and additional precedence (eg, e (basic character), έ (second), S (third)... In combination, pressing the control button repeatedly can input affixes or successive characters without singularity, and the control buttons are assigned to become meaningful only when they are associated with characters (ie, specific numeric keys). Control. For the Roman letter 'Using 1 1 affixed characters in French, Pack 11 This paper scale applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) (Please read the back of the M first) Matters to write this page) Book · 'Ministry of Economics and Wisdom Finance Bureau employee consumption cooperatives printed 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention description (). Includes: έ, e, e, g, a, a, ϊ, ύ, ύ, ( ? and 6. There are five types of suffixes in the affixed characters 'such as /, Λ, ,, ..., and s. If the control is selected by S?, the following order: /, Λ, ,, ... and s, the input must be given by a=a+[*]+[*]. However, the affixes, /, can't be taken on the characters "a,, ." because in French the characters "a" are only with ' ',,, or "λ,, two kinds of wrap. So the affix is omitted (ie skipped), and the affix "Λ" is selected so that the input a = a + [*]. For the sake of simplicity, this system It is called “Jump Control Processing Method (JCPM). This means that the ':^ right assigns the precedence order of successive characters to a (basic character), έ (second) and a (third), so as to use The control method is the same way as the sequential (or affix) character ό. Similarly, in Japanese, there are long sounds for character behavior, characters in 妒 and ❺, and There are voiced sounds in character lines, swallows, and ^, and half-clouds appear on the line of characters. Therefore, characters have two suffixes, long and voiced, and one line has two suffixes, Voiced and semi-voiced sounds. Therefore, only one keystroke character with two characters other than the affix character can be input with a single keystroke of the affix control button. For example, when the control button is set to [*] and controlled Set to be selected after inputting the basic characters, then get the input as ^=+[*] and and=do+[*]. For each of the two characters with apostrophe characters, use frequency according to the affix. The order selected by the control to enter the affixed characters. For example, when the control button is set to [*] and the control is set to be selected after the basic character is entered, the input can be given as follows: d忒=Technical+[*], and 忒=Cry+[*]+ [*]. That is to say, the control is selected in such a way as to know: the control that can be combined with the basic characters. 12 The paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- ----- Install i I (please read the notes on the back first!!^Write this page) Order ·- Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing. 1282505

II

五、發明說明() ’沒有任何效果。例如,r * 、 ]在如下給出的輸入扣==办+[**] 中並不是長音控制,而县 而疋濁音控制,因爲基本字符办不具 有長音,並且它必須與濁音控制相結合。 嚴格選擇控制的優θ 们设點疋可以輸入中實際上不使用的 子付。也可以輪入’例如法 '文凌吾中包括b和詞綴“ · ·,,的虛字 符,和包括态的日文丰篇、 及濁音點(v 〇 i c e d s o u n d ρ 〇 i n t)。 即使控制由重霜方法化。、丄 復万去(RSM)來選擇,只有當標記在小 鍵盤上的代表性丰篇i w、* 付T以透過控制程序沒有多'意性輸入 (例如,當按鍵1上僅右抑I — 值有代表性字符1,或者甚至當字符位 於每個按鍵上時,传用接l立 土 便用4如部分整體選擇方法(P WSM)之 類沒有多意性的字縣絡Λ 士、▲ 子持輸入方法)時,能沒有多意性地輸入 ”匕的相繼字符。原因在於透過控制程序消除了多意 性,因爲控制不僅獨自而且輿其它字符的組合可以表示特 定的字符。 H由控製里方法輸入數芊和英文字母 已有技術文獻說明母語,數字和英文字母“按照與 BLE的接近次序,,來排列,並且以相同的方式由RASM來 選擇。同樣,數字和英文字母(除了羅馬字母),以及母語 可以由SCPM來輸 入。 數字或者英文字母可以被分派緊隨在母語相繼字符 之後。例如,日文字符按照患(代表性字符),t、(第二)、今(第 三)、之(第四)、枚第五)、U第六),.(第七)、q(第八)、2(第 九)等之次序分派。如果可以得到數字或者英文字母的控 制按鍵’用於类(代表性字符)、L、(第二)、5(第三)、乏(第 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先®讀背面之注意事項δ寫本頁) I-襄 訂: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 [282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 四)、和治(第五)的控制按鍵分派給一定的按鍵(例如 [*])並且數字或者英文字母的控制按鍵被分派給第二按鍵 (例如[#]),以致數字和英文字母以南(代表性字符)、以第 二)、·(第三)、q(第四)及z(第五)來輸入。例如,輸入這樣 給出,1=岛+ + [#]、·=岛+ [#] + [#] ^ p [#] + [#] + [#]= ?如果能構獲得,數字和英 文字母的控制按鍵分開提供。 這可以應·用於下面說明的其它語言和各種符號。 L.6英文字母字斿篡於發音的合紐 已有技術文獻以下面的方式爲每種語言構建一種小5. The invention description () ‘ has no effect. For example, r * , ] is not a long-sound control in the input buckle == do +[**] given below, and the county is voicing, because the basic character does not have a long sound, and it must be combined with voiced control. . Strictly select the superior θ of the control. You can enter the sub-payment that is not actually used. It is also possible to round the 'for example' Wen Lingwu including b and the suffix "··,, the imaginary character, and the Japanese language including the state, and the voiced point (v 〇icedsound ρ 〇int). Even if the control is heavily frosted Methodization, 丄 万 去 到 (RSM) to choose, only when the flag on the keypad is representative of iw, * pay T to pass the control program without much 'intentional input (for example, when button 1 is only right I - the value of the representative character 1, or even when the character is located on each button, the use of the land is used 4 such as the partial overall selection method (P WSM) and other meanings of the county When the input method is used, the sequent character can be input without ambiguity. The reason is that the multi-sense is eliminated by the control program because the control can represent not only the individual but also the combination of other characters to represent a specific character. H is controlled by the method of inputting numbers and English letters. The prior art documents describe the mother tongue, numbers and English letters "in order of proximity to BLE, and are selected by RASM in the same way. Similarly, numbers and English letters (except for the Roman alphabet), and the native language can be entered by SCPM. Numbers or English letters can be assigned immediately following the native character. For example, Japanese characters follow the (representative character), t, (second), present ( Third), (fourth), fifth (), U sixth), (seventh), q (eighth), 2 (ninth), etc., if you can get numbers or letters Control button 'for class (representative character), L, (second), 5 (third), lack (13th paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please First® read the back of the note δ write this page) I-襄: Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employees consumer cooperatives printed [282505 A7 B7 five, invention description () four), and governance (fifth) control button assignment Give a certain button ( Such as [*]) and the control keys of numbers or letters are assigned to the second button (such as [#]), so that the numbers and letters are south (representative characters), second (), (third), Enter q (fourth) and z (fifth). For example, enter the input, 1 = island + + [#], ·= island + [#] + [#] ^ p [#] + [#] + [#]= ? If it can be obtained, the control keys of numbers and English letters are provided separately. This can be used in other languages and symbols as explained below. L.6 English alphabets are in the pronunciation of the new ones. There is a technical literature to build a small language for each language in the following way.

GPM a „ , 0 # 於英文,-種廣泛使用的方法按照詞典的順序對三個或者 -^ ^ Μ,# ^ ^ ^ 樣,還可以針對發音的相似性來對字符八 < 刀組,並且將 字符組分派給每個數字鍵。例如,根據 佩知曰的相似性,英 文字母的子音落入下面的九個組中:GPM a „ , 0 # in English, a widely used method for the three or -^ ^ Μ, # ^ ^ ^ in the order of the dictionary, can also be used for the similarity of the pronunciation of the character eight < knife group, And assign the character component to each number key. For example, according to the similarity of the knowledge, the sub-tones of the English alphabet fall into the following nine groups:

W Y bp/csx/dt/fvh/gkq/J2/lr/mW Y bp/csx/dt/fvh/gkq/J2/lr/m

N 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製N Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing

/NY 中: bpv/csx/dt/Fh/Gkq/J2/Lr/m w 另一種選擇是,英文字母的子音落 浴入下面的八個組 BFPV/CGKQ/SX/DT/JZ/T r. j z / L R / M W Η / 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) Y Η 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明(/NY Medium: bpv/csx/dt/Fh/Gkq/J2/Lr/mw Another option is that the sub-tones of the English letters fall into the following eight groups BFPV/CGKQ/SX/DT/JZ/T r. jz / LR / MW Η / This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public meals) Y Η Ministry of Economic Affairs Smart Finance. Production Bureau Staff Consumption Cooperative Printed 1225025 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (

N YN Y

FPV/cgKQ/SX/DT/Jz/LR/MN/W 除了上述兩例,可以有其它的變化。五個母音適當地 认置在兩組子音中。這就保證了使用簡單代碼來應用快捷 輸入方法(SIM)的方便性,所述的簡單代碼將在後面說 明。對於非英文語言,鑑於母語語言和英文語言之間的發 音相似性y上述構建的字符組可以分派給每俩按鍵。對於 韓文例如,G、κ和Q —組分派給與G、κ和口發音相 似的字符Π ’的按鍵。對於日文,G、Κ和q —紅分派给 與G、Κ和q發音相似的字符“办,,的按鍵。因此,可以考 慮每種母語的分組模式來對英文字母進行分纟且。 2·基於語言的補充說明 在下文’透過下面的語言來給出針對已有技術文獻内 容的補充說明和改進。很明顯,儘管不是具體說明,涉及 某種語言的已有技術文獻的内容也可以應用於其它的語 言。 2.1 英文 如已有技術文獻所述,使用CPM在完全鍵盤上輸入 相繼字符,也可以輸入標記在鍵盤上的除了代表性字符的 英文字母。相繼控制,即第二和第三控制分派給相同的控 制按鍵(例如,按鍵[#])或者不同的按鍵(例如,按鍵[*]和 [#])。例如,可以認爲英文字母的A、B和c分派給公共 控制按鍵。如果代表性字符是A,則相繼字符3和C經過 15 本紙張尺度適用令國國家標準(CNSM4規格FPV/cgKQ/SX/DT/Jz/LR/MN/W In addition to the above two examples, there are other variations. The five vowels are properly recognized in the two sets of consonants. This ensures the convenience of applying a Quick Input Method (SIM) using simple code, which will be described later. For non-English languages, the character set constructed above can be assigned to each of the two buttons in view of the acoustic similarity between the native language and the English language. For Korean, for example, the G, κ, and Q-components are assigned to the keys of the characters Π ' similar to G, κ, and mouth pronunciation. For Japanese, G, Κ, and q—red are assigned to the characters “,”, which are similar to G, Κ, and q. Therefore, the alphabetic pattern of each native language can be considered to divide the English letters. Language-based Supplementary Notes In the following 'Additional descriptions and improvements to the content of prior art documents are given in the following language. Obviously, although not specifically stated, the content of prior art documents relating to a certain language can also be applied. Other languages 2.1 English As described in the prior art documents, CPM is used to input successive characters on a complete keyboard, and English letters other than representative characters marked on the keyboard can also be input. Successive control, ie second and third control Assign to the same control button (for example, button [#]) or a different button (for example, buttons [*] and [#]). For example, A, B, and C of English letters can be considered to be assigned to the common control button. If the representative character is A, the successive characters 3 and C are subject to 15 national paper standards (CNSM4 specifications).

1282505 五、發明說明( .相繼控制程序獨立輸入。否, ^ 如果代表性字符爲B ,則 相繼字符經過SCPM想六认 、scp_立輸入。鑑於已有技術文獻中說明 的使用頻率,可以規定代表性 — 代衣f生子付和相繼字符的附加優先 順序。1282505 V. INSTRUCTIONS (Successive control program independent input. No, ^ If the representative character is B, the successive characters are passed through the SCPM, and the scp_ vertical input. In view of the frequency of use described in the prior art, it can be specified Representation - the additional priority of the surrogate and subsequent characters.

例如田A爲a、B和』_組中的代表性字符並 且在輸入代表性字符之後,使用分派給按鍵[*]的第二和 第二控制來施加控制,則這樣得到輸入B = A+ {第二} = [2] C=A+{^}=[2] + [n+[,]〇 ^ B 付並且在輸入代表性字符之後,冑用分別分派給按鍵[*] 和同的第二和第三控制來施加控制,則這樣得到輸入 A=B+{^^} = [2] + r], ^ ^ C=B+{^ ^}= [2] + [#]〇 12 訂 不出了爲容易地辨認字符而設計的鍵盤的示例佈局,其中 每組字符的中間字符指定爲代表性字符,而相繼字符位於 代表性字符的左側和右側.。例如,D=E+ {第二丨二⑴+卜} 就權宜上而言,此種以輪入一鍵為一代表性字符、並 再利用控制程序加以其它字符之方式稱為“代表姓字符外 控制處理方法(Control Processing Method Except Representative Character (CPMERC))”。 在P、Q、R和S四個字符分派給按鍵[7],而w、x、 Y和Z四個字符分派給按鍵[9]的情况下,如同在已有技 術文獻中以韓文爲例所指出的那樣,按照這樣的方式適應 於PWSM :四個字符中的一個可以分派給形成垂直相鄰組 合(VAC)的網格單元,如圖圖卜3所示。 2.2 日文 16 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 » A7 --:______ B7 五、發明說明() 已有技術文獻說明,曰文字符針對日文的5〇音表來 分組,並且將态一列的字符,即為矣、扣妒、各$等用作代 表性字符而其它字符作爲相繼字符來進行相繼控制程序。 關於下表中同已有技術文獻的方法3 一樣的方式出現的 日文5〇音表,來確定相繼字符的附加優先順序。由於附 加優先順序的簡化,這樣會使使用者非常熟悉分級方法。 如同已有技術文獻中說明的那樣,乂可以看作屬於代表性 字符。另一種選擇是,50音表的字符(例如bv d或之)或者人 看作屬於〒或h 一列的空白。 文獻中之方法 音表的 j 基本 網格 早兀h 第 第 三 第 四 第 五 基本 網格 }元h_ 第 第 —一 9 第 第 五 a 才一 0 甘For example, field A is a representative character in the group a, B, and __ and after the representative character is input, the second and second controls assigned to the button [*] are used to apply the control, thus obtaining the input B = A + { Second} = [2] C=A+{^}=[2] + [n+[,]〇^ B Pay and after inputting the representative characters, assign them to the button [*] and the same second sum respectively The third control is to apply the control, so the input A=B+{^^} = [2] + r], ^ ^ C=B+{^ ^}= [2] + [#]〇12 can't be made An example layout of a keyboard designed to easily recognize characters, wherein the middle character of each set of characters is designated as a representative character, and the successive characters are located to the left and right of the representative character. For example, D=E+ {2nd 2nd (1) + Bu} In terms of expediency, this way of taking a key into a representative character and then using the control program to add other characters is called "representing the surname character. Control Processing Method Except Representative Character (CPMERC). In the case where the four characters P, Q, R, and S are assigned to the button [7], and the four characters w, x, Y, and Z are assigned to the button [9], as in the prior art, Korean is taken as an example. As indicated, the PWSM is adapted in such a way that one of the four characters can be assigned to a grid unit forming a vertical adjacent combination (VAC), as shown in Figure 3b. 2.2 Japanese 16 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 » A7 --:______ B7 V. Invention description () Description of prior art documents, 曰 characters for Japanese 5〇 The sound tables are grouped, and the characters of one column, that is, 矣, 妒, each $, etc. are used as representative characters and the other characters are successive characters to perform successive control programs. The Japanese 5 voice table appearing in the same manner as the method 3 of the prior art document in the following table is used to determine the additional priority order of successive characters. This simplifies the prioritization, which makes the user very familiar with the grading method. As explained in the prior art document, 乂 can be regarded as belonging to a representative character. Another option is that the characters of the 50-note table (for example, bv d or ) or the person sees a blank belonging to the 〒 or h column. The method in the literature j basic grid of the sound table early 兀h the third third fourth fifth basic grid } yuan h_ first - ninth

TT

AJ $ fc 才一 予 tAJ $ fc is only one

考/ /V 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ώTest / /V Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing ώ

CA i >b h/ jCA i >b h/ j

I δ 打 Λ- CD (Ϊ JvI δ 打 Λ - CD (Ϊ Jv

〇) ti〇) ti

7 IX h/ tj^s i) 上 h 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公爱) 1282505 ψ Α7 Β7 五、發明說明( 儘管已有技術文獻說明第一列的字符很方便地指定 爲代表性字符’而代表性字符可以在任何一列中或者是屬 於該組的任何字符,如同已有技術文獻中所說明的那樣, 每一行的字符可以按照鍵盤上按鍵的行(即⑴乂⑺、[3]、 [4]、…)來分派給每偭按鍵。或者按照按鍵列(即』3]、[6]、 [9]、[2]、[5 ]、··.)來分派。另一種選擇是,可以隨意分派 而不是按照行或者列來向每個按鍵分派字符。、 以日文爲例,已有技術文獻說明了當“人,,安排在按 鍵[〇]的基本網格單元的位置時,使用分別分派給按鍵[*] 和按鍵[#]的第二和第三控制,“V,被分派給除了按鍵[0] 之外的數宇按鍵,以便將按鍵[〇]作爲控制按鍵,用於輸 入長音/濁音./半濁音。而不是使用按照與BLE的接近次序 (OPBLE)而爲長音/濁音/半濁音而附加設置的控制按鍵, 來將“凡”設置在按鍵[0]的基本網格單元的位置。然後 RSM可以適應於控制選擇,因爲不會有“人,,在一個字中 出現不連續的情况。如圖2-1所示。使用對應按鍵的一次 擊鍵和該按鍵的兩次,三次或者更多次擊鍵的其它控制, 這種選擇字中不連續出現的一個字符的方法可以應用到 所有其它的語言中。這個特性也應用在後面說明的使用韓 文母音的方法中。 2.3 阿拉伯文 阿拉伯文中有28個子音,根據已有技術文獻,表示 數字的阿拉伯文子音被分組,並且分派給小鍵盤上的每個 18 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) C請先Μ讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 12825057 IX h/ tj^si) On the paper scale applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 297 297 public) 1282505 ψ Α7 Β7 V. Invention description (although the technical literature indicates that the characters in the first column are very Conveniently designated as a representative character' and representative characters can be in any column or any character belonging to the group, as explained in the prior art document, each line of characters can follow the lines of the keys on the keyboard (ie (1) 乂(7), [3], [4], ...) are assigned to each button, or according to the button column (ie, 3], [6], [9], [2], [5], .... Another option is to assign characters to each button instead of rows or columns. In Japanese, for example, the prior art document explains the basics of "people, arranged in the button [〇] When the position of the grid unit is used, the second and third controls respectively assigned to the button [*] and the button [#] are used, and "V, is assigned to the number button other than the button [0], so that the button is pressed [ 〇] as a control button for inputting long/voiced sounds/semi-voiced sounds instead of using The control button that is additionally set for long/voiced/small voiced sounds in close proximity to BLE (OPBLE) is used to set “Where” at the position of the basic grid unit of button [0]. Then RSM can be adapted to control selection. Because there is no "person, there is a discontinuity in a word. As shown in Figure 2-1. One keystroke with the corresponding button and two times for the button, three or more keystrokes. Control, this method of selecting one character that does not appear consecutively can be applied to all other languages. This feature is also applied in the method of using Korean vowels described later. 2.3 Arabic Arabic has 28 consonants, according to The prior art literature indicates that the Arabic subtones of the numbers are grouped and assigned to each of the 18 paper sizes on the keypad for the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 meals). C Please read the back Note written on this page) - Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printed 1282505

五、發明說明( 鍵,表^TfC承^小^ . 子的予付指定爲代表性字符,並安排在基 本網格單元的位署 置’其它的字符按照與BLE的接近次序 (OPBLE)分派給小餘仏 鍵盤上的按鍵。已有技術文獻提供一種 透過控制程序的方式^ # 飞输入羅馬、韓國、北印度和阿拉伯字 符的方法。他摄担 疋扶供一種輸入阿拉伯字符的方法;在其 中罕用的母音看作詞綴並且進行詞綴控制程序。 現在下面將給出一種關於控制程序(即相繼控制程 序)阿拉伯:·文子音的方法的說明。下表顯示了每個按鍵上 阿拉伯手音的示例佈局。V. Description of the invention (key, table ^TfC承^小^. The subpayment is specified as a representative character, and is arranged in the basic grid unit. The other characters are assigned in the order of proximity to BLE (OPBLE). Give the keys on the keyboard of Xiao Yu's keyboard. The prior art literature provides a way to input Roman, Korean, North Indian and Arabic characters by means of a control program. #飞 疋 一种 一种 一种 。 。 。 。 。 输入 输入 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马 罗马The rare vowels are treated as affixes and the affix control program is performed. Now, a description will be given of a method for controlling the program (ie, successive control programs) of Arabic: · phonon. The following table shows the Arabic timbre on each button. Example layout.

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7B7 五、發明說明( 單元 字符 意義 第 三 (3 200 300 4 ο 11This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7B7 V. Description of the invention (unit character meaning third (3 200 300 4 ο 11)

I- CJ t 3 單元字符 (請先¾讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) »!裝 11¾ 意義 第 四 ο έI- CJ t 3 unit characters (Please write the following on the back of the page) »! Install 113⁄4 Meaning Fourth ο έ

ο 1X 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 單 元 字符 第一 組 第 組 第 組 第四組 第五組 20 第 六 組 第七組 第八組 第九組 第十組 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)ο 1X Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office Staff Counseling Cooperative Printed Unit Characters Group 1 Group Group Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 6 Group 8 Group 8 Group 10 Group Paper Size Applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 字 符 在分派給按鍵[1]表示爲1、10和100的字符中表 示1的字符指定爲代表性字符,而其它表示1 q或者〗〇( 的字符進行相繼控制程序,如同已有技術文獻中說明的一 樣,任何按鍊都可以指定爲控制按鍵。如果相繼控制按鍵 分派給按鍵[*],使用安排的第二和第三控制,、就能構以 平均兩次擊鍵來輸入子音。因爲每個按鍵僅僅分派給一個 字符,所以不必要由PWSM選擇標記在按鍵上的字符。字 符的安排是槪念上的;因此,如後所述,字符不會分配給 小鍵盤。 根據已有技術文獻,如在日文的情况下一樣,相繼控 制作爲另一個按鍵而分開。例如,當第三控制分派給按鍵 [#] ’輸入擊鍵的平均數目大約是丨7( = ( 1 + 2 + 2)/3),並 且同已有技術文獻中所述的一樣,可以沒有多意性地輸入 2 8個子音。 經濟部智慧財i局員工消費合作社印製 本發明將表示最小數字的字符指定爲每一組的代表 性子符,並且選擇其它單兀的相繼字符中較小數字的字 符’而與使用頻率无關。可以在輪入代表性字符之前或者 之後設定要被選擇的控制。 如果隨* 1料的帛符指定爲代表性字符相繼控制 都分派給按鍵[*],並且在代表輪入之前選擇控制’則1C 單元的輸人這樣給出‘[”〜和〜中]+[*]+y。對於其它 21 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297^JT-- .1282505Character Characters Characters Characters Characters Characters Characters Characters Characters Characters are assigned to the character represented by the key assigned to the button [1] as 1, 10, and 100, and the other characters representing 1 q or 〇 〇 are successively performed. The control program, as explained in the prior art document, can be designated as a control button by any chain. If the successive control buttons are assigned to the button [*], the second and third controls can be used to construct an average. Two keystrokes are used to input the consonant. Since each key is only assigned to one character, it is not necessary for the PWSM to select the character marked on the key. The arrangement of the characters is mournful; therefore, as will be described later, the characters will not Assigned to the keypad. According to the prior art document, as in the case of Japanese, successive controls are separated as another button. For example, when the third control is assigned to the button [#] 'the average number of input keystrokes is approximately 丨7( = ( 1 + 2 + 2)/3), and as described in the prior art document, it is possible to input 28 sub-tones without intentionality. The invention discloses that the character indicating the smallest number is designated as a representative sub-character of each group, and the character of the smaller number of the successive characters of the other single-keys is selected, regardless of the frequency of use. Set the control to be selected before or after the representative character is rounded in. If the 帛 character of the material is specified as a representative character, the successive control is assigned to the button [*], and the control is selected before the wheel is entered. The input of this gives '["~~~中]+[*]+y. For other 21^ paper scales, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297^JT-- .1282505) is applied.

II

五、發明說明() 的字符執行相同的步驟。在這種情况下,按鍵[#]可以用 於母音控制程序。 如果在輸入代表性字符之前使用僅一個表示1000,分 派給按鍵[0]的字符來應用控制,則輸入.這樣給出.= [0]。表示1000的字符可以作爲那些屬於第一組的字符來 處理,在這種情况下,輸人這樣給出:卜[*]+[*]+門十、。 另-種選擇是,由於表示100的字符具有這樣的形式:在 其中上點被加於表示70的字符,即所以在控制程序 中,上方點控制優先選擇給各種母音控制。這就是說,如 果控制在輸入字符之前施加於上方點控制,則輸入這樣給 出色一 {上方點控制}+匕。另一個包括上方點的字符也可以 使用ACPM和其它輸入方法同時輸入。在這種情况下,將 按鍵[0]用作爲控制按鍵以用於其它目的(如母音控制按鍵) 就變得非常容易。 如果第三控制(即1 〇〇單元控制)單獨地分派給按鍵 [#],則表示200的字符這樣給出+ 。另一種選擇 是,輸入j為j =[*] + [*] + ¥,同拫據已有技術文獻在曰文 的情况下一樣。如果表示1 〇〇〇的字符屬於第一組字符, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 --------- 丨· 裝 i I (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 並且控制在輸入字符之前應用,則輸入為色= [*] + [*] + [*] +色或者色=[#] + [#]+色。這就是說,第二、第三 和第四控制分派給按鍵[*],第三和第四控制分派給按鍵 [#]。考慮到阿拉伯人從左向右書寫,可以將第二、第三 和第四控制分派給按鍵[#],而第三和第四控制分派給按 鍵[*] 〇 22 ' 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 12825〇5 五、發明說明() · I I (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 這意味着頻繁使用的字符,即阿拉伯文子音平均以 1·7次擊鍵沒有多意性地輸入。有利之處在於,拫容易選 擇沒有標記在小鍵盤上的字符(如1單元字符,即代表味 字符)。這就是說,本發明可以應用在輸入日常生活中需 要的字符(如阿拉伯文中的子音)的僅標記數字的小鍵 盤,僅當使用者清楚關於單元字符指定爲給定的代表性字 符或者分派給給定的控制按鍵以及相繼控制次序的規 則,當分派給單一的控制按鍵,或者控制是否設,置爲在代 表性字符之前被選擇。 •f 如已有技術文獻中所述,能構執行母音的控制程序。 當旣使用按鍵[#]又使用按鍵[*]來進行子音控制程序時, 表示1000的字符不分派給按鍵[0]’而是分派給按鍵[1], 以便將按鍵[·〇]指定爲母音控制按鍵,並且以RSM的方式 輸入作爲詞綴的母音(例如,母音控制或者詞綴控制),如 同根據已有技術文獻中在日文的情况下一樣。按照使用頻 率的次序處理該按鍵的次數’這假方法選擇母音控制(母 音作爲詞綴)。如果僅使用單一按鍵[*]作爲子音的相繼控 制按鍵,母音的控制按鍵可以是按鍵[#],或者旣是按鍵[#] 又是按鍵[〇]。 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 在圖3 -1及圖3 - 2的示例中’儘管表示1到9的字符 (1單元字符)被指定爲每一組的代表性字符,但是每一組 中使用頻率最高的字符可以是代表性字符。爲避免混淆, 代表性字符可以是1單元字符(表示1到9的字符),1 〇單 元字符(表示10到90的字符),·和100單元字符(表示1〇〇 23 . 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)5. The characters of the invention () perform the same steps. In this case, the button [#] can be used for the vowel control program. If only one of the representations 1000 is used before the representative character is entered, the character assigned to the button [0] is applied to apply the control, then input. This gives .= [0]. Characters representing 1000 can be treated as those belonging to the first group. In this case, the input is given by: [[] + [*] + door ten. Alternatively, since the character representing 100 has a form in which the upper point is added to the character representing 70, that is, in the control program, the upper point control is preferentially selected for various vowel controls. That is to say, if the control is applied to the upper point control before the character is input, the input gives an excellent {upper point control} + 匕. Another character that includes the upper point can also be entered simultaneously using ACPM and other input methods. In this case, it is very easy to use the button [0] as a control button for other purposes (such as the vowel control button). If the third control (ie, 1 unit control) is individually assigned to the button [#], the character representing 200 is given as +. Another option is to enter j as j = [*] + [*] + ¥, which is the same as in the case of the prior art. If the character indicating 1 属于 belongs to the first group of characters, the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative prints --------- 丨 · Install i I (please read the back note first) And the control is applied before the input character, then the input is color = [*] + [*] + [*] + color or color = [#] + [#] + color. That is to say, the second, third and fourth controls are assigned to the button [*], and the third and fourth controls are assigned to the button [#]. Considering that the Arabs write from left to right, the second, third and fourth controls can be assigned to the button [#], and the third and fourth controls are assigned to the button [*] 〇22 ' Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 12825〇5 V. Invention description () · II (Please read the back note first.) This means frequently used characters, namely Arabic The average sound is input with no more than one-seven keystrokes. Advantageously, it is easy to select characters that are not marked on the keypad (such as a 1-cell character, which represents a flavor character). That is to say, the present invention can be applied to a numeric only keypad for inputting characters (such as sub-tones in Arabic) required for daily life, only when the user clearly specifies that the unit character is designated as a given representative character or assigned to The given control buttons and rules for successive control orders are assigned to a single control button, or control is set to be selected before the representative character. • f The control program for the vowel can be constructed as described in the prior art. When using the button [#] and the button [*] for the consonant control program, the character indicating 1000 is not assigned to the button [0] but is assigned to the button [1], so that the button [·〇] is designated as The vowel control button and the vowel as the affix (for example, vowel control or affix control) are input in the form of RSM, as in the case of Japanese in the prior art document. The number of times the button is processed in the order of frequency of use' is a false method of selecting the vowel control (matrix as an affix). If only a single button [*] is used as the successive control buttons for the consonant, the control button for the vowel can be the button [#], or the button [#] and the button [〇]. In the example of Figure 3-1 and Figure 2-3, the Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office employee levy cooperatives' prints the characters (1 unit character) indicating 1 to 9 as the representative characters of each group, but each The most frequently used characters in a group can be representative characters. To avoid confusion, representative characters can be 1 unit character (representing 1 to 9 characters), 1 unit unit character (representing 10 to 90 characters), and 100 unit characters (representing 1〇〇23. This paper size applies. China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

1282505 五、發明說明() .到900的字符)中的任何字符。在圖3_3所示例中,每一 當作代表性字符之1〇_單元字符位於每一組字符之中央, 其它位於1〇-單元字符左右側之字符(100-單元字符及1- 皁兀字符)由左右側之控制鍵以控制程序輸入之。 。同樣,相繼控制選擇的字符可以是每個基於使用頻率 的單元字符。例如,如果使用頻率最高的1〇〇單元字符被 指定爲代表性字符,並且在使用頻岸上,]單元字符緊隨 1 00單元子符之後,就能構使用第二控制(即1單元控制) 和代表性子符的组合來輸入i00單元字符,並能使用第三 控制(即10單元控制)和代表性字符的組合來輸入1〇單元 字符。 如已有技術文獻所述,相繼字符可以由CPM輸入, 能構在已有技術文獻的小鍵盤上由叱⑽輸入子音,並由 ACPM輸入母音。如果在3*4小鍵盤上,按鍵剛定爲母 音的詞綴控制按鍵,則子音輸入的控制按鍵旣可以是按鍵 [I又可以是按鍵[#]。 2.4 m ± 控制之#用 圖4-1、4-2及4-3所示為一種輪入方法,其中成對 的韓文基本子音與基本母音設於—單—按鍵上,且標記於 盤上之母基本子音與基本母音係以重覆選擇程序之 :式輸入之。在圖4_、中’氣聲字音、緊促子音、及長母 :係以控制程序輸入之。在圖4·2中,氣聲字音及緊促子 音係以控制程序輸入之。在圖4_3中,氣聲字音、緊促子 24 本紙張尺度翻t關家標"ilcSs)A4規格(21。:297公g ) ------------ΛΙΙ ^--- (請先¾讀背面之注意事項*^寫本頁) Λ.ΗΒ · · 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 • A7 . ...... _ •'丨 - - __ — 五、發明說明() •音、基本母音及長母音係以控制程序輸入之。 1_·4·2編蘧 圖4-4不僅是實現本發明的流程圖,而且能構使編程 更有效。例如,在考慮到圖4_4的末子音的情况下,透過 •檢査子音是否形成兩個末子音來更有效地編程。 已有技術文獻中提出的韓文的示例可以應用於其它 具有相似特徵(即具子音與母音交替出現的結構)的語言 中。對於其他的語言,可以考慮相應語言中子音、和母音出 現的特徵。 舉例而言,以基本子音與基本母音輸入之北印度語輸 入糸統亦付與知文輸入方式輸入,不過此仍需在顧及北印 度語之特徵的條件下進行之。北印度語輸入系統之建立較 韓文為易,因其子音與母音外表規則較韓文簡單。 北印膚語 根據本申請的已有技術文獻,北印度語的子音分爲9 (請先B3讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) »!裝 訂 中 用 適 度 尺 張 紙 _一本 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製·1282505 V. Invention description (). Any character in the character of 900). In the example shown in Figure 3_3, each 当作_unit character that is a representative character is located in the center of each group of characters, and other characters on the left and right sides of the 〇-unit character (100-unit characters and 1-sapon characters) ) The control buttons are input by the control buttons on the left and right sides. . Similarly, the characters selected in succession can be each unit character based on the frequency of use. For example, if the most frequently used 1 unit character is specified as a representative character, and on the frequency bank, the unit character follows the 100 unit symbol, then the second control (ie, 1 unit control) can be constructed. A combination of a sub-character and a representative sub-character is used to input the i00 unit character, and a combination of the third control (ie, 10-unit control) and the representative character can be used to input the 1-inch unit character. As described in the prior art documents, successive characters can be input by the CPM, and the sub-tones can be input from the keyboard (10) on the keypad of the prior art document, and the vowels can be input by the ACPM. If the suffix control button is just set to the vowel on the 3*4 keypad, the control button 子 of the sub-input can be the button [I can also be the button [#]. 2.4 m ± Control # Use Figure 4-1, 4-2 and 4-3 to show a wheeling method in which the pair of Korean basic consonants and basic vowels are set on the - single button and marked on the disc. The mother's basic consonant and the basic vowel are repeated to select the program: In Figure 4_, the 'Anesic sound, the tight consonant, and the long mother are input by the control program. In Fig. 4. 2, the vocal and consonant sub-tones are input by the control program. In Figure 4_3, the vocal sound, the tightness of the paper, the size of the paper is turned over, and the standard of the household is "ilcSs) A4 specification (21: 297 g) ------------ ΛΙΙ ^--- (Please read the following notes on the back *^ write this page) Λ.ΗΒ · · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printed 1225025 • A7 ....... _ • '丨- - __ — V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION () • The sound, basic vowel, and long mother sound are input by the control program. 1_·4·2 Compilation Figure 4-4 is not only a flowchart for implementing the present invention, but also enables programming to be more efficient. For example, in consideration of the last consonant of Fig. 4_4, it is more efficiently programmed by checking whether or not the consonant forms two final consonants. The Korean example proposed in the prior art document can be applied to other languages having similar features (i.e., structures in which sub-tones and vowels alternate). For other languages, consider the characteristics of the consonants and vowels in the corresponding language. For example, the Hindi input system with basic consonant and basic vowel input is also entered in the knowledge input mode, but this still needs to be carried out taking into account the characteristics of the Northern Indian language. The establishment of the Hindi input system is easier than that of the Korean language, because its consonant and vowel appearance rules are simpler than Korean. According to the prior art documents of this application, the Hindi sub-sounds are divided into 9 (please write the following on the back of the B3 reading) »! Use a moderate piece of paper in the binding _ a Ministry of Economics intellectual property Bureau staff levy cooperatives printed ·

1282505 A7 ♦ _____B7 _ 五、發明說明() .個組,它們分派給按鍵[1]到[9],並且使用按鍵[0]的一次 擊鍵來選擇分派給按鍵的母音。爲了 一致性,在本發 明中,將子音分爲10個組,以便使用相應按鍵的一次擊 鍵來選擇代表性子音,並使用兩次擊鍵來選擇1 〇個母 •音。母音(ri)不分配給小鍵盤並且它極少由CPM來處理。 可以考慮用已有技術文獻中所述的發音相似性來實現將 子音分爲10個組。下面給出了將子音分爲1〇個組的示例。 當北印度語的第一母音3T (a)位於兩個子音之間時, 則忽略匕。這就疋說’子音要相繼出現。在這種情况下, 當輸入“子音+ —一(a) +子音時,顯示“子音+子音,,是很 容易的。當然,輸入也可以這樣給出“子音+子音“,在 這種情况下’連續輸入相同的代表性子音,並且兩個子立 會被誤認爲一個母音。(自動忽略母音—〜(a)或者由使用者 來忽略)都是允許的。 2.6 緬甸語 細甸語中有33個子音。下面給出了 9個子音組的示例 。另一種選择是’子音按照相同的形式分爲1〇個組。 - ---------------I (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項'^寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 26 用 適 度 尺 張 Μ 公 7 29 X 10 2 /V 格 規 Α4 S) Ν (C 準 標 國 國 .Ϊ2825051282505 A7 ♦ _____B7 _ V. Invention description (). Groups, which are assigned to buttons [1] to [9], and use the one-click button of button [0] to select the vowel assigned to the button. For consistency, in the present invention, the consonants are divided into 10 groups to select a representative consonant using a single keystroke of the corresponding button, and two keystrokes are selected using two keystrokes. The vowel (ri) is not assigned to the keypad and it is rarely handled by the CPM. It is conceivable to divide the sub-tones into 10 groups using the pronunciation similarity described in the prior art documents. An example of dividing a consonant into one group is given below. When the first vowel 3T (a) of Hindi is between two consonants, 匕 is ignored. This is to say that the sub-tones have to appear one after another. In this case, when the "consonant + - one (a) + consonant is input, the "consonant + consonant" is displayed, which is very easy. Of course, the input can also give "consonant + consonant" in this case, in which case the same representative consonant is continuously input, and the two sub-notes are mistaken for a vowel. (Automatically ignore vowels - ~ (a) or ignored by the user) are allowed. 2.6 Burmese There are 33 consonants in the fine language. An example of nine subtone groups is given below. Another option is that the sub-tones are divided into 1 group in the same form. - ---------------I (Please read the note on the back first ^^ write this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau staff levy cooperatives printed 26 with moderate size Zhang Gong 7 29 X 10 2 /V Grid Rule 4 S) Ν (C State Standards. Ϊ 282505

!2825〇5 五、發明說明() .相繼控制鍵不用於作為相繼控制鍵(就權宜上言,稱作,,相 對控制鍵”(相對控制鍵)。 舉例而言,輸入為、、=、、+,,相對控制鍵,,=态+[*] + [#] 及' =«1 + 相對控制鍵”=力、+[#卜[#] + [*]。當了解的是, •在控制處理方法中,以為基本字符之詞綴時,不用為輸入 時之控制鍵之相對控制鍵用係作為詞綴之控制鍵。本案申 請人於文獻中所載之跳躍控制處理方法(,,Jump control Processing Method”(JCPM))亦可用於本例中。以事列類型 (chain-type)控制處理方法之觀點而言,每敲擊一次相對控 制鍵便選擇了 一前輸入字元(如二)之詞綴輸入的「下一 控制」。 由於列上字元具有兩個詞綴(即濁音及半濁音),此時 以敲擊相對控制鍵一次代表長音,而以敲擊相對控制鍵兩 次代表半濁音:亦即,輪入方式為n、+“相對控制鍵,,= 过們+[*]+[#]、^丄十“相對控制鍵兩:欠” =(± +[*]+[*]+[#]+[#] 〇 然而,上述方法卻不得用於目和空4 ㈡鈿子付之基本字符為一 代表字符之狀況下。在此狀況時,抑矣& ^ _ 代表性字符之詞綴另由 相繼控制鍵負責,以此方式輸入目標字元。 舉例而言,[*]鍵用以輸入代表性宋 ./ 农注子付之詞綴(長音、 濁音或半濁音),其輸入原則為态 幻十ί ] + [*] + [*];亦即, 代表性字符之詞綴(長音、濁音或半潘立 丁碉曰)被當作地四相繼 字符,其可以[*]鍵輸入。此等規則歸納於以下表格。 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----------裝· (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項窝本頁) 15J· · 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 1282505 A7 ^__B7 五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 代 表 性 字 符 第 第 第 四 第 五 第 四 第 五 第 六 第 七 h i 1 英 文 1 〇 英 文 2 Q 英 文 3 Z 符 號 1 1 相 對 控 制 鍵 < ct ¥ 2 En gH sh 1 A En gH sh 2 B En gH sh 3 C 符 號 1 ί、、 C tf >、、 相 對 控 9 2 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項S寫本頁) »!裝 訂-· [*]鍵 [#]鍵 [*]或[#]鍵(如 [*]鍵) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 制 鍵 … (± lh (Ϊ l£' ti° 6 英 文 1 Μ 英 文 2 Ν 英 文 3 0 ίί' 相 對 控 制 鍵 δΛ° ir 相 對 控 制 鍵 J: X 相 對 控 制 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公g ) A7 B7 1282505 ψ 五、發明說明() (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項^寫本頁) 上述利用相對控制鍵以擴大控制鍵功能範圍而释輸 入更多字符等之方法稱作“交又控制處理方法(Cross Control Processing Method(CCPM))”、“曲折控制方法 (Zigzag Control Processing Method(ZCCP))’’或“多維交叉 控制處理(Multi-dimensional Cross Control Processing (MCCP)),,,其可用於控制鍵數為三個或超過三個之時。 很明顯地,以上表格除第一行以外之空白亦可用於其 他字元或各種符號之輸入。以上述例子說明之,相對控制 鍵所需者僅為一個;亦即,當:的輸入原則為义=丄+“相 對控制鍵兩次+[*] + [*] + [#] + [#}時,相繼控制鍵[*]便 因一相對控制鍵[#]而需予敲擊,其方式為重覆選擇該相 對控制鍵。就權宜上言,該方法稱作”二維交叉控制處理 方法(2 CCPM)’’或“二階段交叉控制處理(Two-staged Cross Control Processing)’’ 〇 經濟部智慧財j局員工湞費合作社印製 亦即,一字符利用一控制鍵而輸入之方式稱作“ 一維交 叉控制處理(One-dimensional Cross Control Processing (1CCP))”,即說明控制鍵之使用係為一維之方式。相反 地,一字符需利用兩不同控制鍵之輸入方式稱作,’二維(交 叉)控制處理方法(Two-dimensional (Cross) Control Processing Method)”。以C、、為c之詞綴為例,其輸入原則 為=二+’·相對控制鍵π =小+ [#] + [#] + [*]。 雖然相對控 31 @張尺度it用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210><297公釐] 1282505 A7 五、發明說明( 經 濟 .部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 .制鍵係作為代表性字符G、<)之第一及第二相繼字符之 輸入用,但本例中相對控制鍵([*]鍵)係用作為之詞綴輸入 的詞綴控制鍵。當能了解的是,—維輸入方式係、以—控制 鍵為之,字符之’,二維,,輸入方式便係以二控制鍵為之。 輸入原則亦可為:=丄+" 一次相對控制鍵,,+ ”前次控 制鍵之相對控㈣―次”=以[*卜+ + 。若不可該 由重覆敲擊一控制鍵(上次輸入义所甩;如[#]鍵)而輪入一 綴詞,那麼前次相對控制.鍵所用之相對控制鍵可再次被使 用以輸入另一綴祠或相繼字符。就權宜上而言,該方法 稱作“三維交叉控制處理(Three dimensi〇nal Cr〇ss Control Processing(3ccp)),,或“三階段交叉控制處 (Th^e-Staged Cross c〇ntr〇1 pr〇cessing)” ;該等名稱即 表不鍵盤上各字符可加輸入次數在利用多維控制處理々 法時為可無限延伸者。再者,前讀人字符相關之相繼字 符或岡綴藉由控制處理方法即可達輸入目的。 以上敘述可由圖2_3中圖示得到理解其以具有兩 綴(濁音及半濁音)之(汰歹4字符為例說明。在目2_3中 著以淺色、並為圓圈所標記之“...H —另外的字符或 號,其可利用多維控制處理方法而以相似之方式輸入( 需輸入時)’以將另一字符或符號輪至上述表格之空 中。在圖2_”,[”及㈤鍵在正交方向上各被使用。 在本案中請人所提出之先前文獻中,非為五十音表 中代表性字符之第二至第五控制由[”鍵負責,而長音 音及半濁音等詞綴之輸入則由[*]鍵當作控制鍵,此說 理 在 方 詞 (若 濁 明 (請先Mtt背面之注意事項η 一裝—— ?寫本頁) . 32 1282505 ------- B7 五、發明說明() .S亥先前文獻中亦使用及二維控制處理;亦即,二控制按鍵 在輸入時的輸入原則為、、=1、+{詞綴卜P +[*] + [#]。在本案 申請人所發表之先前文獻中,控制鍵僅作為相繼(第一、 第二、第三、第四或第五)控制鍵或詞綴(I音、濁音或半 濁音)控制鍵。本發明之二維控制處理中者則不然,在一 相繼控制鍵輸入完畢後,其相繼控制鍵亦可作為詞綴控制 鍵;此主要控制鍵(在上例中為相繼控制鍵)之再被使用作 為詞綴控制鍵之作法稱作“二維再使用控制處瑝 (Two-dimensional Reuse Control Processing (2RCP))55 ^ “二維多重使用控制處理(Two-dimensi〇nal Multi use!2825〇5 V. Inventive Note (). The successive control keys are not used as successive control keys (for convenience, called, relative control keys) (relative control keys). For example, the input is , , =, , +,, relative control keys,, = state + [*] + [#] and ' =«1 + relative control keys" = force, +[#卜[#] + [*]. When understood, • In the control processing method, when the affix of the basic character is used, the relative control key of the control key at the time of input is not used as the control key of the affix. The jump control processing method (Applied by the applicant in the document) (Jump control) The Processing Method" (JCPM) can also be used in this example. From the point of view of the chain-type control processing method, each time the relative control key is tapped, a previous input character is selected (eg, two). The suffix input "next control". Since the character on the column has two affixes (ie, voiced and semi-voiced), at this time, the relative control key is used to represent the long sound once, and the relative control key is twice to represent the half. Voiced: that is, the rounding mode is n, + "relative control key, == ++[*]+[#],^丄10 “relative control keys two: owe” =(± +[*]+[*]+[#]+[#] However, the above method cannot be used for the purpose And the space 4 (2) 钿 付 付 付 付 付 付 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 In other words, the [*] key is used to input the suffix (long, dull or semi-voiced) of the representative Song./Nong Note, the input principle is the state of the magic 10 ί ] + [*] + [*]; The suffix of the representative character (long, voiced or semi-Pandit) is treated as a four-sequence character, which can be entered by the [*] key. These rules are summarized in the following table. 28 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) -----------Installation (Please read the back of the note on the front page) 15J· · Ministry of Economic Affairs, wisdom and wealth. System 1282505 A7 ^__B7 V. Invention Description () Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing representative characters fourth, fourth, fourth, fifth Sixth seventh hi 1 English 1 〇 English 2 Q English 3 Z Symbol 1 1 Relative control key < ct ¥ 2 En gH sh 1 A En gH sh 2 B En gH sh 3 C Symbol 1 ί,, C tf > , , Relative control 9 2 (Please read the note on the back S to write this page) »! Staple-· [*] button [#] button [*] or [#] button (such as [*] button) This paper The scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (Ministry of Economics and Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing key... (± lh (Ϊ l£' ti° 6 English 1 Μ English 2 Ν English 3 0 ίί' Relative control key δΛ° ir Relative control key J: X Relative control The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 297 297 g) A7 B7 1282505 ψ V. Invention Explanation () (Please read the precautions on the back ^ Write this page) The above method of using the relative control keys to expand the function range of the control keys and inputting more characters is called " "Cross Control Processing Method (CCPM)", "Zigzag Control Processing Method (ZCCP)" or "Multi-dimensional Cross Control Processing (MCCP)), It can be used to control three or more keys. Obviously, blanks other than the first line in the above table can also be used for input of other characters or symbols. As illustrated by the above example, the relative control key is only required for one; that is, when the input principle of : is meaning = 丄 + "relative control key twice + [*] + [*] + [#] + [# }, the successive control key [*] needs to be tapped due to a relative control key [#], which is to repeatedly select the relative control key. It is expedient to say that the method is called "two-dimensional cross control processing method" (2 CCPM) ''or 'Two-staged Cross Control Processing'' 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈 浈"One-dimensional Cross Control Processing (1CCP)" means that the use of control keys is one-dimensional. Conversely, a character needs to be called by two different control keys. 'Two-dimensional (Cross) Control Processing Method). Taking C and C as suffixes as an example, the input principle is = two +'. Relative control key π = small + [#] + [#] + [*]. Although the relative control 31 @张scaleit uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 >< 297 mm) 1282505 A7 V. Invention Description (The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Intellectual Property, employee consumption cooperatives printed. Key system as a representative The first and second consecutive characters of the character G, <) are used for input, but in this example, the relative control key ([*] key) is used as the affix control key input by the affix. When it can be understood that - The dimension input method is the control key, the character ', two-dimensional, and the input mode is the second control key. The input principle can also be: =丄+" a relative control key, + ” The relative control of the previous control key (four) - times" = [* Bu + +. If it is not possible to repeatedly hit a control key (the last time input meaning; such as [#] key) and turn in a suffix Then, the relative control keys used in the previous relative control. The keys can be used again to input another conjugate or successive characters. In terms of expedient, the method is called "three-dimensional cross-control processing (Three dimensi〇nal Cr〇ss Control Processing (3ccp)), or "three-stage cross control" (Th^e-Staged Cross c〇ntr〇1 pr〇cessing)"; these names indicate that the number of characters on the keyboard can be added infinitely when using the multi-dimensional control method. In addition, the former The successive characters or splicing related to the reading character can be used for input purposes by controlling the processing method. The above description can be understood by the illustration in Fig. 2_3, which has two suffixes (voiced and semi-voiced). Description: In item 2_3, "...H - another character or number marked with a circle, which can be input in a similar manner (when input is required) using a multidimensional control processing method" Another character or symbol is in the air above the table. In Figure 2_", the [" and (5) keys are used in the orthogonal direction. In the previous document proposed by the applicant, it is not in the syllabary. The second to fifth controls of the representative characters are responsible for the [] key, while the input of the affixes such as long and semi-voiced sounds is used as the control key by the [*] key, which is said to be in the square word (if the cloud is clear (please first Mtt) Note on the back η 一装—? Write this page) . 32 1282505 ----- -- B7 V. Inventive Note (). The previous document of S Hai also uses and two-dimensional control processing; that is, the input principle of the two control buttons at the time of input is 1, +1, + { suffix P + [*] + [#]. In the previous literature published by the applicant in this case, the control keys are only used as successive (first, second, third, fourth or fifth) control keys or affixes (I, voiced or semi-voiced) Control key. In the two-dimensional control processing of the present invention, after successive input control keys are completed, the successive control keys can also be used as affix control keys; the main control keys (successive control keys in the above example) The use of the affix control key is called "Two-dimensional Reuse Control Processing (2RCP)" 55 ^ "Two-dimensional multi-use control processing (Two-dimensi〇nal Multi use

Control Pn>cessing(2MCP))”,其與該先前文獻記載者是不 同的。 該先如文獻所載方式簡單並具一致性,但其所需擊鍵 次數卻相對較多。為使吾人更得了解該先前文獻及本發明 所用方式之不同點,圖2_4即以圖示說明該先前文獻中控 制鍵僅得作為相繼控制(第二、第三第四或第五)鍵或詞綴 (長音、濁音或半濁音)鍵之方式。在圖2_3及2-4中,著 以淺色之加以標記部份可予延伸使用。 在上述例中,其交叉控制處理方法之控制係於一基本 子符輸入完畢後選擇使用之,但其控制的選擇使用實際上 亦可於一基本字符輸入之前為之,就如同先前文獻中控制 處理方法可使其控制的選擇於基本字符之前或之後為之 一般。舉例而言,該輸入原則為、、=,,相對控制鍵,,+、、 = [#] + [*]+态。不過,交叉控制處理中之控制的選擇仍以於 33 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐 (請先W讀背面之注意事項€^寫本頁) i!裝 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ’2505 %Control Pn>cessing(2MCP))", which is different from the one described in the previous document. The method as described in the literature is simple and consistent, but the number of keystrokes required is relatively large. To understand the differences between the prior literature and the manner in which the present invention is used, FIG. 2_4 illustrates that the control keys in the prior documents only serve as successive control (second, third, fourth or fifth) keys or affixes (long sound, The mode of the voiced or semi-voiced key. In Figures 2_3 and 2-4, the part marked with a light color can be extended. In the above example, the control of the cross control method is based on a basic sub-character. After the input is completed, it is selected for use, but the selection of the control can actually be used before a basic character input, just as the control processing method in the prior literature can make the selection of the control before or after the basic character. For example, the input principle is , , =, relative control key, +, , = [#] + [*] + state. However, the choice of control in the cross control process is still applicable to 33 paper scales. Chinese national standard CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm (W Please read the back of the € ^ Notes written on this page) i! Fitted Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employees consumer cooperatives printed '2505%

五、發明說明() 基本字符之後為之為較方便。 上述原則得適用於任何其它語言,如本語即為一例。 舉例而言’當以[*]及[#]鍵作為以CPM ERC方式輸入阿拉 伯文之相繼字符時,多維交又控制處理被用以輸入詞綴型 母音。再就泰文言,若以[*]及[#]鍵作為相繼子音及相繼 母音之輸入,那麼多維交叉處理就被用於全音符號之輸 入。 4·韓文中使用母音單元的方法 生送氣子音子音的CPM廒同 可以利用韓文中的母音單元(例如_、丨和)。圖4巧給 出了參考。本發明將1 0個基本子音中的9個分派給每個 數字按鍵m到[9],韓文中諸如“_,,和“ j,,的母音單元 分派給小鍵盤下部的按鍵[*]和[#],而母音單元“.,,分派给 按鍵[〇]。儘管有各種可能的分派方法,爲簡便起見,本 發明擧例說明如目4-5所示的分派和安排方法。當然,基 本子曰#母曰單元女排在基本網格單元的位置,並且在選 擇安排的基本子音和母音單元時,沒有必要使用PWSM。 在送氣子音和緊子音應用cpM中,“送氣子音控制” 和“緊子音控制,,分派給指示爲“〜,,或者“丨,,的按 鍵,並且安排在緊臨基本網格單元的其它一個網格單元。 這就是說,使用控制按鍵的兩次擊鍵來選擇送氣子音控制 和緊子音控制。另-種選擇是,送氣子音(或者緊子音)控 制可以附加安排在緊子音(或者送氣子音)控制按鍵上,並 且使用控制按鍵的三次擊鍵來·選擇。如已有技術文獻所 (請先B3讀背面之注意事項^^寫本頁) 裝 訂: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製· 34 1282505Fifth, the invention description () is more convenient after the basic characters. The above principles apply to any other language, as in the case of the language. For example, when the [*] and [#] keys are used to input the successive characters of Arabic in the CPM ERC mode, the multi-dimensional control processing is used to input the affixed vowels. In the case of Thai, if the [*] and [#] keys are used as input to successive consonants and successive vowels, then multi-dimensional cross processing is used for the input of the diacritics. 4. The method of using the vowel unit in Korean The CPM symmetry of the shengshengzi sound can be used in the Korean vowel unit (for example, _, 丨 and )). Figure 4 is a reference. The present invention assigns 9 out of 10 basic consonants to each of the numeric keys m to [9], and the vowel units such as "_,, and "j," in Korean are assigned to the keys [*] in the lower part of the keypad and [#], and the vowel unit ".,, is assigned to the button [〇]. Although there are various possible assignment methods, the present invention exemplifies the assignment and arrangement method as shown in items 4-5 for the sake of simplicity. , the basic child 曰 #母曰 unit women's volleyball in the position of the basic grid unit, and in the selection of the basic consonants and vowel units, it is not necessary to use the PWSM. In the aspirating sub-tone and tight-sound application cpM, "aspirating sub-tone control" and "Tight tone control, assigned to the button labeled "~,, or "丨,," and arranged in another grid unit next to the basic grid unit. This means that the aspirating sub-tone control and the tight sub-tone control are selected using the two keystrokes of the control button. Alternatively, the aspirating sub-tone (or tight sub-tone) control can be additionally arranged on the tight sub-tone (or aerated sub-tone) control button, and the three-click key of the control button can be used to select. If there is a technical literature (please read B3 on the back of the note ^^ write this page) Binding: Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing · 34 1282505

五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 述,入沒有送氣子音,以致於“从,,被看作送氣子音和 緊子音。沒有必要在按鍵上標記送氣子音和緊子音控制, 並且使用者僅僅需要記住送氣子音控制或者緊子音控制 的輸入規則。 如果送氣子音控制的選擇狀態由“ {送氣子音},,表 示,並且在輸入字符之前控制應用於圖4_5的何子,則輸 入這樣給出送氣子音}+1&[*]+[*]+[1]。同樣,11= {緊子音}+[#]+[#]+[1]。如果使用送氣子音控制按鍵 的三次擊鍵來選擇緊子音控制,則輸入原則則{緊 音} + 1= [*] + [*] + [*] + [1] 〇 在本發明中沒有多意性;其中,送氣子音和緊子音 制與母音單元-及1共甩-個按鍵,並且應肖rsm。這 做的原因在於,母音,,一,,極少在一個字中相繼出現兩次 是韓文的顯著特點,以致於用來選擇送氣子音控制的按鍵 [* ]的兩次擊鍵不會被認爲是選擇相繼的兩個母音“一,,和 。可以同樣將此用於母音,,卜的情况下。在單詞,, 圳钟,(如[8] + [0] + [〇] + [#] + [#] + [〇] + [*] + [#]),母音單元”,, 後連續出現兩次母音“1”,並且因此“[#] + [#],,不會被認 爲疋選擇緊子音控制’而是母音。由於母音單元“,,不是 這個示例中字的末尾,所以選擇母音單元‘‘.·,,之後的不 會被認爲是選擇母音。甚至如果送氣子音和..緊子音控制分 派給指示[‘-,,的按鍵,由於母音‘、,,極少相二二見, 所以沒有多意性。 1〇個基本子音中的9個分派給9個按鍵⑴到[9]。其 35 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 子 控 -----!_裝 (請先朋讀背面之注意事項再填 寫本頁) 訂! A7V. Description of the invention () The Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office employee's fee-for-service cooperative printed and said that there is no aspirating sound, so that "from, it is regarded as a gas-filling consonant and a tight consonant. There is no need to mark the aspirating and sub-tones on the button. Control, and the user only needs to remember the input rules of the aspirating sub-tone control or the tight sub-tone control. If the selected state of the aspirating sub-tone control is represented by "{aspirating sub-tone", and the control is applied to the child of FIG. 4_5 before inputting the character , the input gives the aspirating sound}}&[*]+[*]+[1]. Similarly, 11={tight sub-tone}+[#]+[#]+[1]. If you use the three keystrokes of the supplied air tone control button to select the tight tone control, the input principle is {tight} + 1= [*] + [*] + [*] + [1] 没有 In the present invention, there is no intention Sexuality; among them, the aspirating sub-tone and the compact sound system and the vowel unit - and 1 甩 - a button, and should be sm. The reason for this is that the vowels, one, and rarely appearing twice in a word are prominent features of Korean, so that the two keystrokes used to select the button [*] of the aspirator control are not considered. Is to select two vowels in succession "one,, and. Can be used for the same vowel, in the case of Bu. In the word,, Zhong Zhong, (such as [8] + [0] + [〇] + [# ] + [#] + [〇] + [*] + [#]), the vowel unit,,, the vowel "1" appears twice consecutively, and therefore "[#] + [#], will not be recognized For the 疋 select the tight sound control 'but the vowel. Because the vowel unit,, is not the end of the word in this example, so select the vowel unit ''.., then, will not be considered as the selection vowel. Even if the air supply sub sound and the tight sound control are assigned to the indication [‘-,, the button, because the vowel ‘,,, is rarely seen, so there is no more meaning. Nine of the 1 basic pitches are assigned to 9 buttons (1) to [9]. The 35 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) sub-control -----!_Installation (please read the back note on the back and write this page) Order! A7

1282505 五、發明說明() 餘的一個不分派給按鍵,並就權宜稱爲“ 9個按鍵之外的 子音(C009)” 。鑑於發音和形態的相似性,9個按鍵之外 的子音被認爲是1 0個基本子音中其一的相繼字符或者詞 綴,並且進行控制程序。例如,如果在輸入字符之前應用 控制’同時“ 沒有分配給按鍵但是會被看作“ 的帶詞 綴字符(送氣子音或者緊子音),Ξ =[*] + [*]+ L、3 == [*] + [*] + [*] + u、或 [#] + [#] + u。考慮到圖 4-5 中的發 音和形態,‘‘言”看作的帶詞綴字符(送氣子音或者緊 子音),輸入這樣給出f = [*] + [*]+0»、或者tr = [*] + [*] + [*]+0、或僉=[#] + [#]+〇。 在這種情况下,控制程序的字符(即圖4-5中的“僉,,) 最好是沒有送氣子音也沒有緊子音的一個字符(例如上、 α、2、含和〇),用於更方便地輸入字符。當然,控制程序 的基本字符(即圖4-5中的〇)最好是沒有送氣子音也沒有 緊子音的一個字符,以方便於字符的輸入。在此處,給出 的‘‘含”是控制程序的一個示例,因爲它是沒有送氣子音也 沒有緊子音的字符中使用頻率最低的字符。選擇“含”作爲 控制程序的示例的另一個原因是發音和形態的相似性,如 同另一個普通發音和送氣子音之間的關係。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在此處,1〇個基本子音(普通發音)最好分配給10個 數字鍵,以便使甩韓文,用於記憶電話號碼和各種代碼。 爲此目的,將“兹,,附加分配給指示爲“·,,(即按鍵 [〇])的按 鍵’並且分派給網格以便使用相應按鍵的三次擊鍵來選擇 ‘‘ 。需要使用相應按鍵的三次擊鍵來選擇‘‘含”,以便消 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) f 12825051282505 V. Invention Description () The remaining one is not assigned to the button, and it is called “sub-tone (C009) other than 9 buttons”. In view of the similarity of pronunciation and form, the subtones other than the nine keys are regarded as successive characters or affixes of one of the 10 basic consonants, and the control program is performed. For example, if you apply the control 'simultaneously' before the character is entered, it will be treated as a suffix character (aspirating or tight), Ξ =[*] + [*]+ L, 3 == [ *] + [*] + [*] + u, or [#] + [#] + u. Considering the pronunciation and form in Figure 4-5, ''word' is treated as an affixed character (aspirating or tight), and the input gives f = [*] + [*]+0», or tr = [*] + [*] + [*]+0, or 佥=[#] + [#]+〇. In this case, control the characters of the program (ie “佥,,,,, in Figure 4-5”). It is preferable to have one character (for example, upper, alpha, 2, and 〇) that has no aspirating or no timbre for more convenient input of characters. Of course, the basic character of the control program (i.e., 〇 in Figure 4-5) is preferably a character that has no aspirating or no timbre to facilitate character entry. Here, the given ''contains'' is an example of the control program because it is the least frequently used character in characters that have no aspirating or no timbre. Another reason for selecting "including" as an example of the control program. It is the similarity between pronunciation and form, just like the relationship between another ordinary pronunciation and aerated sub-tone. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative is printed here, and one basic consonant (ordinary pronunciation) is preferably assigned to 10 Numeric keys, in order to make Korean, used to memorize phone numbers and various codes. For this purpose, assign ",", to the button labeled "·,, (ie, button [〇]) and assign it to the grid In order to use the three keystrokes of the corresponding button to select ''. You need to use the three keystrokes of the corresponding button to select ''include') so that the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). f 1282505

XX

•除RSM中的多意性,因爲“,,相 不 這種情况下,帛管沒有安排2 人非常頻繁。在 的第:…1 實際上與基本網格相鄰 鍵:上’使用者僅需知道使用相應按鍵的三次擊 鍵。延思味着按鍵[0]的三次擊鍵 孚立π 、擇〇 ,亚且所有基本 子日可以安排在各自的數字鍵,以便於記憶。 爲使字符在圖4-5中更加明顯’子音標記爲藍色母 音和母音單元標記爲紅色’而數字爲黑色。以藍色標記在 知鍵[〇]上的表明“言”分派給按鍵[〇],因爲“ + _ + 0(零Γ在形態上很像‘‘言”。 這就是說,9個按鍵之外的子音被看作特定基本子音 的帶詞綴字符,並且有CPM輸入,或者使用指示爲“.,,的 按鍵的三次擊鍵來輸入。 4_·2緊子咅的某本子音組合處理及緊早音和送氣手咅 盈隱藏/非隱藏重覆選摞處理 在使用韓文母音單元的方法中,可以透過基本子音的 組合的形式處理緊子音。因爲在使用母音單元的方法中, 一個基本子音分派給每個數字按鍵,所以會出現諸如 “呈平刁’,<=> “罟早7卜之類的多意性(第一多意性,整個代 碼中的多意性)。 經濟部智慧財·1局員工消費合作社印製 使用如下面實施例所述的“索引”就可以避免這種 多意性。如果以基本子音的組合形式來輸入送氣子音,則 CPM僅僅用於輸入送氣子音,以便簡化輸入規則。如已有 技術文獻所述,送氣子音控制可以分派給適當的網格單 元。例如,圖4 -1或者圖4 - 2中移入送氣子音控制。 37 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ^____________I__ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 A7• In addition to the multi-meaning in RSM, because ",, in this case, the fistula does not arrange 2 people very frequently. In the first: ... 1 actually adjacent to the basic grid: on the 'user only You need to know the three keystrokes using the corresponding buttons. You can think of the three keystrokes of the button [0], the volts, the selection, and all the basic sub-days can be arranged in their respective numeric keys for easy memory. It is more obvious in Fig. 4-5 that the 'consonant mark is blue vowel and the vowel unit is marked red' and the number is black. The blue mark on the key [〇] indicates that "speech" is assigned to the button [〇], Because " + _ + 0 (zero Γ is very similar in form to ''言言.) That is to say, the subtones other than the 9 keys are treated as suffix characters of a specific basic consonant, and there is CPM input, or the indication is ".,, the three keystrokes of the button are input. 4_·2 A sub-tone combination processing of the sub-key and the early sound and the aspiration hand hidden/non-hidden repeated selection processing in the method of using the Korean vowel unit In the form of a combination of basic consonants Because in the method of using the vowel unit, a basic sub-tone is assigned to each numeric button, so there will be a multi-meaning (such as "flat", <=> Intention, the multi-meaning in the whole code.) Ministry of Economics, Smart Finance, 1st Bureau, Employees, Consumer Cooperatives, printing, using the "index" as described in the following embodiment can avoid this kind of multi-meaning. If the combination of basic consonants The form is used to input the aspirating sub-tones, then the CPM is only used to input the aerated sub-tones in order to simplify the input rules. As described in the prior art documents, the aspirating sub-tone control can be assigned to the appropriate grid unit. For example, Figure 4-1 or Figure 4 - 2 Move in the air supply sub sound control. 37 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ^____________I__ Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative prints 1225025 A7

I B7 發明說明() 上面已經說明,按照按下相應按鍵的次數(例如’ 1=== [1],3= [1] + [1],並且ττ= [ι] + [ι] + [ι])可以相繼輸入基本 子音,送氣子音和緊子音(例如π、刁和π)。如已有技術 文獻所述,這種情况會有第一多意性。此處不對導致多意 性的特定示例進行說明。可以在按鍵上單獨標.記基本子 音、所有的基本子音、送氣子音和緊子音。這樣就可以允 許要由RSM選擇的相繼字符(例,如巧和τι)。 爲簡便起見,僅僅標記代表性字符並且由RS,]M選擇其 相繼字符的方法稱爲“隱藏重覆子音處理方法 (HRSPM)” 。送氣子音和緊子音的附加優先順序可以按照 基本子音、緊子音和送氣子音的順序來給出。例如,網格 單元的分派這樣定義:飞第一:基本網格單元的位置)、 11(第二)、和(第三)。這就是說,1= [!]、[^ +以]、 且[ 1 ] + [ 1 ] + [ 1 ]。這就是透過基本子音的組合來處理緊 子音(或者隱藏重覆選擇處理)和透過隱藏重覆處理來選 擇送氣子音。 本發明的這種方法在相繼字符的附加優先順序方面 與已有技術文獻中描述的隱藏重覆選擇方法 7 不同,但是也 能構使用相應數字按鍵的兩次擊鍵(基束;* ^ 十t音的組合)來 輸入緊子音,從而使得輸入在使用者的角卉 n復看來更加自 然。 在這種情况下’使用按鍵[〇]的三次擊鍵來輸入“含”, 這樣就整體提南了所采用的方法的一致性,闵 “ “ q馬 Ο和 "5" 之間的關係與普通音(基本子音)和送氣子立 ^日在形態和發 38 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) --------!!·裝i丨 (請先B3讀背面之注意事項1¾寫本頁) · · 1282505 Α7 Β7 五 、發明說明( 音上的關係相似,並且也可以使用相應數字按鍵的三次擊 鍵來輸入送氣子音。 當然’能構使用指示爲基本子音的按鍵的三次擊鍵來 輸入送氣子音,或者透過CPM,如同使用按鍵[0]的三次 擊鍵輸入“言’’一樣,或者透過CPM,其中“含”褲看作‘‘ 〇,, 的帶詞綴字符。當使用者透過CPM輸入送氣子音,系統 就會沒有多意性(整個代碼中的多意性,即第一多意性)地 識別出送氣子音。但是,儘管使用爲相應基本子音分派的 按鍵的三次擊鍵來輸入送氣子音,仍會發生·多意性。也可 將此應用在緊子音的情况下。 這就是說,使用者可以透過CPM或者透過隱藏重覆選 擇方法來在相同的鍵盤上輸入送氣子音。也可將此應用於 緊子音的情况下。例如,如果使用按鍵[* ]的兩次擊鍵來 選擇送氣子音控制,並且使用與分別基本字符相對應的按 鍵的兩次擊鍵來選擇送氣子音和緊子音,則“外外,的輸入 這樣給出“外夕1= [1 ] + [*] + [*] + [#] + [〇] + [ 1] + [1] + [1 ] + [#],,。 這就是說,第一 由CPM輸入,而第二“彳,由RSM輪 入。同樣,“科別,,的輸入這樣給出“科則= 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 Π] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [〇] + [1] + [#],,。 選擇送氣子音和緊子音的次序可以定義爲便於使用 者使用非隱藏重覆選擇方法或者隱藏重覆方法來輸入送 氣子音和緊子音。 1_· 3利用韓文之四個母音元素 就權宜上而言,圖4-5稱作“十子音三母音方法 39 1282505 , B7 五、發明說明() (10-consonant 3-vowel method)’’,或直接簡稱作“三母音方 法(3-vowel method)’’ ’此亦得由圖4-6表示之,其中使用 圖4-5之相同輸入方法。在圖4-6中,用以輸入一韓文母 音“和或‘‘ αχ”及母音元素”·”之母音元素“:(若需使用時,作 .為水平或垂直鍵擊,但權宜上禪為水平鍵擊,在本例中為 “:”被歸作同一族群,並以相同按鍵输入之。母音元素,,” 及“:”係以重覆選擇方法分別以一次鍵擊及兩次鍵擊選擇 之,且母音元素“:”不得由該按鍵即受指定。亦即,圖4_5 之例亦使用圖 4-6所用之四母音元素(“一,,、“·,,、‘‘··,,及 “ 1 ”)。就權宜上言,該方法稱作“似點母音元素重覆選擇 四母音方法(Dot-like Vowel Element Repeat Selection 4-vowel Method(DVERS4M)),,。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在圖4 - 7中’ “:及母音元素分屬不同族群,且四 母音元素及“],,)分別屬於不同的按鍵。該 方法就權宜上稱作“ 1 0-子音四母音方法(1 〇-consonant 4-vowel method)”或直稱作“四母音方法(4-v〇wel method)”。該種四母音方法與三母音方法極度近似,因此 將以較簡單之方式描述之,且四母音方法明顯使用三母音 方法之特徵於其中,故各四母音中使用之術語將沿用三母 音方法中者。 在四母音方法中’十基本子音中二無送氣音及緊音之 子音由八個按鍵負責之,四個母音元素、送氣子音、緊音 控制及該二子音不由該八個按鍵負責(權宜上稱作“八按 鍵外子音(8-button excluded consonants),,或“八按鍵之外 40 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 子音(the consonants out 〇f 8 butt〇n)”或“ 1〇_8 子音(1〇 8 consonants)”或直稱作“ _8子音(_8⑶旧⑽⑽⑷,,),並被分 作兩個族群;母音元素以相對鍵敲擊一次輸入之,而控制 或八個按鍵外子音以敲擊相對鍵兩次輸入之(亦即由重覆 選擇方法為之)。 母音由[0]鍵負責之,其外形與母音元素,,,,相似, 因此該中加以一標記(令使用者得清楚快速辨認之)。母 音:由[8]鍵負責之’其外形與母音“:,,相似,因此“8,,中加 以一標記(令使用者得清楚快速辨認之),如此就能清楚表 明一按鍵代表一字符。在圖4巧中,母音元素”,,在[〇]鍵 之中加以標記,以更直接清楚表示‘‘言”。若母音“一,,及 ‘‘卜分由[*]及[#]键表(如圖4-7所示),則在輸入韓文之不 同不母音時需選擇旁邊按鍊,藉以縮短指之移動距離。 在四母音方法中’重覆選擇方法可用以輪入送氣子音 及緊子音,就如三母音方法所用者同,此稱作“送氣/緊子 曰重覆選擇四母音方法(aspirated/tense consonant repeat selection 4-vowel method)”。與三母音方法中所用同,重 覆選擇方法亦可與控制重理方法並用,權宜上稱作“送氣/ 緊子音控制處理及重覆選擇四母音方法(Aspirated /tense Consonant Control Processing & Repeat Selection 4_vowel Method),,。 以重覆選擇方法之觀點,圖4-7之鍵盤可以圖4-8表 示之。當較圖4-6及圖4-8時,圖4-5圖及圖4-7之差異 可明顯得知;在圖4 - 8中,母責“:,,係以鍵擊[8 ] —次選擇 41 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請!拳項一 寫本頁) 裝 幻· 1282505 A7 __!_B7 經濟部智慧財-A局員工诮費合作社印製 五、發明說明() .之,圖4-6中則以鍵擊“〇’,兩次為之。 母音元素及“:”可分別由[*]及[#]代表之,但每一鍵 不可能如圖4-7所示般僅代表一字符。 請參閱圖4-7,其輸入原則為1 = 丨=[8] + [#]、|;= | + := ·[#] + [8]、而TT=—+: = [*] + [8]。當欲以重覆灌擇方法輸入一 八按鍵外子音時,輸入原則為。=[8] + [8]及呑=[8] + [8]。若 母音元素“:”得以敲擊母音元素,,_,,鍵兩次而得到選擇,那 麼“呑”就得以敲擊鍵三次輪入之,與三母音、元素中者 同。 舉例而言,“甸”或“别”中介於,,一”及”丨”母音間之似點母 音元素”··”係以母音元素“V”輸入之,雖然系統暫時可能將 之視作“异+···”之輸入,但其終能被正確視作“,,因為母 音“卜不會出現在“异”之後。在“十子音似點母音元素重覆 選擇 3 母音方法(10-consonant Dot-like Vowel Element Repeat Selection 3-vowel Method)” 中,母音元素的兩次 輸入或母音元素“:”的一次輸入可在輸入‘‘嘲,,中母音” 一”及 ”卜間的似點母音元素” 時進行之。三母音及四母音方法 堪屬韓文輸入方法,因其利用韓文子音及母音外形(即字 之創造規則及字符關聯規則)而將“語言專用重覆方法 (Language Restricted Repeat Selection Methods (LRRSM))”中最佳化形成“韓文專用重覆限制選擇方法 (Korean Restricted Repeat Selection Method (KRRSM)),,。 4.4 完整控制處理 在圖 4-5 中,“〇1纠”及“外川、或“ 〇]钟’、“〇}钟’及‘‘ 〇玲卜 42 本纸張尺^適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 請先W讀背面之注意事項 寫本頁) 裝 訂:I B7 Description of Invention () As explained above, the number of times the corresponding button is pressed (for example, ' 1=== [1], 3= [1] + [1], and ττ= [ι] + [ι] + [ ι]) Basic sub-tones, aspirating sub-tones and tight sub-tones (for example, π, 刁, and π) can be input in succession. This situation has a first degree of ambiguity as described in the prior art literature. Specific examples that lead to multiple meanings are not described here. The basic sub-tones, all basic sub-tones, aerated sub-tones and tight sub-tones can be marked separately on the keys. This allows successive characters to be selected by the RSM (for example, Qiao and τι). For the sake of brevity, the method of simply marking representative characters and selecting their successive characters by RS,]M is called "Hidden Repeated Minor Processing Method (HRSPM)". The additional priority order of the aspirating sub-tones and the tight sub-tones can be given in the order of the basic consonants, the tight consonants, and the aspirating sub-tones. For example, the assignment of grid cells is defined as: fly first: position of the basic grid unit), 11 (second), and (third). That is to say, 1=[!], [^ + to], and [ 1 ] + [ 1 ] + [ 1 ]. This is to process the tight subtones (or hide the repeated selection process) through a combination of basic consonants and to select the aspirating subtones by hiding the repeated processing. This method of the present invention differs from the hidden repeat selection method 7 described in the prior art document in the additional priority order of successive characters, but can also construct two keystrokes using the corresponding numeric keys (base bundle; * ^ ten The combination of the t sounds) is used to input the tight consonants, so that the input appears to be more natural in the user's corner. In this case, use the three-click key of the [〇] button to enter the "include", so that the overall method is consistent with the method used, and the relationship between "q horse and "5" With the normal sound (basic consonant) and the air supply, the Japanese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied in the form and hair 38 paper size --------! ! · Install i丨 (Please read the back of the B3 first note 13⁄4 write this page) · · 1282505 Α7 Β7 V. Invention description (The relationship on the sound is similar, and you can also use the three keystrokes of the corresponding numeric keys to input the air supply sub sound. Of course, you can use the three-stroke button of the button indicated as the basic consonant to input the aerated sub-tone, or through CPM, just like using the three-keystroke of the button [0] to input "speech", or through CPM, which includes "including" pants. It is regarded as a suffix character of '' 〇,.) When the user inputs a gas-filled consonant through the CPM, the system does not have a multi-sense (multiple meaning in the whole code, that is, the first multi-sense) to recognize the aspirating sub-tone. However, although the aspirating subtones are input using the three keystrokes of the keys assigned to the corresponding basic consonants, the multi-intentionality may occur. This can also be applied in the case of tight consonants. That is, the user can pass the CPM or Enter the aspirating subtones on the same keyboard by hiding the repeated selection method. You can also apply this to the case of tight subtones. For example, if you use the two keystrokes of the [*] button Select the gas tone control, and use the two keystrokes of the buttons corresponding to the respective basic characters to select the aspirating subtone and the tight consonant, then the "outside and outside, the input is given as "Eve 1 = [1] + [*] + [*] + [#] + [〇] + [ 1] + [1] + [1 ] + [#],,. That is to say, the first is entered by CPM, and the second "彳, by RSM round In the same way, the input of "Lei," is given as "Keze = Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Staff Consumption Cooperative Printing] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [〇] + [1] + [#],,. The order in which the aspirating sub-tones and the tight sub-tones are selected can be defined as facilitating the user to input the aspirating sub-tones and the tight sub-tones using the non-hidden repeated selection method or the hidden repeated method. 1_· 3Using the four vowels of Korean In terms of expediency, Figure 4-5 is called “10-consonant 3-vowel method”, or simply referred to as “three-voson method”. 3-vowel method) '' 'This is also shown in Figure 4-6, using the same input method of Figure 4-5. In Figure 4-6, to enter a Korean vowel" And or ''αχ' and the vowel element "·" vowel element ": (If you need to use it, it is a horizontal or vertical keystroke, but the expedition is a horizontal keystroke, in this case is ":" It is classified into the same group and input with the same button. The vowel elements, ", and ":" are selected by one keystroke and two keystrokes by repeated selection methods, and the vowel element ":" cannot be used by the button. That is, it is specified. That is, the example of Fig. 4_5 also uses the four vowel elements ("1,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, As far as expediency is concerned, this method is called the “Dot-like Vowel Element Repeat Selection 4-vowel Method (DVERS4M)). The Ministry of Economic Affairs’ Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative is printed on In Figure 4-7, '“: and vowel elements belong to different ethnic groups, and the four vowel elements and “],,) belong to different keys. This method is called “1 0-consonant four vowel method (1 〇). -consonant 4-vowel method)" or directly called "4-v〇wel method". This four-vowel method is extremely similar to the three-vowel method, so it will be described in a simpler way, and four The vowel method obviously uses the characteristics of the three vowel method, so the term used in each of the four vowels will follow the three vowel method. In the four vowel method, the 'nine basic vowels have two aspirating sounds and the tight ones are eight. The button is responsible for, the four vowel elements, the aspirating sub-tone, the tight control and the two sub-tones are not responsible for the eight buttons (the expedient is called "eight-button excluded consonants", or "eight 40 outside the key, the paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee fee cooperative cooperative printed consonant (the consonants out 〇f 8 Butt〇n)" or "1〇_8 consonants" or directly called "_8 consonants (_8(3) old (10)(10)(4),,)) and are divided into two groups; vowel elements are tapped once with relative keys Input, and control or eight button external consonants are input by tapping the relative keys twice (that is, by repeated selection method). The vowel is responsible for the [0] key, its shape and vowel element,,,, Similarly, so mark it in the middle (so that the user can clearly recognize it quickly). The vowel: the '8' is responsible for the 'the shape is similar to the vowel':,,, so "8," is marked with a The user has to clearly recognize it quickly, so that it is clear that a button represents a character. In Figure 4, the vowel element "," is marked in the [〇] key to more clearly and clearly indicate ''word'' If the vowels "one,, and '' According to the [*] and [#] key tables (as shown in Figure 4-7), you need to select the side by chain when you input the different Korean vowels, so as to shorten the moving distance of the finger. The overlay selection method can be used to rotate the aspirating sub-tone and the tight consonant, just as the three-vowel method is used. This is called "aspirated/tense consonant repeat selection 4-vowel method". . As used in the three-vowel method, the repeated selection method can also be used in conjunction with the control-recognition method, which is called "Aspirated/Tense Consonant Control Processing & Repeat Selection". 4_vowel Method),,. From the point of view of repeated selection methods, the keyboard of Figure 4-7 can be represented by Figure 4-8. When comparing Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-8, Figure 4-5 and Figure 4 The difference between 7 can be clearly seen; in Figure 4-8, the mother is responsible for “:,, with keystroke [8]—the choice of 41 paper scales applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297厘) (Please! Boxing one page) 幻幻·1282505 A7 __!_B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs wisdom-A Bureau staff 诮 合作 cooperative printing 5, invention description (). In Figure 4-6, the key Click “〇” twice for it. The vowel elements and “:” can be represented by [*] and [#] respectively, but each key cannot represent only one character as shown in Figure 4-7. Figure 4-7, the input principle is 1 = 丨=[8] + [#],|;= | + := ·[#] + [8], and TT=—+: = [*] + [8 When you want to enter by repeated method When the eight keys are used, the input principle is: [8] + [8] and 呑 = [8] + [8]. If the vowel element ":" is able to hit the vowel element, the _, and the keys are obtained twice. If you choose, then “呑” will be able to click on the key three times, which is the same as the three vowels and the elements. For example, the difference between “dian” or “other”, between “,” and “丨” The vowel element "··" is input with the vowel element "V". Although the system may temporarily regard it as the input of "different +···", it can be correctly regarded as ", because the vowel" Will not appear after "extra". In the "10-consonant Dot-like Vowel Element Repeat Selection 3-vowel Method", the input of the vowel element or the input of the vowel element ":" can be Enter ''Mocking, Medium Mammal') and "Spotted Matte Element". The three vowel and four vowel methods are Korean input methods, and they use the Language Restricted Repeat Selection Methods (LRRSM) by using Korean consonants and vowel shapes (ie, word creation rules and character association rules). The optimization is to form the Korean Restricted Repeat Selection Method (KRRSM). 4.4 Complete Control Processing In Figure 4-5, “〇1纠” and “外川, or 〇”钟', '〇}钟' and '' 〇玲卜42 This paper ruler ^Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Please read the following on the back of the note to write this page) Binding:

五、 •間會有模糊情形(因其全碼值相同) 子音以控制處理方式輸入時亦同 0扣1間亦出現此模糊情形。 12825〇5 發明說明( 即使其送氣子音及緊 圖4-7顯示“〇丨冲,及 該兩8按鍵外子音之控制處理輸入方式可如將“含,, 當作的詞綴、並以控制處理方式輸入之方式為之(如三 母曰方法中〇= 〇+{送氣子音卜〇 + [*] +門)。就權宜上而 言,此可稱作“完整控制處理”。再者,此按鍵外子音得以 按下一按鍵外子音按鍵、並加上“—,,之控制的方式為之, 其中該按鍵外子音按鍵可如“言,,等。舉例而言,其輸入原 則為“;ό·=·+{送氣子音卜[〇] + [*] + [*],,。在四母音方法中, 該等8按鍵外子音亦得以相同方式處理,並得就權宜稱作 “利用按鍵外子音鍵(Excluded C〇ns〇nant Button)進行之 完全控制處理”。 5·透過索引克服多意性的方法 在RSM中,由相同的代碼來表示多値字會導致多意 性。如已有技術文獻中所述,這種多意性發生在厨4_丨示 例中的“卫〇丨”和“哥,之間。通常是一個字一個字地輸入。例 如,有字“劈哲㈣’’而沒有字“卫〇|哲〇|”。這兩個字在圖4]中 具有相同的代碼。與此相連,一個客戶終端或伺服器準備 這些可能導致多意性的字的索引,所述的多意性與特定鍵 盤和特定字的輸入方法相關。如果用戶輸入“ Jg皙司,,或 “卫〇丨哲01”,甚至在一定的時間延遲在後也不能將其與其它 的字區分開來,系統就會認爲“•司,,是想要的字(下文稱 爲“目標字符”),因爲‘‘ 1哲司,,被看作索引中的正確字。 43 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公g ) ------------裝— (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) ·- 經濟部智慧財i局員工消費合作社印製5. There will be a ambiguity between the two (since the full code value is the same). This ambiguity also occurs when the sub sound is input in the control processing mode. 12825〇5 Description of the invention (even if its aspirating sub-tones and FIG. 4-7 show “hiccups,” and the control processing input mode of the two 8-button sub-tones can be treated as “including, suffixed, and controlled by control”. The way of inputting the method is as follows (for example, in the three-female method, 〇 = 〇 + {supply sub-division + [*] + gate). In terms of expediency, this can be called "complete control processing." The external sub-tone of the button can be pressed by a button and the sub-tone button is added, and the control mode of "-," is added, wherein the button of the button can be as "words," etc. For example, the input principle is "; ό·=·+{送气子音卜[〇] + [*] + [*],,. In the four-vowel method, these 8-button sub-sounds are also processed in the same way, and it is called “using the button”. Full control processing by Excluded C〇ns〇nant Button. 5. Overriding the multi-sense method through indexing In RSM, the same code to represent multiple words can lead to multiple meanings. As described in the technical literature, this multi-sexuality occurs in the kitchen. "And between brothers, usually. One word is input one word at a time. For example, there is the word "劈哲(四)"' and there is no word "卫〇|哲〇|". These two words have the same in Figure 4] In connection with this, a client terminal or server prepares an index of these words that may cause ambiguity, which is related to a specific keyboard and a specific word input method. If the user inputs "Jg 皙, , or "Wei Zhe 01", even after a certain time delay can not be distinguished from other words, the system will think that "• Division, is the desired word (hereinafter referred to as " The target character "), because ''1 哲司, is regarded as the correct word in the index. 43 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 g) -------- ----Installation - (Please read the notes on the back to write this page) ·- Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs

經濟部智慧財i局員工消費合作社印製 12825〇5 t 後僅應用於系統對兩個字之間發生的多意性不可區分的 、、 果了此’糸統(客戶側或祠服器側)透過時間延 遲値的幫助來區分字,這可以事先由系統或使用者設置。 這就是說,當使用者輸入“卫01哲卟,並有意暫停(透過時間 延遲、处炊 ,, 工格、或左移動鍵的選擇,或另一偭特味按鍵的選 擇)時,系統輪出作爲目標字的“卫0丨哲〇1,,,儘管輪出的字在 語法上是一個不正確的字。 爲準備索引,系統僅登記正確的字(如“噶哲司,,)或作爲 夕思性字的不正確字(如“卫叫哲◦丨”)。另一種選擇是, 丘'^己正確的子又登記不正確的字,設其具有確定索引中 的特定字是正確還是不正確的信息。 廷可以應用於在小鍵盤上使用RSM的所有情况。例 如,這同樣可以應用於韓國三星電子有限公司的輪入方法 在“号7卜和“子沖,之間發生多意性的情况。它也可以應用於 下面的情况:子音和母音對分派給如圖4-1所示的每個按 鍵以便使用相應按鍵的一次擊鍵來選擇子音,使用兩4 擊鍵來選擇送氣子音,使用三次擊鍵來選擇緊子a,1 曰 丁丁ι_ 擊鍵選擇母音,並且音節確認鍵是由音節(字母)選擇的音 即(字母);甚至當系統暫時輸出與由使用者輪入的哲舌卜 相對應的“卫〇丨哲〇]”時,在字結束的時刻(如輸入空袼),來 考索引,就會將拼錯的字糾正爲‘‘噶哲司”。 " 當客戶端和伺服器中都存在字的索引時,系統首先在 客戶端的索引中査找正確的字;如果失敗,最後在伺服哭 的索引中查找。 益 44 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the wisdom and wealth bureau, the employee consumption cooperative, printed 12,825 〇 5 t, only applied to the system's multi-intentional indiscriminate relationship between the two words, and the result is that the customer side or the server side ) Distinguish words by the help of time delays, which can be set by the system or user in advance. That is to say, when the user enters "Wei 01 Zhe, and intentionally pauses (by time delay, squatting, work, or left movement key selection, or another special button selection), the system wheel As the target word, "Wei 0丨哲〇1,, although the word in turn is syntactically an incorrect word. In order to prepare the index, the system only registers the correct words (such as "Zhezhe,") or the incorrect words (such as "Wei Zhe"). Another option is that Qiu is correct. The child also registers the incorrect word, which has the information to determine whether the specific word in the index is correct or incorrect. The application can be applied to all cases of using RSM on the keypad. For example, this can also be applied to Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. of South Korea. The company's wheeling method occurs in the case of “No. 7 Bu and “Sub-Chong.” It can also be applied to the following cases: the sub-tone and the vowel pair are assigned to each button as shown in Figure 4-1. In order to select the consonant with one keystroke of the corresponding button, use two 4 keystrokes to select the aspirating subtone, use three keystrokes to select the compact a, 1 曰丁丁ι_ keystroke to select the vowel, and the syllable confirmation key is composed of syllables (letters) The selected sound is (letter); even when the system temporarily outputs the "Deficence" corresponding to the zebra of the user who is in the wheel of the user, at the end of the word (such as input space), come Test index, just The misspelled word will be corrected to ‘‘噶哲司’. " When there is an index of a word in both the client and the server, the system first looks for the correct word in the index of the client; if it fails, it finally looks in the index of the server crying.益 44 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

1282505 > A7 五、發明說明( .如同完全理解的那樣,在字識別系數的幫助下,系统 可以將-個字和另一個字區分開丨,例如可以在空格之 間、字頭和空格之間、空格和字尾之間、以及空格和模式 轉移之間將它給出。參考索引來確定字的正確性可以—:固 字-個字地進行。因此’當使用者輸人字識別系數時·,系 統參考該索引以碟定正確的字。 * °例如, 這可以應用在RSM中發生多意性的所有情况 在韓國三星電子有限公司的輸入方法中,多意、性可以 “钟和“刊,,之間産生,其中字的末子音㈣首子音屬於 相同的按鍵。在此處’當使用透過字符分派的代碼來輪乂 字符時,系統不能一假音節(字母)一個音節(字母)二識 別,以致於必然輪出與小鍵盤輸入的“号外,,相對應的 “子外’。在這種情况下,即使經過一定的時間延遲之後, 如果能確定兩個字中的哪.一個應該是目標字,則系統(終 端或伺服器)參考索引來確定目標字。在這種情况下,與 時間延遲無關,參考索引來確定目標字可能更有效,因爲 在所有的情况下,系統將目標字確定爲“兮:7卜,即使“ 7卜 的詞首子音“1”在“号,,的末子音“1”後被選擇。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 很明顯,這並不局限於韓文,它可以應用於所有使用 RSM的語言。例如,當在英文模式下輸入英文字符或其它 語言的情况中使用者輸入[2]_[2]-[2]而導致“ ΑΒ,,和 “ ΒΑ”之間的多意性時,系統就會認出作爲正確字登記在 索引中的“ ΑΒ”,並且將它作爲目標字來提供。如果將輸 入的多義字全部作爲正確的字登記在索引中,該系統首先 45 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) 1282505 A7 ' B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明() •向使用者提供使用頻率最高的字’並能使使用者最終確定 目標字。 如果系統將所有與多義輸入字相對應的字識別是參 考索引的正確字,則它允許使用者在適當的(視覺或聽覺) •方法的幫助下選擇目標字。 爲了允許使用者確定目標字,系統在顯示螢幕上按照 使甩頻率(或優先順序)列出認爲是正確字的多彳固字,並使 使用者使用與字的顯示次序相對應的向上和向、下滾動鍵 或數字按鍵來選擇目標字符。另一種選擇是,系統僅僅在 顯示屛上顯示使用頻率最高的一個字,並且如果該字不是 目標字,則促使使用者選擇控制(爲簡便起見,稱爲“後 續字控制”),用於顯示使用頻率第二高的後續字。如果 後續字也不是目標字,則系統使得使用者透過相同的方式 來選擇目標子。在搜索到·目標字之後,允許使用者透過選 擇另一個按鍵(即除指示後續字控制之外的任何按鍵,例 如另一個子符、空格、或模式轉移)來確定目標字。 在此處,PWSM和RSM(基本/簡單)都可以應用於後續 字控制的選擇。如果後續字控制分派在特定按鍵的基本網 格單元的位置,則可以使用該特定按鍵的一次擊鍵來選擇 它。 6·簡碼應用方法和SIM/CIM 6.1與字符相關的代碼的産生 在利用數據通訊終端訪問信息系統時,字符的輸入是 絶對必要的。在某些狀况下,這些字符編碼爲數字。小型 461282505 > A7 V. Inventive Note (As fully understood, with the help of word recognition coefficients, the system can distinguish between - and another word, for example, between spaces, prefixes and spaces. It is given between the space, the space and the suffix, and between the space and the mode transition. The reference index to determine the correctness of the word can be -: solid word - word. So when the user enters the vocabulary recognition coefficient The system refers to the index to determine the correct word in the disc. * ° For example, this can be applied to all cases of multi-intentionality in RSM. In the input method of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in Korea, the meaning and the sex can be "clock and" Between , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Identification, so that it is necessary to turn out the "outside" of the "key number" input with the keypad. In this case, even after a certain time delay, if two can be determined Which of the words. One should be the target word, then the system (terminal or server) refers to the index to determine the target word. In this case, regardless of the time delay, the reference index to determine the target word may be more efficient, because at all In the case of the system, the system determines the target word as “兮: 7 Bu, even if the “1” of the first word of “1” is selected after the “number”, the last sub-note “1”. Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative Printing is obvious, this is not limited to Korean, it can be applied to all languages that use RSM. For example, when inputting English characters or other languages in English mode, the user enters [2]_[2]-[ 2] When the meaning of "ΑΒ,, and "ΒΑ" is caused, the system recognizes the "ΑΒ" registered as the correct word in the index and provides it as the target word. If it is to be input The polysemous characters are all registered as correct words in the index. The system first applies 45 Chinese paper standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public) 1282505 A7 ' B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Officer Consumer Cooperatives Print 5, Invention Description () • Provide the user with the most frequently used word 'and enable the user to finalize the target word. If the system identifies all words corresponding to the ambiguous input word as the correct word of the reference index , which allows the user to select the target word with the help of appropriate (visual or audible) methods. In order to allow the user to determine the target word, the system lists the frequency (or priority) on the display screen as being The sturdy words of the correct word, and the user selects the target character using the up and down scroll keys or numeric keys corresponding to the display order of the words. Alternatively, the system only displays the frequency of use on the display 屛The highest word, and if the word is not the target word, prompts the user to select control (referred to as "subsequent word control" for simplicity) for displaying the second highest used subsequent word. If the subsequent word is not the target word, the system causes the user to select the target in the same way. After searching for the target word, the user is allowed to determine the target word by selecting another button (i.e., any button other than indicating subsequent word control, such as another sub-character, space, or mode transition). Here, both PWSM and RSM (basic/simple) can be applied to the selection of subsequent word controls. If the subsequent word control is assigned to the location of the basic grid unit of a particular button, it can be selected using a single keystroke for that particular button. 6. Shortcode application method and SIM/CIM 6.1 generation of character-related code When inputting an information system using a data communication terminal, character input is absolutely necessary. In some cases, these characters are encoded as numbers. Small 46

(請先¾讀背面之注 I丨1·!裝 意事項14 寫本頁) 幻·(Please read the note on the back first. I丨1·! Precautions 14 Write this page)

經濟部智慧財j局員工诮费合作社印製 .化的數據通訊終端通常具有以普通鍵盤 ^ “成值,,^ ^ 州、》式的接口。在 此處,代碼一詞係指任何類型的代 y 土幻代碼,關於它的示 例很多,包括··電話號碼、股票指數 、』出的公司)代碼、 地鐵代碼、銀行代碼等。各種名稱的編碼 .具有優點。間化輪入方面 此處使用的數據通訊終端包括任何類型的數據通訊 終端’例^〇 PC、行動通訊裝置、智慧型電話、PDA、雙 向文本收發器、ATM(自動售貨機)等,以及電子日記本 等。此處使用的信息系統包括任何—種透過gui視覺可訪 問的系統或僅僅視覺可訪問的系統,例如Ars。系統還包 括伺服器系統'在更廣泛的意義上,包括與伺服器系統通 訊的終端的客戶軟體。 小鍵盤上的字母可以用來記憶不同的代碼。有多種 關於這個目的的方法,包括:簡單命名、詞首命名或完全 命名’說明如卞。 簡單命名就是將與給定的字或詞相關的數字指定爲 代碼。例如,韓國公司名稱“ 卜具有一與1、A、灭和 X相關的簡碼“1799”,如圖4-2所示。在這種情況下,與 簡碼1799’’相關之‘‘71~社?]7[’’中的字符~1、人、7;和灭用粗體 標記’以令使用者得容易注意到特定字的簡碼。而且,可 以從字或詞字或詞中提取簡碼。例如,芒补的簡碼不 門限於‘‘ 1799”,因爲在簡單命名中,代碼包括與屬於 定字的任何字符相關的數字。例如,當早4 0丨钍的簡碼設 爲與入、入、1及Ξ相關的値,的代碼可能變成與η 47 用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) lit 寫本頁) 裝 訂· 專 給 置 1282505 Λ ____________ Β7 五、發明說明() (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項s寫本頁) .入、灭及灭相關的1729”、或與和~[、入、Η及相關的 “ I949’’ 、及與構成外社2;4之所有字符相關的 1 3 2 9 4 2 9 3 。為簡便起見,指定與形成一個給定字或詞 的所有字符相關的代碼被稱為“完全相關簡單命名 .(FASN)” ,並且指定與形成一個給定字或詞的部分字符相 關的代碼被稱爲“部分相關簡單命名(PASN),,。在這兩種 情況下,簡單命名(即簡單編碼)與構成給定的字或詞的 字符相關。同樣可以應用於其他語言和韓文。例如, “caption”可具有作爲部分相關代碼與子音“CPTN”相關 的簡碼“ 2786”,其可就權宜稱作“子音相關簡碼”。 “escape”係以母音為開頭,其子音相關簡碼為“727”, 其與SCP”相對應,也就是與“scape”之子音相關簡碼相 同。因此,使第一個母音與子音相關之策略亦可考慮使 用,因其得使定義中簡碼與對應字或詞間的覆疊情形減至 最小,並能提升使用減碼之方便性。該方式可應權宜而稱 作“第一母音與子音簡碼之組合體(First V〇wel +The data communication terminal of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is printed with a common keyboard ^ "value, ^ ^ state," type of interface. Here, the word code refers to any type of Generation y soil magic code, there are many examples of it, including · phone number, stock index, "out of the company" code, subway code, bank code, etc. The encoding of various names. has advantages. Intersect wheeled aspects here The data communication terminals used include any type of data communication terminal, such as PC, mobile communication device, smart phone, PDA, bidirectional text transceiver, ATM (vending machine), etc., and electronic diary, etc. The information system includes any system that is accessible through gui vision or a visually accessible system, such as Ars. The system also includes a server system 'in a broader sense, including client software for terminals that communicate with the server system. The letters on the keypad can be used to remember different codes. There are several ways to do this, including: simple naming, initial naming or The full naming 'description is as follows. Simple naming is to specify the number associated with a given word or word as a code. For example, the Korean company name "b has a short code "1799" associated with 1, A, annihilation and X, As shown in Figure 4-2. In this case, ''71~社?7'' in the shortcode 1799'' is associated with the characters ~1, person, 7; and the bold mark in the ''' to make it easy for the user to notice. Shortcode for a specific word. Moreover, short codes can be extracted from words or words or words. For example, the short code of Mangbu is limited to ''1799', because in simple naming, the code includes numbers associated with any character belonging to the fixed word. For example, when the short code of the early 40 is set to and, The code of 入, 1 and Ξ related 可能, may become η 47 with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) lit on this page) Binding · Specialized 1272525 Λ ____________ Β7 V. Invention Description () (Please read the note on the back s write this page). Incoming, destroying and destroying related 1729", or and ~[, into, Η and related "I949", and constitute a foreign community 2 ; 4 All characters related to 1 3 2 9 4 2 9 3 . For the sake of brevity, the code associated with all characters that form a given word or word is called "Completely Related Simple Naming (FASN)", And the code that specifies the part of the character that forms a given word or word is called "Partially Related Simple Naming (PASN),". In both cases, simple naming (ie, simple coding) is associated with the characters that make up a given word or word. The same can be applied to other languages and Korean. For example, "caption" may have a short code "2786" associated with the consonant "CPTN" as a partial correlation code, which may be referred to as "consonant related short code". “escape” starts with the vowel and its consonant related short code is “727”, which corresponds to SCP”, which is the same as the subsynchronization short code of “scape”. Therefore, the first vowel is related to the consonant. The strategy can also be considered, because it minimizes the overlap between the short code in the definition and the corresponding word or word, and can improve the convenience of using the subtraction code. This method can be called "first vowel" Combination with consonant shortcode (First V〇wel +

Consonant-based Simple Code (1VCSC))”。與其他簡碼相 關的是,因一特定字之簡碼可以機械方式形成,因此第一 母音與子音簡碼組合體之使用別具優勢。 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 詞和字可以由簡單命名來編碼。根據已有技術文獻示 例中的詞至川句芒外,,有意義的字(音節)用於提取映 射爲Ο、匚、]和己的簡碼“ 83 14”。對於英文,已有技術 文獻示例中的“ data to night”可以具有與帶有語音値,例 如d、t、t及η的字符相關的簡碼‘‘ 3 8 8 6 ”。 48 · 本紙張尺度適用47國國家標準(CNS)A「規格(210 * 297公f了~ ' I282505 A7 B7 五、 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 發明說明() §司首命名是部分相關簡早命名的一個特例。對於韓 文’ §司首命名將映射到音卽(子母)的詞首子音的數字指定 爲代碼。爲間便起見’这種方法稱爲“基於音節(字母)的 詞首命名(SBIN)” 。例如,φ基於音節的詞首命名提取的 “外社思对”的基於音節的詞首代碼是與每個音節(字母)的詞 首子音相關的“ 1 7 9 9’’。基於音節的詞首命名旣可以應用 於其它語言也可以應用於韓文。例如’根據基於音節的詞 首命名,英文字“ entertainment”具有與e、t、t和爪相關 的基於音節的詞首代碼“ 3886”。基於音節的詞首命名對 於一個音節構成一個字母的韓文更加有用。 上述規則亦適用於中文及日文等其它一音節由一 符構成的語言中,當然其亦適用於韓文中。就中文而古 以音節為依據北京起始碼為”25”(與b及』·相關)(北京: 一個音節符號附於第一個.“e”上,而第;個音節符號則 於最後一個“i”上)或“14”,其中前者可參閱圖丨小而後者 可參閱圖10-1至圖10-4 〇 同樣’詞首命名也可以應用在詞中。例如,已有技術 文獻示例中的詞‘‘纠句呈7闽芒7卜可能呈右 7 』此具·有與每俩字〇和 的詞首字符相關的詞首代碼“ 8丨,,。仝 低像予式詞首命名 英文詞“ dance with the wolf”呈右命」 ,、有興d、w、t和w相 的字式詞首代碼”3979”。當代碼分派給整個詞時,字式 首命名對於每種語言更爲有利。 ^ 爲簡便起見,簡碼(即完全相關簡碼和部分相關簡 和詞首代碼(即基於音節的詞首代碼 間 4子式詞百代碼 49 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公f 請先WI讀背面之注意事項 寫本頁) 裝 字 第 附 關 詞 碼) )都 ν_δ . 1282505 A7 • B7 五、發明說明() .稱爲“簡碼(在較寬的意義上)”或“快捷代碼”。特別 地,每個完全相關簡碼,子音相關簡碼’基於音節的詞首 代碼和字式詞首代碼遵循它們的產生規則’並且因此在實 際中普遍使用。另外’根據規則由其它方法産生的代碼也 很容易使用。 完全命名就是輸入按照特定字符輸入方法要編碼的 給定字或詞的値,並且因此隨使用的字符輪入方法而變 化。與給定的字或詞相對應的數字値以一個字符,個字符 之方式編碼。例如’如圖4-2所示,根據PWSM(在已有技 術文獻中公開),已有技術文獻中的“叫奮,,具有完全編碼 “ 7 745 88 8944”。根據BRSM(在已有技術文獻中公開), 叫奮,,的完全編碼變爲“ 7448884”。如果使用不同於圖4-2 的另一種小鍵盤或另一種字符輸入方法,可以根據該小鍵 盤或該字符輸入方法來給出特定的完全編碼値。 6.2僖統中文字符輸LA足法 一般中文字符輸入方法需鍵入與該中文相對應之英 文字符,其方式為利用“英文對中文轉換鍵,,以顯示可轉緩 的中文字符,並選擇對應之中文字符,就如同以韓文字符 輸入中文一般。亦即,當使用者輸入羅馬字符對應之中文 聲音,系統將會搜尋對應之中文字符並將之提供予使用 者。請參閱圖5-1,其中說明中文之定義可經由中文字符 的英文發音建立之。 0.3 唯一簡碼 如果客戶終端負責對簡碼解碼(即當客戶終端具有特 50 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公f ) ----------裝 i I (請先¾讀背面之注意事項*^寫本頁) =0· 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 1282505Consonant-based Simple Code (1VCSC)). Related to other short codes, since the short code of a specific word can be mechanically formed, the use of the first vowel and consonant combination is unique. The words and words printed by the Property Bureau staff levy cooperatives can be coded by simple naming. According to the words in the examples of the prior art documents, the meaningful words (syllables) are used to extract the mappings into Ο, 匚,] And the short code "83 14". For English, "data to night" in the prior art document example may have a short code "' 3 8 related to characters with speech 値, such as d, t, t, and η. 8 6 ”. 48 · This paper scale applies to National Standards of 47 countries (CNS) A "Specifications (210 * 297 public f ~ ' I282505 A7 B7 V. Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employees consumption cooperatives printed invention instructions () § Secretary name is part A special case named after the early naming. For Korean, the name of the first naming of the vocabulary is assigned to the code. For the sake of convenience, this method is called "based on syllables (letters). The first naming of the word (SBIN). For example, the syllable-based initial code of φ based on the initial naming of the syllable is “1” related to the initial consonant of each syllable (letter). 7 9 9''. The syllabic-based prefix can be applied to other languages as well as Korean. For example, 'based on syllable-based initials, the English word "education" has e-, t, t and claw-related The syllable-based prefix code "3886". The syllabic-based initial naming is more useful for a syllable that constitutes a letter of Korean. The above rules also apply to other syllables such as Chinese and Japanese. Of course, it is also applicable to Korean. In Chinese, it is based on syllables in Beijing. The starting code for Beijing is "25" (related to b and 』) (Beijing: a syllable symbol attached to the first one. "e "Up, and the first syllable symbol is on the last "i") or "14", the former can be seen as small and the latter can be seen in Figure 10-1 to 10-4. It can be applied to words. For example, the word ''correction sentence in the example of the prior art document is 7 闽 7 卜 7 may be right 7 』 This has a prefix code associated with the first character of each two words and "8丨,,. The same as the low-like prefix, the English word "dance with the wolf" is right-handed, and the first word of the word "3979" with the d, w, t, and w phases. When the code When assigned to the whole word, the first naming of the words is more advantageous for each language. ^ For the sake of simplicity, the short code (ie, the fully relevant short code and the partial related simplified initial code (ie, based on the syllable-based initial code 4) Sub-word hundred code 49 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public f please WI Note on the back of this page) The wording of the word is attached))) ν_δ . 1282505 A7 • B7 V. Invention Description (). Called "Simplified (in a broader sense)" or "Quick Code" In particular, for each fully correlated shortcode, the consonant related short codes 'syllabic-based prefix codes and font prefix codes follow their production rules' and are therefore commonly used in practice. In addition, 'by rules, other methods are used. The code is also very easy to use. Full naming is the input of a given word or word to be encoded according to a specific character input method, and therefore varies with the character rounding method used. A number corresponding to a given word or word is encoded in characters and characters. For example, as shown in Fig. 4-2, according to the PWSM (disclosed in the prior art document), the prior art "Shenfen, with full coding" 7 745 88 8944". According to BRSM (in the prior art) As disclosed in the literature, the full encoding of the excuse, becomes "7448884". If you use another keypad or another character input method different from Figure 4-2, you can give it according to the keypad or the character input method. A specific full code 値. 6.2 中文 中文 Chinese character input LA foot method General Chinese character input method needs to type the English character corresponding to the Chinese, the way is to use the "English to Chinese conversion key, to display can be slowed down Chinese characters, and select the corresponding Chinese characters, just like Chinese characters in Korean characters. That is, when the user inputs the Chinese sound corresponding to the Roman character, the system will search for the corresponding Chinese character and provide it to the user. Please refer to Figure 5-1, which shows that the definition of Chinese can be established by the English pronunciation of Chinese characters. 0.3 Unique short code if the client terminal is responsible for decoding the shortcode (ie when the client terminal has a special 50 paper scale applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public f) ---------- i I (please read the following on the back *^ write this page) =0· Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office staff fee cooperative cooperative printed 1282505

=的ΌΊ及其簡碼値),則將與輸入的簡碼相對^ 或詞傳輸到伺服器。在㈣器根據 用:的子 口士 ☆〆 +的使用需要簡石隹 叶’客戶終端將簡竭本身(即顯示數字)發送給飼服哭^ '边對簡碼解;。因此,旣可以在客戶终 器對簡碼進行解碼。在们服 對於多個字或詞的單―代碼,有許多與相同簡碼 :的子或詞。這種CIM中簡碼之間的多意性方便地稱爲= ΌΊ and its shortcode 値), will be transmitted to the server relative to the input shortcode or word. In the (four) device according to the use of: the sub-mouth ☆ 〆 + the use of the need to use the simple stone 隹 leaf 'client terminal will be exhausted itself (ie display the number) sent to the feeding service cry ^ 'side to the simple code solution; Therefore, you can decode the shortcode at the client terminal. In the single-code of multiple words or words, there are many sub-words or words with the same short code: This multi-intentionality between short codes in CIM is conveniently called

加序號,以便存儲唯一代碼値,但仍會發生第二多意L a ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 〇 ^ ^ ^ ,統必須按照使用的優先順序來向使用者推荐這種字或 詞。對於不同字或詞的相同簡碼,系統按照字或詞的使用 頻率向簡碼添加序號,以及在向使用者推荐字或詞時,將 序號用作優先順序。此處.,系統不需要向簡碼添加序號, 並且可以分離關於優先順序的信息。. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 —例如,當“晉羽里,,和“平g驶,的簡碼都是作爲基於音 節之初始代碼為“ 9196,,者時,系統按照每個字的使用頻 率來向簡碼添加序號,並且爲向使用者推荐字而將序號作 爲優先順序來使用。如果“史,具有較高的頻率,則系 統向該字賦予優先順序,並且爲‘‘吾遇匀兑,,規定簡碼 91961” ’爲“平遇匀皇,,規定簡碼“ 91962,,。.同樣地,若先 生(xiansheng:其第一母音為 “a”)及學生(xuesheng:‘‘e”)之 音節式碼起始碼同為“97”,此時得根據該字之使用頻率而 在每一字後加以一序碼,以使該字得有其特有之排定順 51 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297^17 I282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( •序。舉例而言,當”先生(xiansheng),,之使用頻率較學生 (xuesheng)’ 一詞為高時,先生(xiansheng)之音節式碼起始 碼為“971”,而學生(xuesheng)則為“972,,。這種帶序號簡 碼可就權宜稱爲“唯一簡碼”,而不具有序號的重疊簡碼 •則稱爲“簡碼”,二者都稱爲“簡碼”。 在此先生(xiansheng)與學生(xuesheng)例中,當使用 者僅鍵入97時’系統將提供先生(xiansheng)與學生 (xuesheng)二詞供使用者選擇。當使用者鍵入“971,,時,系 統“97 1 ”將視之為先生(xiansheng)。 當對“X”及“s”音節式起始碼加以槔記時,使用者將對 螢幕顯示產生較好的視覺感受,將先生一詞加以些許大寫 字母”XianSheng”即為其中一例。此時,系統得從此部份 大寫字中取出簡碼“97”。 ¢.4 簡碼的使用 以下所述為指定予不同城市名稱的簡碼(例如,音節式 代碼初始代碼)’這在鐵路信息系統等中非常有用· 人Ί1~=78、牛翌=78、^^ = 39、么 1哥^]=739、。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 因爲,“4音”和“牛妒具有相同的音節式代碼初始代 碼,所以系統向簡碼添力σ序號,如‘‘人彳| = 7 $ 1,,和“中翌 = 782”。如果使用者僅僅向系統發送“78”,系統正確執^ 反饋(例如,提供一列和“+#’,或以聲音通知該列), 以致於使用者旣可選擇“ 音,,,又可選擇“牛翌,,。一曰最初 使用者輸入7 8 1” ’則系統認爲其簡碼就是“叫晉,,。 如果祠服器需要的是字“人彳奮”而非簡碼“ 78,,,則客戶 52 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) A7 B7 ^ ^82505 五、發明說明( •終端將簡碼解釋爲“冽音’,,並且將它發送給伺服器。在伺 取器根據將來的使用需要簡碼而客戶終端能對簡碼解碼 時,客戶終端必須僅僅將簡碼發送給伺服器。 在另一賦予城市名各種簡碼(完全相關簡碼、音節式起 始碼、子音相關簡碼、及第一母音+子音相關簡碼)之例 中,北京(Beijing)之音節式簡碼為“25”,因其與“13,,及‘‘>]·,, 相關;其完全相關簡碼為“2345464” ;子音相關字碼為 “2564”,因其與“b,,、“j,,、“n,,及“g”相關,此可參照圖1β1 之說明。 股票代號(為股市列出之公司)代碼的簡碼給定如下, 它們在各種股票信息系統等中很有用: 罟啦 11^=3098、印1誓圣^] = 39397、|}|!£]驾=83643,…。 例如,對“ 1^1¾王3 ”之音節式初始代碼的基碼 · A· E · X·入加以粗體標記,以令使用者得到更顯眼的 視覺效果。 下面給出銀行代碼的簡碼,它們在ATM和各種金融 信息系統中非常有用: ;?J(bank) = 14、斜U(bank) = 82、.... 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 •產 局 員 工 消 費 合 社 印 製 很明顯地,預定義的簡碼可以按照這樣的方式應用於 字或詞的輪入:使用者輸入預定義的簡碼,·然後客戶(終 端)向使用者提供譯碼的簡碼。這種方法稱爲“快捷輸入 方法(SIM)’’ ,將在後面與“同時輸入方法(CIM)” 一起說 明。 6 · 5按照選擇頻率的優先順序自動變更 53Add a sequence number to store the unique code 値, but the second multi-purpose La ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 〇 ^ ^ ^ will still occur, and the system must be used according to the priority order of use. Recommend such words or words. For the same short code of different words or words, the system adds a sequence number to the short code according to the frequency of use of the word or word, and uses the serial number as the priority order when recommending the word or word to the user. Here, the system does not need to add a sequence number to the shortcode, and can separate information about the priority order. The Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative prints—for example, when “Jin Yuli,” and “Ping G, the short codes are used as the initial code based on syllables as “9196,” when the system follows each The frequency of use of words to add a sequence number to the shortcode, and the serial number is used as a priority order for recommending words to the user. If "history has a higher frequency, the system gives priority to the word, and is '' In case of even exchange, the short code 91961" is set to "peace", the short code "91962,... Similarly, if Mr. (xiansheng: its first vowel is "a") and students (xuesheng: The starting code of the syllable code of ''e') is the same as "97". At this time, according to the frequency of use of the word, a sequence code is added after each word, so that the word has its own unique order. 51 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297^17 I282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (. Preface. For example, when Mr. xiansheng), the frequency of use is higher than that of students (xuesheng )' The word is high, Mr. (xiansheng) The syllable code start code is "971", and the student (xuesheng) is "972,". This serial number short code can be called "singular short code" instead of the overlapping short code of the serial number. Called "Simplified Code", both are called "Simplified Codes". In this case (Xiansheng) and students (xuesheng), when the user only types 97, the system will provide Mr. (xiansheng) and students (xuesheng). The two words are for the user to choose. When the user types "971,", the system "97 1" will be regarded as Mr. (xiansheng). When the "X" and "s" syllable start codes are remembered The user will have a better visual impression on the screen display. One of the examples is the addition of the capital letter “XianSheng” to the word “XianSheng”. At this time, the system has to take the short code “97” from this part of the uppercase letter. 4 The use of short codes is a short code assigned to different city names (for example, syllable code initial code). This is very useful in railway information systems, etc. People Ί1~=78, burdock=78, ^^ = 39, 么1哥^]=739,. The fee cooperative printed because "4 tone" and "burdock have the same syllable code initial code, so the system adds the σ sequence number to the shortcode, such as ''person 彳| = 7 $ 1, and 翌 翌 = 782". If the user only sends "78" to the system, the system correctly performs feedback (for example, providing a column and "+#', or notifying the column by voice), so that the user can select "sound,,, You can also choose "Burdock,,. The initial user input 7 8 1" 'The system thinks its short code is "called Jin,,. If the server requires the word "people" rather than the short code "78,, then the customer 52 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 B7 ^ ^82505 V. Description of the invention (The terminal interprets the shortcode as "sound" and sends it to the server. When the servo needs a shortcode according to future use and the client terminal can decode the shortcode, the client terminal must Simply send the shortcode to the server. In another example of assigning city names to various short codes (completely related short codes, syllable start codes, consonant related short codes, and first vowels + consonant related short codes), Beijing The syllable short code of (Beijing) is “25” because it is related to “13,, and ''>]·,; its fully correlated short code is “2345464”; the consonant related code is “2564”, because It is related to "b,,, "j,," "n,, and "g", which can be referred to the description of Figure 1β1. The short codes of the stock code (company listed for the stock market) are given as follows, they are Useful in various stock information systems, etc.: 罟啦11^=3098, printed 1 oath holy ^] = 39397,|}|!£]Drive=83643,.... For example, the base code · A· E · X· of the initial code of the syllable type of "1^13⁄4 King 3" is marked in bold to give the user More conspicuous visual effects. The short codes of the bank codes are given below. They are very useful in ATM and various financial information systems: ;?J(bank) = 14, oblique U(bank) = 82,.... Smart Finance and Production Bureau Employees' Consumption Co-production Printing It is obvious that predefined short codes can be applied to the rotation of words or words in such a way that the user enters a predefined short code, and then the client (terminal) The user provides a decoded shortcode. This method is called "Quick Input Method (SIM)" and will be described later along with the "simultaneous input method (CIM)". 6 · 5 Automatically change according to the priority of the selection frequency 53

12825051282505

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 .最初,“t她,,較,,之優先順序W。如果特 定使用者^向於非常頻繁地選擇“列奴,,,此時優先順序 設定為“平3¾里’,先於‘‘圣两;?H tj3,, 、ot 〇!。爲此目的,如果沒有特殊 地限制,就可以使用涉及交換序號以變更似順序的方 、、另種k擇疋,系統可以改變關於優先順序的分離 息。 口 系、洗或使用者可以指定(再指定)確定“早沼噶里,,的使用 - ? + ^ 八次都選擇丁抑里’’,則自動變更已有的優先順序。系 根據給定的選擇項來請求使用者確認優先順序的變更。 相同方法則亦可用於其它語言上,如上述“平玛噶呈, °U 可分別以”先生(xiansheng),,及”學 (xuesheng)”套用其中。 6.6簡碼的自動指定和·將簡碼相關字符之粗體標記 除了完全相關簡碼外,子音相關簡碼、音節式初始 碼和初始代碼都遵循它們的産生規則。因此,當規定了 碼的産生規則時,使用者輸入特定的字或詞,以便爲字 詞指定簡碼’然後自動提取相應的簡碼並將之存儲在系 中。此處,與簡碼相關的字符以黑體標記,以方便使用 使用。就英文而言,與字符相關的簡碼以大寫字符的形 突顯出來。 已有技術文獻公布了 “ SIM”和“快捷/完全CIM”。 以在系統中定義用於快捷輸入的簡碼,然後由使用者來 更。使用者可以進一步爲另一個字或詞指定簡碼。 54 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 統 及 生 代 簡 或 者 式 可 變 1IIIIIIIIIII1 · I I 請先¾讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 幻· 1282505Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative. Initially, "t her, compare, prioritize W. If a particular user ^ chooses "Lennu," the priority is set to " Flat 33⁄4 里 ', precedes ''圣圣二;? H tj3,, ot 〇!. For this purpose, if there is no special restriction, you can use the exchange number to change the order of the square, another kind疋, the system can change the separation of the priority order. The mouth, wash or user can specify (re-specify) to determine "the use of the early marsh, - - + ^ eight times choose Ding Sili", then Automatically change existing priorities. Requests the user to confirm the change in priority based on the given selection. The same method can also be used in other languages, such as the above-mentioned "Pingma 噶 ,, °U can be used separately" xian (xiansheng), and "xuesheng" apply. 6.6 Automatic Assignment of Short Codes and Bold Marking of Short Code Related Characters In addition to fully related short codes, consonant related short codes, syllable initial codes and initial codes follow their generation rules. Therefore, when a code generation rule is specified, the user inputs a specific word or word to assign a short code to the word' and then automatically extracts the corresponding short code and stores it in the system. Here, the characters associated with the shortcode are marked in bold to make it easier to use. In the case of English, short codes associated with characters are highlighted in uppercase characters. The prior art documents publish "SIM" and "fast/complete CIM". To define a shortcode for shortcut input in the system, and then by the user. The user can further assign a shortcode to another word or word. 54 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) and production or simple change 1IIIIIIIIIII1 · I I Please read the following notes on the back page. 幻·1282505

經濟部智慧財*1局員工诮費合作社印製 指定新字或詞的簡碼可以遵循用於産生簡碼而 又義 的規則,例如完全相關簡單,部分相關簡碼,音節式 '石馬 初始代碼,如已有技術文獻中公開的一樣。爲了根據字式 初始代碼來産生“ dance with the wolf”的簡碼,例如, 使用者必須輸入“dance with the wolf” ,然緣以簡碼創 建模式下輸入作爲字式初始代碼的“ 3 9 8 3,,。同樣,在根 據音節式代瑪初始代碼産生“兑,,的簡碼時,使用者 輸入“吾透旁里’’,然後在簡碼創建模式下輪入“ 9196” 。 教 若使用·者能使系統記住所欲之簡碼類型,那麼特定字 或詞就得自動指定簡碼,從而免去輸入想要的代碼類型的 麻煩。例如,當使用者在系統中將想要的簡碼的類型設置 爲音節式代碼初始代碼,並且簡單輸入“吾里,,,則系統 以自動的方式將“ 9196”指定爲“#3¾里”的簡碼。同樣地, 當使用設定使音節式起始碼為系統輸入方式,並輸入先生 (xiansheng) ’那麼系統便自動指定“97”為,,先生 (xiansheng)’’之簡碼。 前文已說明與英文相關之代碼可加以大寫,並標記 爲粗體。對此,當使用者事先指定在簡碼中使用大寫, 並且輸入“ DaTeToNight”,則系統自動將簡碼確定爲與大 寫子母DTTN”相對應的“ 3886”。否則,如果使用者輸 入如’’ToNight shoW”,則系統自動將簡碼確.定為與大寫字 母”TNSW””相對應的“ 8679”。 6.7使用字或詞的簡碼的31]^和〇:1]\4 隨着使用者輸入簡碼(除非另外特別說明,簡碼包括初 55 (請先¾讀背面之注意事項^寫本頁) i 1i· 裝 訂·· 本紙秦尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱)The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the wisdom of the Ministry of Finance, the Bureau of Labor, the Cooperatives, and the code of the designated new words or words can follow the rules for generating short codes and meanings, such as completely related simple, partially related short codes, syllables. The code is as disclosed in the prior art document. In order to generate a short code of "dance with the wolf" according to the initial code of the font, for example, the user must input "dance with the wolf", and then enter the initial code as a font in the short code creation mode. 3,,. Similarly, when generating a "short code" based on the syllable mega code, the user enters "I pass through" and then enters "9196" in the short code creation mode. The user can make the system remember the desired short code type, then the specific word or word has to automatically specify the short code, thus eliminating the trouble of inputting the desired code type. For example, when the user wants in the system The shortcode type is set to the syllable code initial code, and simply enter "Uri,,," the system automatically assigns "9196" as the "#33⁄4 Lane" shortcode. Similarly, when the setting is used to make the syllable start code the system input mode, and the input is xiansheng, then the system automatically assigns the "97" to the short code of "xiansheng". The code that has been described in English has been capitalized and marked as bold. In this regard, when the user specifies in advance to use uppercase in the short code, and enters "DaTeToNight", the system automatically determines the short code as "3886" corresponding to the uppercase DTTN". Otherwise, if the user inputs such as ' 'ToNight shoW', the system automatically sets the shortcode to "8679" corresponding to the capital letter "TNSW". 6.7 Use the word or word shortcode of 31]^ and 〇:1]\4 The user enters the shortcode (unless otherwise specified, the shortcode includes the initial 55 (please read the following on the back of the page ^ write this page) i 1i· Binding·· This paper Qin scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public)

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 五、發明說明( •始代碼,它是簡碼的特 ^ ^ r /式),糸統(客戶系統或伺服器 糸、.先)可將簡碼識別爲與Α相靡 k / '、相應的子或詞。因此,很明 顯,當糸統將特定的許踩 、上+ β馬識別爲相應的字或詞,並且顯示 字或詞時,使用者可以古& 在輪入新字中使用顯示的字或詞。 在用於其它國家的空々立认 的予付輸入方法中,字符輸入方式以 這樣的方式來實現:终端 鳊(吝戶糸統)存儲具有一個字一個 字分派的“完全相_自0,, + 2 關間碼的索引,並且顯示由使用者根 據字優先順序順序輪入沾认—ΤΙΕ , π铷入的給疋代碼的相應字,因此允許使 用者確疋目標字。更客沾e白 · 更夕的k心可以參考互聯網站,如 h邮"ww.tegiCx〇m和 _://^·ζί卿.com。在下文十^ 稱爲“完全相關SIM”或“外國方法,,,其亦可應權宜稱 為“似T9輸入方法(T9 Like Input黯^咐几皿)),,,因使 用此種方法之代表性輪入系統為Tegic公司所提供。圖5_2 所示即為T9系統之輸入範例,當使用者鍵入“622…,,當作 “meet”之輸入時,系統即提供使用者予“〇ff,,一字;但若使 用者键入“6228”時,系統提供者為“meet,,。 T e g i c公司和Z i公司的方法與根據本申請已有技術文 獻的鍵盤輸入字符的方法之間的比較顯示:本申請的字符 輸入方法將唯一代碼分派給每個字符,並允許用完全代碼 來輸入目標字符或目標字(詞),而上面提及的外國方法將 完全相關簡碼分派給每個字,並允許使用簡碼來輸入目標 字符。 外國方法有以下缺點·(1)其允命者為專有輸入預定 義的字’因爲代碼分派給每個字,(2)當不同的字共用一 56 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printed 1225025 V. Invention description (• initial code, which is the special code of ^^ r /), 糸 (customer system or server 糸, . first) can be shortcode It is identified as Αk / ', corresponding to the child or word. Therefore, it is obvious that when the system recognizes a specific step, a +β horse as a corresponding word or word, and displays a word or a word, the user can use the displayed word or the new word in the new word. word. In the prepaid input method for the vacancy recognition in other countries, the character input method is implemented in such a manner that the terminal 吝 (Seto )) stores "complete phase _ from 0," with one word and one word assignment. + 2 The index of the closing code, and the corresponding word of the given code by the user in the order of word priority is displayed, so the user is allowed to confirm the target word. · Even more k-heart can refer to Internet sites, such as h post "ww.tegiCx〇m and _://^·ζίqing.com. In the following ten ^ called "fully related SIM" or "foreign method, It can also be called “T9 Like Input Method”, which is provided by Tegic because of the representative wheeling system using this method. Figure 5_2 shows The input example of the T9 system, when the user types "622..." as the input of "meet", the system provides the user with "〇ff,"; but if the user types "6228", the system provides For "meet,,. A comparison between the methods of Tegic and Zi and the method of inputting characters according to the keyboard of the prior art document of the present application shows that the character input method of the present application assigns a unique code to each character and allows full code to be used. Enter the target character or target word (word), and the foreign method mentioned above assigns a fully relevant shorthand to each word and allows the short code to be used to enter the target character. The foreign method has the following disadvantages: (1) its allowable person is a predefined input word 'because the code is assigned to each word, (2) when different words share a 56 paper scale applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm)

[282505[282505

五、發明說明() .個代碼時,輸入使用頻率較低的字較難,因爲使用者尚需 再使用切換鍵或移動鍵來選擇和確認目標單詞;(3)在輪 入字期間,可能會暫時出現目標字外之字;及(句系統工 作時需要很大的存儲容量和較高的成本。 可以將簡碼(即部分相關簡碼或完全相關簡碼)分派給 常用的字或詞’並且在輸人目標字或詞時,使用簡碼。: 然,常用的字或詞可以在系統中預定義,並且提供給使; 者,或完全由使用者來指定。另—選擇是,應該允許使用 者隨意變更系統中預定義的簡碼。有利之處.在於,允許使 用者指定料,因爲刻者將獲得關於特定常用字或詞的 簡碼的知識。 爲簡便起見’在本發明中,使用簡碼(包括部分相關簡 碼,完全相關簡碼和初始代碼)輸入目標字符或詞的方法 被稱爲“快捷輸入方法(S.IM)”而使用完全代碼輸入目標 字符的方法稱爲“完全輸入方法(FIM)” 。如後面所述, 也可以使用SIM和簡的組合,這種方法稱爲“快捷/完 全同時輸入方法(快捷CIM)”或簡稱爲“同時輸入方法 (CIM),, 。 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 即使唯-代碼分派給每個字符,並且被用來輸入目標 字符’也會因鹽中的重覆選擇而產生多意性,此多意性 可就權宜稱爲“第一多意性”或“字符多意性”。相反 地’在諸如外國方法之類的方法(即SIM)中共用相同的 簡碼的不同字之間會發生多意性,在該方法中,代碼分派 給每個字並制來輸人目標字。爲簡便起見,這種多意性 57 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21G X 297 $ 1282505 A7V. Invention Description (). When entering a code, it is more difficult to input a word with a lower frequency of use, because the user still needs to use the toggle key or the move key to select and confirm the target word; (3) during the rounding of the word, it is possible Words outside the target word will appear temporarily; and (the sentence system requires a large storage capacity and a high cost when working. You can assign short codes (that is, partial related short codes or fully related short codes) to commonly used words or words. 'And use the shortcode when entering the target word or word.: However, commonly used words or words can be predefined in the system and provided to the user; or completely specified by the user. The user should be allowed to arbitrarily change the predefined shortcodes in the system. The advantage is that the user is allowed to specify the material because the engraver will gain knowledge about the short codes of a particular common word or word. For the sake of simplicity In the invention, a method of inputting a target character or word using a short code (including a partial related short code, a fully related short code, and an initial code) is called a "short input method (S.IM)" and a full code input target character is used. The method is called “Full Input Method (FIM).” As described later, a combination of SIM and Jane can also be used. This method is called “Fast/Complete Simultaneous Input Method (Fast CIM)” or simply “Simultaneous Input Method”. (CIM),. The Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office staff levy cooperatives print even if only the code is assigned to each character and is used to input the target character', which will result in multiple meanings due to repeated selection in the salt. This multi-meaning can be referred to as “first multi-meaning” or “characteristic”. Conversely, 'between different words sharing the same short code in a method such as a foreign method (ie SIM) In this method, the code is assigned to each word and the target word is input. For the sake of simplicity, this multi-purpose 57 paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21G). X 297 $ 1282505 A7

五、發明說明() •稱爲“第 夕w f生或字(詞)多意性,其中“多意性 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製· 一詞在此處係指第一多意性 在指定爲基本輪入模式的完全輸入模式中,系統首先 將輸入値:釋爲完全代碼並且錯誤地將輸入代碼識別爲 、字例如’在圖4-2中’當BRSM作爲SIM而應 用時’子科_,’的簡碍識別爲“ 877” (使用音節式代碼初 始代碼)並且系統首先將輸入的簡碼‘‘ 877”解釋爲完全 代碼,從而將“封令,識別爲脅。這適用於諸如“科牛”、 ,丁丁e、‘-^哲”,m,,、“年中令,、“物射,,或“早雜” 之類的子,在其中,第二和第三音節(字母)的初始子音對 應於相同的按鍵m在減爲基本輸人方法的缺 捷輸入方*卜系統首先將輪入値解釋爲簡碼,並錯誤地 將輸入的完全代碼識別爲不想要的字。這種㈣中簡碼 和完全代碼之間的多意性稱爲“第三多意性,,。 如常規般,使用用來選擇目標字的切換鍵或移動鍵就 可以克服第三多意性。另一種可選擇的方法是:在一個字 單元中,在輸人導致第三多意性的輸人M之前,輸入模式 在完全輸入模式和快捷輸入模式之間切換。這與本申請的 已有技術文獻中所述的方法較爲相似,其中設置有/ 7柝 制(即平假名/片假名轉換控制),以便在平假名^莫式下 片假名,或在片假名模式下輸入平假名。何如,在指定爲 基本輸入模式的完全輸入模式中,系統最初將選擇“快捷 /完全”控制之後的輸入値識別爲簡碼,並且參考索引向 使用者提供與輸入値相對應的目標字。同樣,在指定爲其 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公爱) (請先B3讀背面之注意事項*^寫本頁)V. Description of the invention () • It is called “the first day of wf life or the word (word) multi-meaning, in which “the Ministry of Intelligence and Intellectual Property’s Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative prints the word In the full input mode designated as the basic round-in mode, the system first interprets the input 値: as a complete code and erroneously recognizes the input code as a word such as 'in Figure 4-2' when the BRSM is applied as a SIM The obscurity of 'subsection _,' is identified as "877" (using the syllable code initial code) and the system first interprets the input shortcode ''877' as a complete code, thereby identifying the "sealing order" as a threat. This applies to children such as "Ke Niu", Ding Ding e, '-^ Zhe", m,, "Year of the Year," "Material," or "Early Miscellaneous", in which the second and The initial consonant of the third syllable (letter) corresponds to the same key m being reduced to the default input method of the basic input method. The system first interprets the round entry as a short code and incorrectly recognizes the input complete code as Unwanted words. The multi-meaning between the short code and the complete code in (4) is called "the third multi-meaning,. As usual, the third multi-sense can be overcome by using a toggle key or a move key for selecting a target word. Another alternative is to switch between the full input mode and the fast input mode in a word unit before the input of the third most intentional input M. This is similar to the method described in the prior art document of the present application, in which a /7 system (ie, hiragana/katakana conversion control) is provided, so that the pseudonym can be placed in hiragana, or in the film. Enter hiragana in kana mode. For example, in the full input mode designated as the basic input mode, the system initially identifies the input 选择 after selecting the “fast/full” control as a short code, and the reference index provides the user with the target word corresponding to the input 値. Similarly, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public interest) is applied to its 58 paper size (please read the following on the back of the B3 *^ write this page)

I I -=0· #t· !282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( •本輸入模式的快捷輸入模式中,系統最初將選擇“快捷/ 完全”控制之後的輪入値識別爲完全代碼。可以將“快捷 /完全”控制設置爲在輸入目標字之前或之後來選擇,但 是在這種控制的情形下,將控制設置爲在目標字之後來選 择更方便。 在CIM中,系統可以確定輸入値是完全代碼還是簡 碼。可以在字單元中使用索引來作出這種決定較好,以便 消除如上所述的第一多意性,或如後所述,在輪入該輸入 値的過程中作出這種決定。 在將CIM應用於指定爲基本輸入模式的完全輸入模 式中時,系統一個輸入一個輸入地(即一個値一個値地)檢 査每個輸入代碼是否構成完全代碼,並且在5忍識到輸入代 碼値沒有構成完全代碼時,將輸入値確定爲簡碼,以及參 考索引向使用者發送與簡碼相對應的字或詞’從而提高了 CIM的效率。同樣,在將CIM應用於指定爲基本輸入模 式的快捷輸入模式中,系統檢査每個輸入代碼値是否等於 索引中列出的輸入値,並且當沒有字與輸入値相匹配時’ 將輸入代碼値識別爲FIM的完全代碼。這意味着在使用 FIM規則的開始就可以消除第三多意性。同樣可以適用於 已有技術文獻中沒有作爲FIM公開的字符輸入方法。現 在將以下面的示例的形式針對已有技術文獻中公開的 FIM(基本重覆選擇方法和部分-整體選擇方法)來進行說 明。 例如,對於韓文,在使用BRSM時透過元全代碼輸入 59 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -----------·^裝--- (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂- #. 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 1282505II -=0· #t· !282505 A7 B7 V. INSTRUCTIONS (In the quick input mode of this input mode, the system initially selects the wheel 値 after the “Quick/Full” control to be recognized as a complete code. The Quick/Full control is set to select before or after the input of the target word, but in the case of this control, it is more convenient to set the control to be selected after the target word. In CIM, the system can determine that the input is The full code is still a shortcode. It is better to use an index in the word unit to make this decision in order to eliminate the first multi-sense as described above, or to make this in the process of entering the input 如 as described later. When applying CIM to the full input mode specified as the basic input mode, the system inputs an input field (ie, one by one) to check whether each input code constitutes a complete code, and at 5 When the input code does not constitute a complete code, the input 値 is determined as a short code, and the reference index sends the word or word corresponding to the short code to the user', thereby improving the CIM. Efficiency. Similarly, in applying the CIM to the shortcut input mode specified as the basic input mode, the system checks whether each input code 等于 is equal to the input 列出 listed in the index, and 'when no word matches the input '' The code 値 is identified as the full code of FIM. This means that the third degree of ambiguity can be eliminated at the beginning of the use of FIM rules. It can also be applied to the character input method that is not disclosed as FIM in the prior art literature. The form of the example is described with respect to the FIM (Basic Repeat Selection Method and Partial-Overall Selection Method) disclosed in the prior art documents. For example, for Korean, when using BRSM, the full-size code is input 59. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese country. Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -----------·^ Install--- (Please read the notes on the back and fill out this page) Order - #. Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau staff levy cooperative printed 1272505

五、發明說明() .的第二輸入値和第三輸入値應該是子音,它在圖4_2中說 明。如果違背這個規則,則輸入値被看作簡碼。當透過基 本子Θ的組合來處理緊子音時,相關的標準適用於使用 BRSM的所有情况。 在所有的語言中,當PWSM用作爲FIM時,兩個輸入 値對應於一個字符,並且一個輸入値相對於另一個而受到 限制。在英文的情况下,例如如圖U所示,假設僅僅水 平直線組合(HSC)可以應用於英文,而不是將PWSM應用 於輸入數字。如果第一行的按鍵[1]、[2]和[3]作爲與一個 字符相對應的第一輸入値(第一按鍵)使用時,第二輸入値 可以對應於第一行的按鍵[丨]、[2]和[3]。同樣,當在[2] + [1]之後選擇第二行的按鍵[4]、[5]或[6]時,下一個要構 成完全代碼的値是第二行中按鍵[4],[5]和[6]中的一個。 當輸入値違反這個規則,則系統將輸入値看作簡碼並且向 使用者推荐對應於簡碼的字。如當使用者利用CIM鍵入 “4357”代表“help”、且PWSM當作FIM時,且若 FIM以 基本輸入模式執行時,系統即知曉在第二值’’3’’輸入時, 輸入值不構成一全碼;此時,系統將該輸入值視作簡碼。 當使用圖4-2中的PWSM時,響應第一按鍵Π]輸入之 完全編碼的後續按鍵只是按鍵[1 ]或[2]。如果違反這個規 則,則系統認爲輸入値是簡碼而非完全代碼,並且參考索 引向使用者推荐與輸入値相對應的目標字。如果如圖1-3 所示,四個字符p、Q、R和S分派給按鍵[7 ]。則四個字 符中的一個可以分配給在PWSM中構成垂直相鄰組合 60 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先¾讀背面 -----裝---------------. 之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財-a局員工消費合作社印製 !2825〇5 A7 B7 五、發明說明() • (VAC)的網格單元。當在這種情况下選擇按鍵[7],以便形 成一個字符的完全代碼時,下一個按鍵可以是第三行的 [7]、[8]或[9] ’或按鍵[4]。如果違反這個規則,則將輸入 値看作簡碼。同樣可以適用於如果使用類似已有技術文獻 •中公開的PWSM的所有語言。 舉例而言,在以PWSM為基本輸入模式中的FIM,且 此時北京(Beijing)的簡碼在圖1]的簡碼索引中存成音節 式起始碼”25”之例中,若使用者鍵入“25”,那麼系統將在 [2]鍵後鍵下[5]鍵時(即自字頭開始)認定此輸入值“25,,不 構成全碼(因水平直線位置上的按鍵為[1]、[2]及[3】之 一),此時系統按簡碼索引所提供者就為輸入值”25”之“北 京’’。在中文模式時,系統提供使用者之字為簡碼,,25,,對 應之字(即北·京)(因為’’北京’’ 一詞在中文中即構成一目標 字)。就中文外的其它音標字符而言,系統提供簡碼為“ 25,, 之”北京”予使用者。若對應於簡碼“25”之字或詞有多者, 該字或詞將如表單列出以供使用者選擇,或使用者可重覆 鍵擊一特定鍵(以交替之方式為之)而選擇所需之字,此可 參閱圖5-4之說明。 經濟部智慧財i局員工湞費合作社印製 因此,圖5-4中的同時輸入法(CIM)係同時科用,,全輸 入法(Ful卜Input Method(FIM)),,及,,快捷輸入法(Sh〇rt cut Input Method(SIM))”而將北京(Beijing)等常用字之簡碼 註冊於簡碼中,其不需經過FIM及SIM模式過程,因此 得減少該等經註冊字之簡碼。 圖4-5表示一個基本子音分派給每個按鍵。因此,合 61 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) "~~--- A7 ,I282505 i 〜^-___;_SI____ 五、發明說明() •韓文中常用的音節式代碼初始代碼作爲簡碼而使用時,在 旣使用SIM又使用FIM時,可以避免第三多意性。這就 是說,當使用CIM中使用者輸入音節式代碼初始代碼時, 根據第二輸入(當透過CPM來輸入送氣子音和緊子音的輸 •入値)很難形成完全代碼。因此系統參考簡碼的索引並按 照優先順序的次序向使用者推荐正確的字。同樣的原理適 用於CIM中完全代碼的輸入。 如上所述,本發明的核心在於能於輸入字符期間確 定輸入値是否爲使用CIM時的簡碼和完全代碼。相同的 原理可適用於使用已有技術技術文獻和本發明之FIM, 系統中,或其它的FIM的情况中。舉例而言,一種字符輸 入方法需要對每個字符輸入一第一鍵及一第二鍵,其中該 第二鍵所指為輸入一字符時該第一鍵後所鍵下之鍵。以圖 1-1為例,其輸入原則為“P = [7] + [l],,。在圖1-1中,由於 第一鍵為[1]、[2]及[3]三者之一,因此系統便於輸入值達 反該原則時將該輸入值視作一簡碼。更具體而言,如上例 所述,本申請的FIM有利之處在於,在輸入期間可以檢查 輸入値是否形成FIM中的完全代碼。 C請先劢讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 訂·- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 端以 ί 戶 字 , 客標時 在目 以找 可,査 , 中 £ I Μ 弓 所索 請在性 申。意 本碼多 和代 一 獻全第 文完的 #或 中 技碼獻 有簡文 已得術 # 獲技 ,中有 1 器已 而服服 伺克 或便 性 意 多符 字 二 I 後 第另然 在 , , 後釋W 然 解索 , 的 的 引碼器 索代服 的全伺 戶完考 客或參 考碼段· 參簡階 段於 一 階用第 一 應在 第引以 在索可 統的統 系器系 ,服, 是伺是 况將擇 情段選 種階種 2 6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 12825055. The second input 値 and the third input 发明 of the invention description () should be consonants, which are illustrated in Figure 4_2. If this rule is violated, the input 値 is treated as a shortcode. When dealing with tight subtones through a combination of basic sub-keys, the relevant standards apply to all cases where BRSM is used. In all languages, when PWSM is used as FIM, two inputs 値 correspond to one character, and one input 値 is restricted relative to the other. In the case of English, for example, as shown in Figure U, it is assumed that only a horizontal straight line combination (HSC) can be applied to English instead of applying the PWSM to an input number. If the buttons [1], [2], and [3] of the first line are used as the first input 値 (first button) corresponding to one character, the second input 値 may correspond to the button of the first line [丨], [2] and [3]. Similarly, when the second line of buttons [4], [5] or [6] is selected after [2] + [1], the next 要 to form the complete code is the button [4] in the second line, [ One of 5] and [6]. When the input 値 violates this rule, the system treats the input 简 as a shortcode and recommends the word corresponding to the shortcode to the user. For example, when the user uses CIM to type "4357" for "help" and the PWSM for FIM, and if the FIM is executed in the basic input mode, the system knows that when the second value is ''3'' input, the input value is not A full code is constructed; at this time, the system regards the input value as a short code. When using the PWSM in Figure 4-2, the subsequent key that is fully encoded in response to the first key Π] input is just the button [1] or [2]. If this rule is violated, the system considers the input 简 to be a short code rather than a full code, and the reference index recommends the target word corresponding to the input 向 to the user. If shown in Figure 1-3, the four characters p, Q, R, and S are assigned to the button [7]. Then one of the four characters can be assigned to form a vertical adjacent combination in the PWSM. 60 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please read the back----- ---------------. Note: Please fill out this page again) Ministry of Economic Affairs Smart Finance - Bureau A staff consumption cooperative printing! 2825〇5 A7 B7 V. Invention Description () • ( VAC) grid unit. When the button [7] is selected in this case to form a full code of one character, the next button can be the [7], [8] or [9] ’ or button [4] in the third line. If this rule is violated, the input 値 is treated as a shortcode. The same can be applied to all languages if a PWSM similar to that disclosed in the prior art document is used. For example, in the case of FIM in the PWSM as the basic input mode, and in this case, the short code of Beijing (Beijing) is stored in the short code index of FIG. 1 as a syllable start code "25", if used If you type "25", the system will recognize the input value "25" when the [5] key is pressed under the [2] key (ie, starting from the beginning of the word), because the button on the horizontal line position is [1], [2], and [3]), at this time, the system provides the "Beijing" of the value "25" by the short code index. In the Chinese mode, the system provides the user's word as shortcode, 25, and the corresponding word (ie, Beijing·Beijing) (because the word ''Beijing'' constitutes a target word in Chinese). For other phonetic characters other than Chinese, the system provides the short code "25,," "Beijing" to the user. If there is more than the word or word corresponding to the short code "25", the word or word will be like a form. Listed for the user to select, or the user can double-click a specific button (in an alternate manner) to select the desired word, which can be seen in Figure 5-4. The employee input fee cooperative is printed. Therefore, the simultaneous input method (CIM) in Figure 5-4 is used at the same time, the full input method (Ful Input Method (FIM)), and,, the shortcut input method (Sh〇rt) Cut Input Method (SIM))" and the short code of common words such as Beijing are registered in the short code, which does not need to go through the FIM and SIM mode process, so the short code of the registered words must be reduced. Figure 4-5 shows a basic consonant assigned to each button. Therefore, the 61 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) "~~--- A7, I282505 i ~^-___;_SI____ V. Invention Description () • Korean When the initial code of the syllable code is used as a shortcode, the third degree of ambiguity can be avoided when using SIM and using FIM. That is to say, when the user inputs the syllable code initial code in the CIM, it is difficult to form a complete code based on the second input (when the input and output of the aspirating sub-tone and the compact sub-tone are input through the CPM). The system therefore refers to the index of the shortcode and recommends the correct word to the user in order of priority. The same principle applies to the full code input in CIM. As described above, the core of the present invention is to be able to determine whether the input port is a short code and a full code when CIM is used during character input. The same principle can be applied in the case of using the prior art documents and the FIM, system, or other FIM of the present invention. For example, a character input method requires inputting a first key and a second key for each character, wherein the second key refers to a key under the first key when a character is input. Taking Figure 1-1 as an example, the input principle is “P = [7] + [l],. In Figure 1-1, since the first key is [1], [2], and [3] One, so the system is convenient to input the value up to the principle when the input value is regarded as a short code. More specifically, as described in the above example, the FIM of the present application is advantageous in that it is possible to check whether the input port is during the input period. Form the complete code in FIM. CPlease read the notes on the back to write this page) Order ·- Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employees consumption cooperatives print the end of the word, when the customer is looking for, can check, In the middle of the £ I Μ bow, please ask in the sexual application. Yiben code and the first one to offer the full text of the finished text # or Zhongji code has a brief text has been acquired # 技, with 1 device has been served克或便性意多多字二I After the second is,, after the release of W, the quotient of the coder is the full-service customer or the reference code segment. The first one should be cited in the system of the system, and it is the service. Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 Kimiyoshi) 1282505

發明說明( :第一階段參考客戶的索引。而且,當系統在第一階段參 佶戶的索引然後在第二階段參考伺服器的索引將輪入 値解釋爲簡碼但未拍釗鈐λ ^ 禾找到輪入値的簡碼時,它就以這種方 將輸入値解釋爲完全代竭:在第-階段參考客戶的索弓丨, :則在第二階段參考飼服器的索引。另一種選擇是,系統 第一階段參考旣參考客戶的索引又參考伺服器的索弓! 來將輸入値解釋爲簡碼,然後允許使用者選擇目標字。關 於解釋方法(簡碼或完全代瑪)和解釋地點(客戶或祠服器) 的任何相似變化都是可能的。這就是說,有各種輸入方法 (fe碼或完全代竭)和解釋地點(客戶或飼服器)的組合 P (A)、(B)、(〇及(D)之任意組合皆可為輸入值 (A)-(B)_(c)_(D)或(a)_(c)_(b)_(d)等此可參閱圖 η 得 知〇 亦 如 (靖先S3讀背面之注意事項§窝本頁} 裝 幻· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 同時使用SIM和FIM具有以下優點:⑴在使用FIM 時,允許使用㈣擇幾乎所…括字典中不存在的字以 及預定字的字;⑺使用者可指定簡碼(非部分相關簡碼即 完全相關簡碼);(3)使用者可指定部分相關簡%,以顯著 減少輸入時的擊鍵次數;把字式初始代碼分派給詞以及 字。相反地,外國方法需以—個字_個字地査閱所有輸入 字的索引,因此必須使用與簡碼完全相關的代碼’以使相 同代碼分派給不同字的槪率達到最小。 . 另外,系統具有包括特定常用字或詞和該字或詞的代 碼値的索引,該索引需要的存儲器容量比外國方法的 更小。這種索引與包括正確或不正確的多意性字的系統中 63 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ^282505Description of the invention (: The first stage refers to the customer's index. Moreover, when the system indexes the account in the first stage and then refers to the index of the server in the second stage, the round-in is interpreted as a short code but not 钊钤λ ^ When Wo finds the short code of the round, it interprets the input 値 as completely exhausted: in the first stage, the customer's cable is used, and in the second stage, the index of the feeder is referenced. One option is that the first stage of the system refers to the reference customer's index and refers to the server's cable! To interpret the input 为 as a shortcode and then allow the user to select the target word. About the interpretation method (simplified or complete daisy) Any similar changes to the interpretation location (customer or server) are possible. That is to say, there are various input methods (fe code or complete exhaustion) and a combination of interpretation locations (customer or feeding device) P (A Any combination of ), (B), (〇, and (D) can be the input value (A)-(B)_(c)_(D) or (a)_(c)_(b)_(d ), etc., please refer to Figure η to learn about 〇 如 ( (Jing Xian S3 read the back of the note § Wo this page} installed magic · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau The use of SIM and FIM by the consumer consortium has the following advantages: (1) When using FIM, it is allowed to use (four) to select words that do not exist in the dictionary and words of the predetermined word; (7) the user can specify the short code (non-part The relevant short code is the fully relevant shortcode); (3) the user can specify a partial related simple % to significantly reduce the number of keystrokes at the time of input; assign the initial code of the word to the word and the word. Conversely, the foreign method needs to - The word_word is used to refer to the index of all input words, so the code that is completely related to the shortcode must be used to minimize the rate at which the same code is assigned to different words. In addition, the system has specific words or The index of the word and the code 该 of the word, the index requires less memory capacity than the foreign method. This index is applicable to the Chinese national standard in 63 paper scales in systems including correct or incorrect ambiguous words. (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) ^282505

五、 發明說明( 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 •產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 的‘索引” 一樣,以便於消除多意性。 在每種語言中,子音具有特定字的發音値,並且廣泛 使用從子音中提取縮略詞的方法。以英文爲例,軍事術語 “captain”縮寫爲“CPT”,其包括的子音具有“capwn” 的聲音値,“sergeant” 爲 “SGT”, “staff sergeant,,爲 ‘‘SSG”,“ sergeant first class”爲 “ SFC,,。儘管 “ captain,’ 和“private”有兩個音節,作爲縮寫詞提取的子音被看作 表示各自的音節的子音。因此,“ captain”的肩碼是與 “ CPT”相關的 “ 278”。 本發明的糸統允許按照音節來爲常用的字或詞來指 定部分相關代碼並且該系統使用SIM,所以在輸入字符 要較少勞動力的意義上,本發明非常有意義。音節在發 學上定義爲“心理實體”。子音具有音節的聲音値。不 能離開母音提取“ AAI.,,來分析“ captain,,。但是 captain”可以根據子音提取“ CPTN,,或“ cpT,,來分析 據報道,任何英文句子都可以根據成分子音來分析而不 每個字中的母音。這就是說,部分相關簡碼與每個構成 即的子音的聯合使用使得使用者自然地應用SIM,並且 便於使用。 具體地講,可以在縮略詞的基上使用簡碼,因爲在 文國家中廣泛使用縮略詞。例如,所列出的公司名稱通 以縮略詞來表示。允許使用者爲特定的字或詞指定簡碼 類型(即部分相關簡碼和部分相關簡碼),其優點是容易 住常用字或詞的代碼値。而且,如果使用者僅需要使用部 而 音 可 用 音 更 英 常 的 記V. Description of invention (the 'index' printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Bureau of Consumers and the Consumers' Cooperatives, in order to eliminate the ambiguity. In each language, the consonant has the pronunciation of a specific word, and is widely used to extract from the consonant. The method of acronym. In English, for example, the military term "captain" is abbreviated as "CPT", which includes the sub-tones with the sound of "capwn", "sergeant" for "SGT", "staff sergeant,, for '' SSG", "sergeant first class" is "SFC,". Although "captain," and "private" have two syllables, the subtones extracted as abbreviations are treated as sub-tones representing the respective syllables. Therefore, "captain" The shoulder code is "278" related to "CPT." The system of the present invention allows a part of the relevant code to be specified for a commonly used word or word according to the syllable and the system uses SIM, so in the sense that the input character requires less labor. The invention is very meaningful. The syllable is defined as a "psychological entity" in the school. The consonant has the syllable sound 値. Can not leave the vowel Take "AAI., to analyze "captain,, but captain" can extract "CPTN," or "cpT, according to the consonant. According to reports, any English sentence can be analyzed according to the component consonant instead of each word. That is to say, the joint use of the partial related short codes with each constituent sub-tone enables the user to apply the SIM naturally and is convenient to use. In particular, the short code can be used on the basis of the abbreviation because Abbreviations are widely used in the country. For example, the company names listed are represented by acronyms. Users are allowed to specify short code types for specific words or words (ie, partial related short codes and partial related short codes). ), the advantage is that it is easy to live with the code of common words or words. Moreover, if the user only needs to use the part, the sound can be more common.

. !·!裝 C請先Μ讀背面之注意事項3寫L 寫本頁) 64 本紙張尺度財関家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297⑧ 、發明說明() •分字或詞,則分派鉍 而非字或詞的字符。D個字或詞的是簡碼(如1、2、3等 6·8簡碼/相應的6 在爲多個字’或詞:的分組和搜索範圍的指定 •以透過將與該簡碼相:?碼時出現重疊有多種情况.。可 特定字或詞組的朽碑兔的字或詞分組並且搜索僅用於 意性字或詞無少簡碼之間的多意性(即第二多 中。 屬於一個組,它可以包括在多個紐 例如,簡單命名之 〜 稱、常用字(詞)等類&予或詞分成公司名稱、城市名 分成社會、政治等_:二。(或;°這一組可以細 分組,但可以是三铋 s貝把例提供的是兩級三類 閱圖5-6,若使用者奉、及或更多級別的樹狀分组。請參 相應的命名的字或詞,因=中搜索與特定的輸入簡碼 因此減少了第二多音性。鬥 =用者將搜索範圍限制在常用字或了二常用: 或詞組及其所有下級組中搜索命名的/、、先在吊用字 將搜索範圍限制在f ^ ^。如果使用者 社會類別及其所有j @ J中,則糸統在 所有下級組中搜索命名的字或詞。 現將圖5-6中的樹狀組當作視窗搜. 响㈣各存放區,其搜尋範圍可由系^ 以重設。舉例而言,使用者在城市名稱二動方式加 結構中選擇-特定域市,下一輸 姑〜仃政區階層 定城市之下層行政區名。使寸靶圍即為該特 L名以使用者選擇“~|,,為—城市 1282505 , Α7.··! Please read the following notes on the back of the C. 3 Write L Write this page) 64 This paper scales the fiscal standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 2978, invention description () • word or word, then Distribute 铋 instead of words or words. D words or words are short codes (such as 1, 2, 3, etc. 6.8 short codes / corresponding 6 in multiple words 'or words: grouping and search range The designation of the wording or the wording of the word or phrase in the specific word or phrase can be grouped and searched only for the meaning word or the word is short. The multiple meanings between the two (that is, the second most. belong to a group, it can be included in multiple new words, for example, simple naming ~ naming, common words (words), etc. & or words are divided into company name, city name Divided into social, political, etc. _: two. (or; ° This group can be subdivided, but can be three 铋 s shell example provided two levels and three categories read Figure 5-6, if the user is, and or Multi-level tree grouping. Please refer to the corresponding named word or word, because the search in = and the specific input short code thus reduce the second polyphonic. Limit the search to common words or two commonly used: or the phrase and all of its subgroups to search for the named /, first use the word to limit the search to f ^ ^. If the user social category and all of them j @ In J, the system searches for the named words or words in all the subordinate groups. Now the tree group in Figure 5-6 is used as the window search. (4) Each storage area can be reset by the system ^. For example, the user selects the specific domain city in the second name of the city name, and the name of the lower administrative district in the next incarceration zone. Select "~|,, for - city 1225025, Α7

•時,其下一選擇範圍“子(gu),,將往 選擇“贷包子(Yangcheon-gu),,時,、方向走。當使用者 Yangcheon- gu中的“罟(dong)。 選擇範圍將為 6·9交換伺服器的使用 對簡碼的解释可以在客戶短或伺 〜u服器中執行。另— 選擇是,可以使用專門負責解釋簡七 ^ 硬 〒間碼(包括——些情况下 完全代碼)的交換伺服器,以便向客戶娃七 尸〜鸲或另一個伺服 盗提供與該簡碼相對應的字或詞。如圖61所示<在圖中 客戶終端首先對簡碼解碼,如果不能解釋與輸入的簡崎相 對應的字或詞,則交換飼服器在第二階段解釋與輸入簡碼 相對應的字或詞。一旦解釋失敗,每個伺服器可以在第三 階段解釋與輸入簡碼相對應的字或詞。第三簡碼譯碼伺服 器(就權宜稱爲“第三词服器”)是安裝有使用輸入簡碼 或其相應字或詞的應用程序的伺服器。 利用交換伺服器,甚至當第三伺服器需要字或詞而井 簡碼時,使用者也輸入簡碼。即使第三伺服器沒有存儲簡 碼和與該簡碼相對應的字或詞,交換伺服器也解釋由使用 者輸入的簡碼,以便向第三伺服器發送相應的字戋詞。 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 當輸入簡碼時’系統在索引中査詢與該簡焉相對應的 字或詞,並且將該字或詞逐個輸入(即一値接一値)、或以 字爲單位輸入(即一字接一字)的方式反饋給客戶終端或 每個伺服器。 6 · 1 〇字單位的區分 此處使用的術語“字單位,,指字從詞頭到詞尾範圍 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 •的長度。透過用來區別字的所有因素的 空格、模式轉換、回車等來確定字單位=合,例如,詞頭、 〜詞尾、空格〜空袼、空格〜模式轉換,等來t二透過詞頭 以字爲單位的反饋可以透過目前支 確疋予的輸入。 .言來進行。、凋絡环境的編程語 6.11簡碼和相應的字或詞的下裁 客戶還能從伺服器中下載簡碼和盥符踽 子或詞,而不用直接存错簡碼和 曰 - 可以以字或詞爲單位,或以上面及 , 致及的字或詞組〜 狀結構分類)爲單位來進行下載。 丁 Γ執如果選擇一個分類, 客戶可以下載其下級分類以及登遮 趿刀頦以及選擇的分類。在下载期 客戶終端可以以飼服器所設置的字或詞的樹狀結構^ 屬於相應分類的字或詞及其下級分類分派給由使用者 定的分類。負責這項工作的是主要功能是對簡碼解碼的 換伺服器。 7.符號之輸入 如已有技術文獻所述,字符按照母語,數字和英文 母的次序分派,其中字符按照“與BLE .的接近次 (OPBLE)來分配’而母語和數字按照與BLE的接近次 在BRSM中選擇。同樣地,分派給特定按鍵的數字和英 字母以及母語可以透過SCPM來輸入。 而且’本發明提供一種有效輸入各種小鍵盤上沒有 記的符號(即使用隱藏控制處理方法)的方法,而在已有 術文獻中,這些符號要標記在按鍵上。 67 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先¾讀背面之注 的 掛 則 指 交 字 序 序 文 標 技 11¾ i, 意事¾¾寫本頁) 訂· •^· 1282505 > A7 B7• When the next selection range is “sub (gu), you will choose “Yangcheon-gu”, “,,, and direction”. When the user Yangcheon-gu in the "罟 (dong). The choice range will be the use of the 6.9 exchange server for the shortcode can be explained in the client short or servo ~ u server. Another - select yes, can Use a switching server that is specifically responsible for interpreting the simple seven^ hard code (including the full code in some cases) to provide words or words corresponding to the short code to the client seven corpses~鸲 or another server thief As shown in Fig. 61 < In the figure, the client terminal first decodes the short code, and if the word or word corresponding to the input Jane is not explained, the exchange feeder corresponds to the input short code in the second stage. Word or word. Once the interpretation fails, each server can interpret the word or word corresponding to the input short code in the third stage. The third short code decoding server (just called the "third word service device" Is a server installed with an application that uses an input short code or its corresponding word or word. With the exchange server, even when the third server needs words or words and the code is short, the user also inputs the short code. The third server does not store the shortcode And the word or word corresponding to the short code, the exchange server also interprets the short code input by the user, so as to send the corresponding word verb to the third server. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee 诮 cooperative cooperative printing When entering the shortcode, the system queries the index for the word or word corresponding to the simplification, and inputs the word or word one by one (ie, one by one), or inputs in words (ie, one word after another) The word) is fed back to the client terminal or each server. 6 · 1 Unit of the word distinction The term "word unit" used here, the word range from the beginning to the end of the word, the paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (The length of the printed version of the Intellectual Property Office of the Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The word is determined by the space, mode conversion, carriage return, etc. used to distinguish all the factors of the word. Unit = combined, for example, prefix, suffix, space ~ empty space, space ~ mode conversion, etc. The feedback from the second word through the word prefix can be input through the current support. Programming language of the environment of the environment 6.11 Short code and the corresponding word or word of the customer can also download the short code and the scorpion scorpion or word from the server, without directly storing the wrong short code and 曰 - can be word or The word is a unit, or is downloaded in units of the above and the word or phrase ~ structure classification. If Ding Hao chooses a classification, customers can download their sub-categories as well as the classification and selection of the classification. During the download period, the client terminal can assign the word or word belonging to the corresponding category to the word or word of the corresponding category and its subordinate classification to the user-defined classification. Responsible for this work is the main function is to change the short code server. 7. Input of symbols As described in the prior art documents, characters are assigned in the order of the mother tongue, the number and the English mother, wherein the characters are assigned according to "OPBLE" and the native language and numbers are in close proximity to BLE. The selection is made in BRSM. Similarly, the numbers and English letters assigned to specific keys and the native language can be input through SCPM. And the present invention provides an effective input of symbols not recorded on various keypads (ie, using hidden control processing methods). Method, and in the existing literature, these symbols should be marked on the button. 67 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) (Please read the back of the note first) Refers to the word sequence text labeling technique 113⁄4 i, meaning 3⁄43⁄4 write this page) order · •·· 1282505 > A7 B7

五、發明說明() 這就是說,本發明將“符號控制,,分派給網格單元中 適當的一個,並且由符號控制和與特定符號相關連的按鍵 (即除控制按鍵之外的另一個按鍵)的組合來输入符號。在 此處,與點” ·”相關連的按鍵是按鍵[5],因爲“ 口”.與 “ 口降$”(點的韓國名稱)的第一音節“叶,相關連。 例如,如已有技術文獻所述,符號控制可以安排在能 利用韓文示例(圖4-2)中按鍵[*]的兩次連續擊鍵來選擇的 網袼單元的位置。這就是說,代表性字符和其相,繼字符之 間的關係這樣給出1 (代表性字符)、3(第二)、符號(第 三)、…。例如,當控制設置爲要在代表性字符之前選擇 . * . · ·- 時,” ·”的輪入這樣給出:{符號} + D=[*] + [*] + [5], 或當控制設置爲要在代表性字符字後選擇時,〇=!□+{符 號} = [5] + [*] + [*]。如果符號控制安排在能使用按鍵[*]的 連續三次擊鍵來選擇的網袼單元,則在上面的示例中添加 依次選擇按鍵P]。 僅使用一個符號控制,即使符號分派給1 0個數字按 鍵中的每一個,那也只能輸入1 0個符號。例如,下面給 出了將符號分派給每個按鍵·· 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 按鍵[1 ]:符號“? ”( “ Ί”在形狀上與“? ”相關); 按鍵[2] ··符號“ ”( “ l/’與“三翌”(意思是韓文的 “感嘆號”)的第一音節“ ii”相關); 按鍵[3]:符號“$,,(“1=:”與“曾奸’(意思是韓文的 “美元”)的第一音節“曾”相關); 按鍵[4]:… 68 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 按鍵[5]:符號,,·,,(“口,,與“叶召5,,(意思是韓文的 “點”)的第一音節“D卜相關); 按鍵[6 ]:符號“ *,,( “ y,,與“ 狂”(意思是韓文的 星號)的第一音節“皆,相關); 按鍵m :符號“,,,(“ A,,與“哲狂,,(意思是韓文的 “逗號,,)的第一音節“皆相關); 按鍵[8]:符號“,,,,(“ 〇,,與“ 〇」吾早賞,(意思是韓 文的“引號”)的第一音節“ <^,,相關); . · 按鍵[9]:符號“〜^母音“一”在形狀上與“〜”相關); 和 按鍵[〇]:符號“@,,(數字“〇,,在形狀上與 ^ ^ m ) 如上所述,能透過符號控制與除該符號之外的按鍵 組合來輪入各種符號。分派給每個按键的符號考慮了母 t # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ 稱或符號的外形和按鍵上英文字母之間的mu 形狀和按鍵上數字的名猶以;5 w 扪石杈以及形狀之間的關係。這種考 並不一定限定於上面提及的情况 ,几並且可以由使用者根 其喜好重新進行設置。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 •產 局 員 工 消 費 合 因此,可以對這些頻繁使用的 j付就進仃處理,如同 們是屬於那些容易使人們想起复 ό姑 ,、谷自付唬的數字按鍵 相繼字符。在上面的示例中, 、於形狀的相似性,問 韓文名稱爲‘‘##$,,)與指定淡“ 、、口 π的按鍵[1]相關, 爲比問號“?”更主要的點” ” (h h Λ_λ • .(斡文名稱爲‘‘ 口降丑 帶有作爲“的第一音節“叫”沾· 1 . .r的初始子音的“ 口”。 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 同樣’將符號分派給每個按鍵可能與英文名稱/形狀或 數字名稱/形狀相關。下面的示例的適甩於與母語相结人。 按鍵⑴:符號“?”(字符‘V,與“Questionmark,,的 第一字符相關); 按鍵[2]:符號“,,,(字符“C”與“ c〇mma,,的第一字 符相關); 按鍵[3]:符號” (字符“ d”與“ D〇t,,的第一字符相關); 按鍵[4]:符號“! ” ( “i”在形狀上與‘‘丨,,相關); 按鍵[5]: • ... . ..... . .' 按鍵[6]:… 按鍵[7]:符號“s”與“Slash”的第一字符相關); 按鍵[8]:符號“:,,(數字“8,,在形狀上與“」,,相關); 按鍵[9]:符號“! ”( “ X”與 “exciamati〇n mark”的 發音相關); 按鍵[〇]:符號“ 數字“ 0”與在形狀上與“涵,,相 關)。 主要使用英文來分派符號的優點在於這種分派可以 適用於不講英文的國家,其中與英文相關的母語標記在小 鍵盤上。使用冒號“:”和數字“ 8 ”之間在形狀上的相似性 通常是可以接受的,而與語言無關。同樣,如果不適用於 上述的示例,在將“,,,分派給按鍵[9]時,則可以考慮 逗號“,”和數字“ 9”之間在形狀上的相似性。 可以將符號控制分配給合適的按鍵。對於英文,除非 70 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先M讀背面之注 1·!裝 注意事項寫丄 寫本頁) 訂-· 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 诮 費 合 作 社 印 製 1282505 A7 — ---1-— R7 ________ 五、發明說明() •另一個控制被分配給圖1 -1中的按鍵[* ],則符號控制可以 使用按鍵[*]的一次擊鍵來選擇(符號控制安排在按鍵[*] 的基本網格單元的位置)。對於包括帶有詞綴的帶詞綴字 符的歐洲母語,符號控制可以安排在按鍵[0]或[#]的基本 •網格單元的位置。由於符號控制分派給按鍵[0],因而令 人滿意的是不將符號“ @,,分派給按鍵[〇]。 如果控制設置爲在代表性字符之後被選擇,並且符號 控制分派給按鍵[*],則在圖H中輸入冒號“可以這樣 給出:=[8] + {符號} = [8] + [*],,。 從上述不例中可以看出,在每個按鍵具有相關符號的 含義並且付號控制分配缮控制按鍵的一個網格單元的情 况下’只能輸入10個符號。由於在上面的示例中與 “ slash”相關,標記‘‘s”的按鍵可以用來指定任何一個符 號,例如斜線、分號、句點等。由於標記有“d,,的按鍵與 “dot”相關,考慮到形狀的相似性,所以“丨”的按鍵用來 指定“感嘆號”。 因此能由CPM使用多個符號控制(如符號控制ι、符 號控制2、··.·)來輸入更多的符號。例如,點的含意分2 給與“ d”(或“口陣$,,的含義分派給標記有“ 口,,的按鍵 關的按鍵,以便應付在形狀上相似的返號“·,” ,如同^ 是“ dot”的相繼字符。 如圖7-2所示’其中向圖4-5加入了符號控制,當控 制按鍵設置爲[*]並且控制設置爲要在代表性字符輪入上 後被選擇,則輸入這樣給出“ d〇t( ) = [3] + {符= 71 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁} -裝 ----1 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( ·Π = [3卜[*] + [*] + [*],,,以及“逗號(,)=[3]+{符號 + 。從鏈型相繼控制處理方法 (SCPM)的觀點來看,輸入這樣給出:逗號(,)=點+{後繼卜 點+[*] = [3] +[*] + [*] + [*] + [*]。當不由cpm來輸入送氣子 •音時(即假設控制按鍵上沒有送氣子音),則使甩按鍵[*] 的兩次擊鍵来選擇“符號控制1,,(即應用跳躍控制處理方 法)。同樣,形狀上彼此相似的冒號和分號被看作分派给 相同按鍵的相繼字符,並由CPM來輸入。同樣,可以將此 應甩於其它的符號。 甚至使用兩個符號控制時,即“符號控制丨,,和“符號 控制2”,系統必須向每個按鍵分派符號的含義,並且記住 它,因此系統在數字符號的輸入方面具有局限性。因此, 將符號分類爲:例如點和逗號、或冒號和分號,並且分派 多個符號控制,以便輸入較大數目的符號。. 優選的是使用者有選擇地設置符號分類Ό本發明提出 一種符號分類的通常示例。首先,點”的變型可以這 樣分類,例如,點” ·” 、逗號“,”、冒號“:”、分號“;”、 經濟部智慧財-JL局員工湞費合作社印製 引號“ ” ”、問號“?” 、感嘆號“!,,等等。這一組包 括點形狀的符號,即“零維”符號。在此處,問號“?” 和感嘆號“! ”旣是零維的又是一維的,因此包括在零維 (點形狀)的符號組。確疋該組的附加優先順序考虞了如已 有技術文獻中所述的使用頻率。優選的是,在確定優先順 序時’使用者可以指定這種考慮。當大量的符號被看作相 繼符號時,推荐作法是,控制設置爲在代表性字符之後被 72 . 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' ---- 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 •選擇。當控制按鍵重覆按下時,帶右薜-# 叮 ▼百顯不窗口的終端可以 顯示相繼符號的變化。 使用者可選擇性把點形狀的(零維的)符號與特定的按 鍵聯繫起來。例如,作爲該組最常用的和代表性的符號的 點” ·,,被看作屬於包括“^”的“”的按鍵⑴的相繼符 號。如果在輸入代表性字符之後使用圖7-1中指定爲按鍵 [* ]的符號控制按鍵來應用控制,其中所述圖7 _丨中的符繁 控制添加入圖1-1,則輸入這樣給出:點(·^ + , 號(,)=[3 ] + [*] + [*]’ 冒號(:)=[3 ] + [*] + [*] + [*],分號() m+m+t*卜[*]+[*],等等。因爲它們都是零維的:式 點形狀的符號可以看作屬於按鍵[〇]並且與之相關。另 種選擇是,考慮到點”是最基本的形式,它們可以 作屬於按鍵[1]的相繼符號。 接着’線形(即一維)符號這樣分類,例如,斜線“广 帽形標記“;”、問號“?” 、感嘆號“ !,,、圓括號^” 圓括號2“)’’、尖括號1“<”尖括號2“>,,、方括號^”、 括號2“[”、波浪號“〜”、負號“—,,、箭頭卜一,,〜 、箭 2“— ”等。考慮了已有技術文獻所述的使用頻率來確定 組的附加優先順序,並且所述的優先順序與正墟〜 ’ ί日疋的 定按鍵的相繼字符相關。例如,線形符號被看作 β屬於用 指定符號Ί”的按鍵[1]或按鍵[5]的相繼符號。 與線相關的符號(即二維者)之分類如: ampersand“&”、星號 “ 、Sharp“#’’、美元符鱿“ …、心形 1“卩,, 逗 看 方 該 特 來 圓“W + = ”曰圓 心形 2 ‘ 73 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)V. INSTRUCTIONS () That is to say, the present invention assigns "symbol control," to the appropriate one of the grid cells, and is controlled by symbols and associated with a particular symbol (ie, another control other than the control button) The combination of the keys) is used to enter the symbol. Here, the button associated with the point "·" is the button [5], because the "mouth" and the "mouth drop $" (the Korean name of the point) are the first syllable "leaf , related. For example, as described in the prior art document, the symbol control can be arranged at the position of the cell unit that can be selected using two consecutive keystrokes of the button [*] in the Korean example (Fig. 4-2). That is to say, the relationship between the representative character and its phase, and the following characters, gives 1 (representative character), 3 (second), symbol (third), .... For example, when the control is set to select before the representative character. * . · · -, the rounding of "·" is given as follows: {symbol} + D=[*] + [*] + [5], or When the control is set to be selected after the representative character word, 〇=!□+{symbol} = [5] + [*] + [*]. If the symbol control is arranged in a net unit that can be selected using three consecutive keystrokes of the button [*], add the button P] in the above example. Only one symbol control is used, even if the symbol is assigned to each of the 10 numeric buttons, then only 10 symbols can be entered. For example, the following gives the assignment of symbols to each button. · Ministry of Economic Affairs, Smart Finance, Production Bureau, Consumer Cooperatives, Print Button [1]: Symbol "?" ("Ί" is related in shape to "?"); [2] ·· The symbol “ ” (“ l/′ is related to the first syllable “ ii” of “三翌” (meaning “exclamation mark” in Korean); button [3]: symbol “$,, (“1 =:"Related to the first syllable "Zeng" of "Zeng rape" (meaning "US dollar" in Korean); Button [4]:... 68 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (button [5]: symbol,, ·,, ("mouth,, and "Ye Zhao 5,, (meaning "Korean point") the first syllable "D卜)); button [6]: symbol "*,, ("y,, and "mad" (meaning Korean asterisk) the first syllable "all, related); button m: symbol ",,, (" A,, with "zhe mad,, (meaning Korean comma,,) the first syllable "all related"; button [8]: symbol " ,,,,(" 〇,, with "“" I am early, (meaning Korean quotation marks) the first syllable " <^,, related); . · Button [9]: Symbol "~^ The vowel "one" is related to "~" in shape); and the button [〇]: the symbol "@,, (the number "〇, in shape and ^ ^ m ) as described above, can be controlled by the symbol and divided A combination of keys other than the symbol to wheel in various symbols. The symbol assigned to each button takes into account the parent t # ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ ^ # ^ ^ ^ The shape of the symbol or the shape of the symbol and the mu shape between the English letters on the button and the name of the number on the button ; 5 w 扪 杈 and the relationship between the shapes. This test is not necessarily limited to the case mentioned above, and can be re-set by the user at his or her preference. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Ministry of Finance, and the Bureau of Labor and Expenditure, can therefore handle these frequently used j payments, as if they belong to the number of characters that are easy to remind people of the ό , , , , , , , , , , , , , . In the above example, the similarity of the shape, the Korean name is ‘‘##$,,) is related to the button [1] that specifies the light “, π”, which is the question mark “? "More important point" ” (hh Λ _λ • . (The name of the 斡 降 ugly with the first syllable of “ as the “ 口 沾 1 1 1 1 的 的 的 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 V. INSTRUCTIONS () The Ministry of Economic Affairs' Intellectual Property Office staff levy cooperatives print the same 'signing the symbol to each button may be related to the English name/shape or number name/shape. The following example is appropriate for the mother tongue. Button (1): symbol "?" (character 'V, related to the first character of "Questionmark,"); button [2]: symbol ",,, (character "C" and "c〇mma,, the first One character related); button [3]: symbol" (character "d" is related to the first character of "D〇t,"); button [4]: symbol "!" ("i" in shape and ''丨,, related); button [5]: • ... . . . . . . . ' button [6]:... button [7]: symbol "s" is related to the first character of "Slash"); Button [8]: symbol ":,, (number "8, related in shape to "", related); button [9]: symbol "!" ("X" and "exciamat" The pronunciation of i〇n mark is related;; the button [〇]: the symbol “number “0” is related to “涵,,” in shape). The main advantage of using English to assign symbols is that this assignment can be applied to countries that do not speak English, where the English-related native language is marked on the keypad. The similarity in shape between the colon ":" and the number "8" is generally acceptable, regardless of language. Similarly, if it does not apply to the above example, when assigning ",,, to button [9], you can consider the similarity in shape between the comma "," and the number "9". Symbol control can be assigned Give the appropriate button. For English, unless the 70 paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the note on the back of the M first!! Precautions write this page) -· Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee fee cooperative cooperative printing 1225055 A7 — ---1-— R7 ________ V. Invention description () • Another control is assigned to the button [*] in Figure 1-1, the symbol Control can be selected using the one-click key of the button [*] (the symbol control is arranged at the position of the basic grid unit of the button [*]). For European native speakers with affixed characters with affixes, the symbol control can be arranged at the button The position of the basic • grid unit of [0] or [#]. Since the symbol control is assigned to the button [0], it is satisfactory not to assign the symbol "@," to the button [〇]. If the control is set to be selected after the representative character and the symbol control is assigned to the button [*], enter the colon "in Figure H" can be given: =[8] + {symbol} = [8] + [* It can be seen from the above examples that in the case where each button has the meaning of the relevant symbol and the pay control controls a grid unit assigned to the control button, 'only 10 symbols can be input. Because of the above In the example, related to "slash", the button labeled ''s' can be used to specify any symbol, such as a slash, a semicolon, a period, and so on. Since the button labeled "d," is related to "dot", the "丨" button is used to specify the "exclamation point" in consideration of the similarity of the shape. Therefore, it is possible to use multiple symbol controls (such as symbol control ι, by CPM). Symbol control 2, ····) to input more symbols. For example, the meaning of the point is divided into 2 to give "d" (or "the meaning of the mouth $," is assigned to the button marked with "mouth," Press the button to cope with a similarly similar return number "·," as ^ is a sequential character of "dot". As shown in Figure 7-2, which adds the symbol control to Figure 4-5, when the control button is set to [*] and the control is set to be selected after the representative character is rounded, then the input is given as "d〇t( ) = [3] + {符 = 71 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the back of the note first and then fill out this page} - Packing ----1 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention description ( ·Π = [3 Bu [*] + [* ] + [*],,, and "comma (,) = [3] + {symbol +. From the point of view of the chain sequential control processing method (SCPM), enter this Give: comma (,) = point + {subsequent point +[*] = [3] +[*] + [*] + [*] + [*]. When not using cpm to input the air charge (Assuming that there is no aspirating sub-tone on the control button), the two keys of the [*] key are pressed to select "symbol control 1," (ie, the application of the jump control processing method). Similarly, the colons and points similar in shape to each other. The number is treated as a successive character assigned to the same key and is entered by the CPM. Again, this can be attributed to other symbols. Even when using two symbol controls, ie "symbol control", and "symbol control 2 The system must assign the meaning of the symbol to each button and remember it, so the system has limitations in the input of numeric symbols. Therefore, the symbols are classified as: points and commas, or colons and semicolons, and are dispatched. Multiple symbol controls to input a larger number of symbols. Preferably, the user selectively sets the symbol classification. The present invention proposes a general example of symbol classification. First, the variation of the point can be classified such as, for example, a point. ·", comma", The colon ":", the semicolon ";", the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the wisdom of the Ministry of Economic Affairs - JL Bureau staff fee cooperatives printed quotes "", "question mark "?", exclamation mark "!,, etc. This group includes point shape The symbol, the "zero-dimensional" symbol. Here, the question mark "?" and the exclamation point "!" are zero-dimensional and one-dimensional, so they are included in the zero-dimensional (dot shape) symbol group. The additional priority order takes into account the frequency of use as described in the prior art documents. Preferably, the user can specify this consideration when determining the priority order. When a large number of symbols are treated as successive symbols, the recommended practice Yes, the control is set to be 72 after the representative character. This paper scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ' ---- 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description () Ministry of Economics Intellectual Property Bureau staff levy cooperatives printed and selected. When the control button is repeatedly pressed, the terminal with the right 薜-# 叮 ▼ can display the change of successive symbols. The user can optionally associate a point-shaped (zero-dimensional) symbol with a particular button. For example, the point that is the most commonly used and representative symbol of the group is regarded as a sequential symbol of the button (1) belonging to "" including "^". If the representative character is used after the input of the representative character in Figure 7-1 The symbol control button designated as the button [*] is applied to control, wherein the symbol control in Fig. 7 _丨 is added to Fig. 1-1, and the input is given as follows: point (·^ + , number (,)= [3 ] + [*] + [*]' Colon (:) = [3 ] + [*] + [*] + [*], semicolon () m+m+t*b[*]+[* ], etc. Because they are all zero-dimensional: the symbol of the point shape can be regarded as belonging to and associated with the button [〇]. Another option is that the point is the most basic form, they can be The successive symbols of the button [1] are followed by the 'linear (ie one-dimensional) symbols such as the slash "wide hat mark";", the question mark "?", the exclamation mark "!,,, the parenthesis ^" parentheses 2 ")'', angle brackets 1 "<" angle brackets 2 ">,, square brackets ^", brackets 2 "[", tilde "~", minus "-,,, arrow, one, ~, arrow 2 - "etc. The frequency of use described in the prior art document is taken into account to determine the additional priority order of the group, and the priority order is related to the successive characters of the button of the rug ~ ' ί日疋. For example, the line symbol is It is regarded as a sequential symbol of β [1] or button [5] of the specified symbol Ί". The classification of the symbols associated with the line (ie two-dimensional) such as: ampersand "&", asterisk ", Sharp "#'', dollar symbol "..., heart-shaped 1" 卩,, 逗看方特来圆“W + = ” 曰 round heart 2 ' 73 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

1282505 ► Α7 Β7 五、發明說明() •cloverrA”、空三角形Γ‘<1,,、空三角形2“〉,,、空三角形 3“V”、…、實三角形1“ ◄”、…、巒、©、知、惠等等。 這一組的附加優先順序的確定也可以考慮已有技術文獻 所述的使用頻率,並且所述附加優先順序透過使用適當的 .方法來與特定按鍵的相繼字符相關。必須的是,這一組的 符號應該與除與零維和一維符號相關的按鍵之外的按鍵 相關。 該所述符號分爲三組,即零維符號組、一維符號組和 二維符號組’其優點在於使用者僅需記住三個相關的數字 按鍵’但是在輸入罕用的符號時,需要控制按鍵的多次擊 键。爲了克服該問題,三個組細分爲如下的下級組。 首先,二維符號鈿分爲線形相關符號組(即*、#、%、…) 和以簡單閉合曲線爲形式的第二符號組(即〇、4、…)。 另外,可以提供包括圖形·(即巒、fi、免、穿、惠、 ) 的單獨符號組,其中,符號也看作屬於適當按鍵的相繼字 符。獨立付號組的符號可以排除在前面的符號組之外。同 樣可以適用其它情形。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ---------- - --裝--- (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項ιΐϋ寫本頁) 另一個單獨的符號組包括用於數學關係式的一維和 二維符號,例如+、-'*、/、方根“ j一”、“ Σ,,及“ 等。 這些符號還看作屬於適當按鍵的相繼字符。另一個單獨 符號組包括方向符號,例如—、—、个、| 、/、/、 \、\、<1、>、◄等,這些符號也看作屬於適當按鍵的 相繼字符。 可以合理地提供又一個單竭符號組,其包括括號,例 74 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 f B7 五、發明說明() 如(,)、[,]、{,}、<,>等。這些括號也可以分爲兩個 下級組,右括號組和左括號組。 有了三個符號組和它們的下級組’屬於下級組的字符 有選擇地包括在三個符號組中,或不包括在其中。要注意 •的是,那些包括在下級組中的字符的優先順序較低。 上述的符號分類應用於圖1 -1,其中每組的符號看作 下面這些特定按鍵的相繼符號。例如,零維符號看作按鍵 - . ' ... ...1282505 ► Α7 Β7 V. Invention description () • cloverrA”, empty triangle Γ '<1,,, empty triangle 2 〉,,, empty triangle 3 “V”,..., real triangle 1 “◄”,...峦, ©, know, benefit, etc. The determination of the additional priority of this group may also take into account the frequency of use as described in the prior art documents, and the additional priority order is related to successive characters of a particular button by using an appropriate method. It is essential that the symbols of this group should be related to buttons other than those associated with zero-dimensional and one-dimensional symbols. The symbols are divided into three groups, namely a zero-dimensional symbol group, a one-dimensional symbol group, and a two-dimensional symbol group. The advantage is that the user only needs to remember three related numeric keys 'but when inputting a rare symbol, Need to control the multiple keystrokes of the button. To overcome this problem, the three groups are subdivided into the following subgroups. First, the two-dimensional symbol 钿 is divided into a linear correlation symbol group (ie, *, #, %, ...) and a second symbol group (ie, 〇, 4, ...) in the form of a simple closed curve. In addition, a separate set of symbols including graphics (i.e., 峦, fi, exempt, wear, 惠, ) can be provided, where the symbols are also considered to be consecutive characters belonging to the appropriate keys. The symbols of the independent pay group can be excluded from the previous symbol group. The same can be applied to other situations. Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing ---------------- (Please read the note on the back ιΐϋ write this page) Another separate symbol group includes One-dimensional and two-dimensional symbols of mathematical relations, such as +, -'*, /, square roots "j-", "Σ,, and". These symbols are also considered to be consecutive characters belonging to the appropriate keys. Another single symbol group includes direction symbols such as —, —, , , |, /, /, \, \, <1, >, ◄, etc. These symbols are also considered as successive characters belonging to the appropriate keys. It is reasonable to provide another set of exhaustive symbols, including parentheses, for example. 74 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 f B7 V. Invention Description () If (, ), [,], {,}, <, > These brackets can also be divided into two subgroups, a right parenthesis group and a left parenthesis group. Characters having three symbol groups and their subordinate groups' belonging to the subordinate group are selectively included in the three symbol groups or are not included therein. It is important to note that the characters included in the subordinate group have a lower priority. The above-mentioned symbol classification is applied to Fig. 1-1, in which the symbols of each group are regarded as successive symbols of the specific keys below. For example, a zero-dimensional symbol is treated as a button - . ' ... ...

[0]的相繼符號,一維符號看作按鍵[1]的相繼符、號,二維 符號看作按鍵[2]的相繼符號。在二維符號分類中,以簡 單閉合曲線爲形式的符號看作按鍵[8]的相繼字符,以圖 形爲形式的符號看作按鍵[7]的相繼字符,數學符號看作 按鍵[6]的相繼符號,方向符號看作按鍵[3]的相繼字符, 括號符號看作任何已和剩餘按鍵的相繼字符。使符號組與 每個按鍵相關的方法並不.限於上述的示例,其可以由使用 者進行有選擇地設置。 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 考慮到上述所有因素之後,本實施例的核心在於符號 分爲三組(即零維、一維和二維符號分類)或細分爲十個或 較少的下級組,並且看作屬於特定按鍵的相繼字符’因此 本發明提供 < 種輸入幾乎所有符號的方法。而且,單獨字 符組看作屬於特定按鍵的相繼字符,它與符號分類在名 稱’維數,形狀等相關,以致於可以將“隱·藏相繼控制處 理方法(HSCPM)’’用於具有字符的簡單佈局的小鍵盤上 而不用任何標記。 在本申請中,符號的控制按鍵是[*]或是上/下/左移動 75 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公g ) 1282505 > t A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 .按鍵中的任何一個,並且數字按鍵或英文字母的相繼控制 按鍵可以是[*]。例如,當按鍵[#]用作相繼控制按鍵時, 數字或英文字母的附加相繼控制按鍵要安排在按鍵[纠上 可以獲得的網格單元。在這種情况下,如上所述,能跳過 不與代表性字符相關的控制,並且選擇下一個可後得的控 制。 8.移動鍵之使用 8.1移動鍵用作控制按鍊 根據已有技術文獻,控制按鍵可以是4 x3小鍵盤上 按鍵或單獨的按键,在輸入存在多個字符和其帶詞綴字 的語言時,4><3小鍵盤缺少控制按鍵。本發明梃出,在 符輸入模式中不頻繁使用的左/上/下移動鍵可以用作如 有技術文獻中所提及的控制按鍵。這就是說,左/上/下 動鍵在字符輸入模式下用.作控制按鍵,它是安排在4 Μ 鍵盤之外的單獨按鍵。 圖8-丨示出了典型折疊型移動終端上的按鍵佈局。 虛線表示的按鍵[1]是因特網連接按鍵,它可以根據終 的類型來設置或不設置。左移動按鍵是空格輸入按鍵7 別用作消除韓文的第一多意性的音節(字母)確認按鍵。 /下/左移動按鍵,尤其是上/下移動按鍵在字符輸入模式 並不經常使用。 8·2小鍵盤下方移動鍵的佈局 上/下/左/右按鍵通常位於數字按鍵的上方。爲了 些移動鍵用作字符輸入模式下的字符輪入按鍵,但是 76 本纸張尺度適用t @國家4票準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 的符字 已移 以 端特 上 下 將這 令 ________________________ill — (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再填窝本頁) 1282505 * A7The successive symbols of [0], the one-dimensional symbol is regarded as the successor and the symbol of the button [1], and the two-dimensional symbol is regarded as the sequential symbol of the button [2]. In the two-dimensional symbol classification, a symbol in the form of a simple closed curve is regarded as a sequential character of the key [8], a symbol in the form of a graphic is regarded as a sequential character of the key [7], and a mathematical symbol is regarded as a key of the key [6] Successive symbols, the direction symbol is treated as a successive character of the button [3], and the parenthetical symbol is regarded as any successive character that has been and the remaining keys. The method of making the symbol group associated with each button is not limited to the above example, which can be selectively set by the user. Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Office, Staff and Cooperatives Co., Ltd. Printing After considering all the above factors, the core of this embodiment is that the symbols are divided into three groups (ie, zero-dimensional, one-dimensional and two-dimensional symbol classification) or subdivided into ten or less. Subordinate groups, and are regarded as successive characters belonging to a specific key'. Therefore, the present invention provides a method of inputting almost all symbols. Moreover, a single character group is regarded as a sequential character belonging to a specific key, which is related to the symbol classification in the name 'dimension, shape, etc., so that the "hidden and successive control processing method (HSCPM)" can be used for characters having characters. Simple layout of the keypad without any mark. In this application, the symbol control button is [*] or up/down/left movement 75. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 g) 1282505 > t A7 B7 V. Invention Description (The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Smart Finance, Production Bureau, Consumer Cooperatives, Print. Any of the buttons, and the numeric control buttons or the successive control buttons for the English letters can be [*]. For example, When the button [#] is used as a sequential control button, additional sequential control buttons for numbers or letters are arranged in the button [corrected grid unit available. In this case, as described above, you can skip the Representative character-related control, and select the next available control. 8. Use of the move key 8.1 Move key is used as the control chain according to the prior art document, control button In the case of a button on a 4 x3 keypad or a separate button, the 4><3 keypad lacks a control button when a language with multiple characters and its affixes is entered. The present invention is not in the character input mode. Frequently used left/up/down movement keys can be used as control buttons as mentioned in the technical literature. That is to say, the left/up/down keys are used in the character input mode as control buttons, which are arranged A separate button on the 4 键盘 keyboard. Figure 8 - shows the layout of the buttons on a typical folding mobile terminal. The button [1] indicated by the dotted line is an Internet connection button, which can be set or not depending on the type of the terminal. The left movement button is the space input button. 7 It is not used as the first syllable (letter) confirmation button to eliminate Korean. The /down/left movement button, especially the up/down movement buttons are not often used in the character input mode. 8.2 The layout of the moving keys below the keypad is up/down/left/right. The keys are usually located above the number keys. For some of the moving keys, the character wheeling buttons are used in the character input mode, but 76 paper scales apply. @ 4 votes quasi (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 Kimiyoshi) symbol word has been moved to the lower end special order these ________________________ill - (¾ please read precautions on the back of the nest reloading the page) 1282505 * A7

滿^的疋將移動鍵與主要用作控制按鍵的[*]和— 安排在4 X 3小綠般τL η ^ 鍵盤下°卩。如圖8·2和8-3所示。爲簡便起 見’如果不特別限t本發明的實施例將移動鍵設置在Full ^ 疋 will move the key with [*] and - mainly used as control buttons - arranged under 4 X 3 small green like τL η ^ keyboard ° 卩. See Figures 8 and 2 and 8-3. For the sake of brevity, 'if it is not particularly limited, the embodiment of the present invention sets the moving key at

小鍵盤的下部。 J 如圖所不,4χ3小鍵盤和上/下/左移動鍵構成5*3小 鍵盤。這說明單個按鍵可以用作pwsM中的15(^5 肩格早兀。同樣,上/下/左移動鍵不一定要安排構成如圖 8-3 所示的 5x3 小鍵盤。^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ θ 8·3移動鍵在左側或右側的佈局The lower part of the keypad. J As shown in the figure, the 4χ3 keypad and the up/down/left movement keys form a 5*3 keypad. This means that a single button can be used as a 15 in the pwsM (^5 shoulders are earlier. Similarly, the up/down/left movement keys do not have to be arranged to form a 5x3 keypad as shown in Figure 8-3. ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ θ 8·3 moving keys on the left or right side of the layout

下/左/右移動鍵可以被分配在4χ3小鍵盤的左側或 右側在逆種情况下,移動鍵和4χ3小鍵盤構成PWSM 中的4*4小鍵盤。圖8·4示出了上⑴左/右移動鍵在m 小鍵盤右側的佈局。 有利之處在於,這種佈局放大了終端上顯示的尺寸, 也因此具有大尺寸液晶顯示器(LCD)終端的趨勢這種佈 局綜合了由本申請提申者:1〇 2〇〇〇_〇〇〇2〇81、 10-2000-0005671 、 1〇-2〇〇〇〇〇67852 和 10 2001 〇〇〇2137(申請號)的韓國專利中公開的優點,其中 側面電池附加到移動終端。 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 8·4移動鍵用作控制按鍵和字符輸入按鍵 下文將以示例的形式對移動鍵的使用加以說明,該示 例並非用來限制本發明實施例的範圍。 8 ·4·1移動鍵作爲符號控制按鍵來使用 在知文模式中,送氣子音控制和緊子音控制分別分配 77The down/left/right move buttons can be assigned to the left or right side of the 4χ3 keypad. In the opposite case, the move button and the 4χ3 keypad form the 4*4 keypad in the PWSM. Figure 8.4 shows the layout of the upper (1) left/right movement key on the right side of the m keypad. Advantageously, this layout magnifies the size of the display on the terminal, and thus has the trend of large size liquid crystal display (LCD) terminals. This layout is integrated by the applicant: 1〇2〇〇〇_〇〇〇 An advantage disclosed in Korean Patent No. 2, 81, 10-2000-0005, 671, pp. The Ministry of Economics, the Ministry of Finance, the Bureau of Employees, and the Consumer Co., Ltd. Printed. 8.4 Move Buttons Used as Control Buttons and Character Input Buttons The use of the Move Buttons will be described below by way of example, which is not intended to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present invention. 8 ·4·1 move key is used as the symbol control button. In the knowledge mode, the air supply sub sound control and the tight sub sound control are respectively assigned.

^282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 •給按鍵[*]和[#];或送氣子音控制和僅子音控制分配給按 鍵[*],由於基本母音控制和擴充母音控制分配給按鍵 [#];或僅僅擴充母音控制分配給按鍵[#]。在這些情形中, 如果在輸入代表性字符之後使用分配給按鍵[*]或[#]的符 號控制來應用控制’當控制按鍵重覆按下時,則按辟送氣 子音、緊子音和符號的順序來給出輸入,同樣可以應用於 其它的語言。 如果符號控制單獨分配給上/下/左移動鍵、的任何一 個,則使用與相應的符號組机關的按鍵和用來指定符號控 制的符號控制按鍵的組合來輸入符號。圖8-5示出了作爲 選擇符號控制的控制按鍵的移動键的使用。如果在輸入代 表性字符之後來將控制應用於零維符號組,則這樣給出輸 入:點=[3] + [V]、逗號=[3] + [v] + [v]、冒號=[3] + [v] + [ v ] + [ V ]及分號=[3 ] + [· v ] + [ v ] + [ V ] + [ v ]等。 8.4.2移動鍵作爲韓文的母音單元來使用 已有技術文獻的優點是當使用韓文的母音單元 ‘‘ 一’’ 、“ 1”和時,母音單元,,·,,與“言”安排在一 起,以便於使用者輸入“含’,。爲克服此項問題,本發明將 母音單元分配給上/下/左移動鍵中的任何一個。如果使用 上移動鍵上的母音·將符號控制分配給下移動鍵,則 要使用兩個移動鍵。另一種選擇是,上/下/左移動鍵分別 分配給三個韓文母音單元。 與符號控制分派給送氣子音控制按鍵的情况相似,使 用按照與BLE的接近次序分派的符號控制,韓文母音單 78 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) -- (請先¾讀背面之注意事項 寫本頁) 裝 訂 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ’兀…可以安排在上/下/左移動鍵中任何一個的基本網 …單:的位置如圖8、6所示。由於沒有單獨使用母音單 ’ 在透過使用Rsm來選擇母音單元和符號控制 時’沒有多意性。力面 Λ 圖8-6中,按鍵[ν]的“次擊鍵選擇 : 时兩-人擊鍵選擇符號控制1,而三次擊鍵選 擇符號控制2。 8 · 4 · 3 務動鍵作这n 凝邗爲日文的詞綴控制按鍵來使用 對於日文,5 0立主丄 曰表中的字符映射到每個按鍊,而第二 第相繼控制刀配給按鍵[*],根據已有技術文獻的分 氏方法3 ’第四和第五相繼控制分配給按鍵[#]。在這種情 况下,長音,濁音和半濁音的輸入控制可以分配給上/下/ 左移動鍵中的任何-個按鍵,如圖8-7所述、 4.4移動鍵作爲輪入阿拉伯文母音的詞綴控制按鍵 來使用 可拉伯文模式中,詞綴型母音的控制可以分派給上 /下/左移動键中的任何一個按鍵。 8.4.5移動鍵作爲泰國語的控制按鍵來使用 在泰國浯模式中,子音和母音的相繼控制作爲相繼控 制按鍵而共同使用一個控制按鍵。上/下/左移動鍵中的任 何個都作爲用於其它目的的控制按鍵來使用。 8_4移動鍵用作快捷/完全轉換控制按鍵來使用 々在同時輸入方法(CIM)中,簡碼和完全代碼之間會出 現第一夕思性。爲了消除第三多意性,使用字單位中的 决捷/ 全轉換控制。例如,當FIM是基本字符輸 入 (請先la讀背面之注意事項寫本頁) 寫本- 訂·- 79 x 297公釐) 1282505^282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description () Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing • Give button [*] and [#]; or aspirator control and sub-tone control assigned to button [*], due to basic voicing control And the extended vowel control is assigned to the button [#]; or only the extended vowel control is assigned to the button [#]. In these cases, if the symbol control assigned to the button [*] or [#] is used after the representative character is input, the control is applied. When the control button is repeatedly pressed, the gas tone, the tight tone, and the symbol are pressed. The order gives the input and can be applied to other languages as well. If the symbol control is individually assigned to any of the up/down/left move keys, the symbol is entered using a combination of the button of the corresponding symbol group authority and the symbol control button for specifying the symbol control. Figure 8-5 shows the use of the move button as a control button for the selection symbol control. If the control is applied to a zero-dimensional symbol group after inputting a representative character, then the input is given: point = [3] + [V], comma = [3] + [v] + [v], colon = [ 3] + [v] + [ v ] + [ V ] and semicolon = [3 ] + [· v ] + [ v ] + [ V ] + [ v ] etc. 8.4.2 Moving keys The advantage of using the prior art document as a vowel unit of Korean is that when the vowel unit ''one'', '1' and the vowel unit of Korean are used, the vowel unit, ..., and "speech" are arranged in Together, in order to facilitate the user to input "including", in order to overcome this problem, the present invention assigns a vowel unit to any of the up/down/left movement keys. If the vowel on the upper movement key is used, the symbol control is assigned. To move the move button, use two move buttons. The other option is that the up/down/left move buttons are assigned to the three Korean vowel units respectively. Similar to the case where the symbol control is assigned to the breather control button, BLE is close to the order of the symbol control, Korean vowel single 78 paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public) -- (Please read the back of the note before writing this page) Binding 1282505 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Staff Consumer Cooperatives' 兀... can be arranged in the basic network of any of the up/down/left move keys... Single: The position is shown in Figures 8 and 6. As shown, since the vowel single is not used alone, 'no ambiguity when selecting vowel unit and symbol control by using Rsm. Force surface Λ In Figure 8-6, the keystroke of [ν] is selected: - The human keystroke selects the symbol control 1, and the three-stroke key selects the symbol control 2. 8 · 4 · 3 The transaction key makes this n condensed into the Japanese affix control button to use for the Japanese, the 50 main table The characters are mapped to each chain, and the second successive control knife is assigned to the button [*]. According to the prior art document, the third method and the fourth and fifth successive controls are assigned to the button [#]. In this case, the input control of long sound, voiced sound and semi-voiced sound can be assigned to any of the up/down/left move keys, as shown in Figure 8-7, 4.4 Move key as the affix control button for the Arabic vowel. To use the Kluber mode, the control of the affixed vowel can be assigned to any of the up/down/left movement keys. 8.4.5 The move key is used as a Thai control button to use in the Thai 浯 mode, consonant Successive control of vowels as successive controls Pressing a button together uses a control button. Any of the up/down/left move buttons is used as a control button for other purposes. The 8_4 move button is used as a shortcut/full conversion control button to use the simultaneous input method ( In CIM), there is a first-night relationship between the shortcode and the full code. To eliminate the third multi-sense, use the shortcut/full conversion control in the word unit. For example, when FIM is the basic character input (please first La read the back of the note to write this page) write this book - set · - 79 x 297 mm) 1282505

五、發明說明( 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 f 合 作 社 印 製 .模式時’爲了在CIM期間透過SIM輸入字,使用者選擇 快捷/完全,,轉換控制,並且輸入空格(或右移動鍵),然 後輸…。當然,空格和“快捷/完全”轉換控制的次 上/下/左移動鍵中的任何一個。旣㈣“快捷/完全,,轉換 控制又用於空格輸入(使用右移動鍵)的控制安排在上/τ/ 左移動鍵中任何一個的基本網格單元的位置。如圖8,8所 示。 假設圖1-1英文字母分配給圖8_8的數字按鍵。如果 在作爲基本字符輸入模式的完全輪入模式中輪入目標 help”的完全相關代碼“ 4357,,,則輸入這樣給出: 完全相關代碼输入+[ν] + [4] + [3] + [5] + [7] + [>]+完全代碼 入〜。延就是說,“快捷/完全轉換功能和空格輪入功 結合在一起’同時抑制了.上移動鍵[Λ]的移動相關功能 因此,一旦選擇按鐽[λ],系統就將“ Μρ·.·,,認爲是簡馬 而非完全代碼,並且參考索引向使用者推莽與輸入⑷對 應隶好的字。在輸入[4] + [3] + [5] + [7]之後,選擇空袼按 (即[>])以結束字並且結束“快捷/完全,,模式轉換,、曾 系統等待輸入另一個完全代碼。在輸入簡碼‘‘ 4357,,後 選擇按鍵[Α]造成系統識別字的結尾,確定與簡碼“ 1 J Ο / 相對應的字“ help”,並且等待輸入另一個簡碼。 當在CIM中使用右移動按鍵(即空格按鍵)時, 如已 技術文獻所述’簡碼和完全代碼之間可能出現第—夕 性。在這種情况下,要避免第三多意性,作爲對每個按 字 能 致 有 意V. Description of the invention (In the case of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Bureau, the employee disappeared, the cooperative printed. In the mode, in order to input the word through the SIM during the CIM, the user selects the shortcut/complete, the conversion control, and enters the space (or the right movement key), Then lose.... Of course, the space and the "Fast/Full" conversion control any of the next up/down/left move keys. 旣 (4) "Quick/Full, and the conversion control is used for space input (using the right move key) The control is arranged at the position of the basic grid unit of any of the upper /τ/left shift keys, as shown in Figures 8 and 8. Assume that the letter of Figure 1-1 is assigned to the number keys of Figure 8_8. If it is the basic character In the full-round mode of the input mode, the fully relevant code "4357," is entered in the target help". The input is given as follows: Full correlation code input +[ν] + [4] + [3] + [5] + [ 7] + [>]+Complete code into ~. The extension is that "fast/full conversion function and space round work together" simultaneously suppresses the movement related function on the moving key [Λ], therefore, once selected Press 鐽[λ], system Just put "Μρ·.·," as a simple horse rather than a complete code, and refer to the index to refer to the user's corresponding word with the input (4). Enter [4] + [3] + [5] + After [7], select the empty press (ie [>]) to end the word and end "Quick/Full, Mode Switch, and the system has waited for another full code to be entered. After entering the shortcode '' 4357, after Selecting the button [Α] causes the end of the system identification word, determines the word "help" corresponding to the shortcode "1 J Ο / and waits for another short code. When using the right movement button (ie the space button) in the CIM At the time, as described in the technical literature, the first-day sex may occur between the shortcode and the complete code. In this case, the third degree of ambiguity should be avoided as an intentional meaning for each type of word.

1282505 A7 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製. 五、發明說明() .輸入的相應,系統來檢査索引中存在簡〆 Τ7ΤΛ/Γ ^ ^ ^ 馬遇疋根據預定的 FIM形成元全代碼。使用組合 ^ ^ J予式快捷/完全,,模式 轉換和空袼輸入的按鍵允許系統事 6 w 丁兀肀无確疋輸入値是簡碼 逛是完全代碼。這就減少了計算次數睞 从吓设京步驟,以便提 兩糸統的性能。 8.6移動鍵作爲計算模式中的加/減/稱/除按鍵來使用 與它們的位置無關,四個移動鍵用作加(+ )、減㈠、 (*)、除(/).,它們經常在計算模式中使甩。如果沒有特 的限定,加、減、乘及除的按鍵可以標記在.按鍵上,因 計算模式並不如字符輸入模式使用頻繁。在字符輸入模 中’單獨的按鍵要用作移動鍵或控制按鍵。 另外,計算功能使甩的運算符分派給加、減、乘、 除,並且由(·隱藏)重覆選擇方法來選擇。這就要利用計 模式中頻繁使用的運算符(二項式運算符)很少童覆的 實。例如’ 2 + + 1是不存在的。24可以分接爲2**4, 致於使用乘法(*)按鍵的兩次擊键來選擇“平方,,運 符。這就是說,乘法按鍵被選擇兩次,如同平方運 符作爲後續的運算符存在一樣。同樣,將忑分解 3//2” ’使用除法按鍵(/)的兩次擊鍵來選擇“方根,, 算。因爲其它的二項式運算符很少重複,它們被看作附 於正確加,減,乘,除的後續操作符,以便由RSM來選擇 續運算符。 加法、減法和除法按鍵分派給上/下/右/左移動鍵中 三個按鍵,乘法分派給按鍵[*]。 81 春纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 χ 297公釐) 乘 爲 式 及 算 事 以 算 算 運 加 後 的 1282505 >1282505 A7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee fee cooperative cooperative printing. V. Invention description (). Corresponding to the input, the system checks the existence of the index in the index. 7ΤΛ/Γ ^ ^ ^ Ma Yuxi forms the full code according to the predetermined FIM . Use the combination ^ ^ J pre-style fast / complete, mode conversion and open input keys allow system things 6 w Ding Wei no input 値 is a short code Wandering is complete code. This reduces the number of calculations and favors the steps of the Beijing-based system in order to improve the performance of the two systems. 8.6 Move keys are used as the add/subtract/scale/divide buttons in the calculation mode regardless of their position. The four move keys are used to add (+), minus (one), (*), divide (/). Make 甩 in the calculation mode. If there is no special limit, the buttons for addition, subtraction, multiplication and division can be marked on the . button, because the calculation mode is not as frequently used as the character input mode. In the character input mode, 'single key is used as a move key or control key. In addition, the calculation function assigns the operator of 甩 to addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, and is selected by the (·hidden) repeated selection method. This takes advantage of the frequently used operators (binomial operators) in the metering mode. For example, '2 + + 1 is not present. 24 can be tapped to 2**4, so use the multiply (*) button twice to select "square,". That is to say, the multiply button is selected twice, like the squared character as a follow-up The operator exists the same. Similarly, split 忑3//2” 'Use the double-click of the divide button (/) to select “square root,” because the other binomial operators are rarely repeated, they are It is treated as a follow-up operator attached to the correct addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division to select the continued operator by RSM. The addition, subtraction, and division buttons are assigned to the three buttons in the up/down/right/left move keys, multiply dispatched. Give the button [*]. 81 Spring paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ 297 mm) Multiply and calculate to calculate the added 1282505 >

五、發明說明() 9·辅助功能的啟用 爲更便於使用,可以在螢幕(即LCD)上顯示在各自的 輸入模式下沒有標記在上/下/右/左移動鍵的功能。這種功 能使用LCD的一部分,它對熟悉這種功能的人沒有用處, •但是對那些不清楚每個按鍵的功能的知識的人很有幫 助。對此,參考圖8-1。圖9-1示出了小鍵盤的另一種佈 局,其中上/下/右/左移動鍵分配給如圖8_4所示的4x3小 鍵盤的右侧。 爲簡便起見,根據使用者的偏愛來顯示按鍵的功能(即 分配給按鍵的運算符或與每個按鍵相關的符號組)稱爲 輔助功能的啟用”。輔助功能的啟用可以針對單獨的模 式(例如子符輪入模式、及計算模式等)或每種模式(例如, 在子付輸入模式下’與符號組相關的數字鍵或控制按鍵的 使用目的)需要的功能來完成。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製. 同樣,因使用者要求,爲了便於使用,如已有技術文 獻中提供的,與符號組相關的控制按鍵或數字鍵的功能也 可以顯示出來。關於此,參考圖9 - 2,其中示出了 一個顯 示示例,其中根據上述的符號分類,與每個符號組相關的 數字按鍵簡化爲LCD上的圖標。爲簡便起見,僅僅從與 每個數字按鍵相關的符號組中第一次選出的符號被以圖 標的形式標記在數字按鍵上。 - 10·刪除鍵的使用 刪除鍵的使用可以與如已有技術文獻所公開的“最 後輸入的取消”相關。例如,當使用者想要輸入“·r,,但 82 本纸張尺度適用> 國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ_297公餐)--- 1282505V. INSTRUCTIONS () 9. Enabling of auxiliary functions For easier use, functions that are not marked in the up/down/right/left movement keys in their respective input modes can be displayed on the screen (ie LCD). This feature uses a portion of the LCD that is not useful to people familiar with this function, but is helpful for those who are not aware of the function of each button. For this, refer to Figure 8-1. Figure 9-1 shows another layout of the keypad in which the up/down/right/left move keys are assigned to the right side of the 4x3 keypad as shown in Figure 8_4. For the sake of simplicity, the function of displaying the keys according to the user's preference (ie the operator assigned to the keys or the set of symbols associated with each key) is called the activation of the auxiliary function. The activation of the auxiliary functions can be targeted to individual modes. (For example, the sub-input mode, and the calculation mode, etc.) or each mode (for example, in the sub-input mode, the purpose of the number key associated with the symbol group or the purpose of the control button) is required to complete the function. The property bureau employee consumption cooperative prints. Similarly, due to the user's request, for the convenience of use, as provided in the prior art documents, the functions of the control buttons or numeric keys associated with the symbol group can also be displayed. 9 - 2, which shows a display example in which the numeric keys associated with each symbol group are reduced to icons on the LCD according to the above-described symbol classification. For the sake of simplicity, only the symbols associated with each numeric button are used. The symbol selected for the first time in the group is marked on the number button as an icon. - 10·The use of the delete button can be used. It is related to "cancellation of last input" as disclosed in the prior art document. For example, when the user wants to input "·r, but 82 paper size is applicable> National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 χ _297 Public meal) --- 1282505

五、發明說明() .疋使用[1] + [*](圖4-2)而錯誤輸入“ γ,,此時使用刪除鍵 可以取消最後的輸入[*],並將“巧,,恢復爲“ π,,。這在重 復按下控制按鍵輸入相繼字符時非常有效。冊|除鍵的連續 擊鍵可以刪除前面通過已知的方法輸入的字符。例如,取 消鍵的一次擊鍵可以將输入“ 恢復爲“ ^叫下。其使 . ‘ 用取消鍵的另一次擊鍵就變爲‘‘科中,而使用取消鍵的又 一次擊鍵就變爲“斗,。對於羅馬字母,在輸入“ aba·,,(其 中a··”是包括“··,,和“a,,的帶詞綴字符)的基'上應用取 消鍵的一次擊鍵就得到“ aba ”,使用刪除鍵:的另一次擊鍵 就變爲“ab”,而使用删除鍵的再一次擊鍵就變爲“a”。 這就是說,前面形成的字以字符爲單位來刪徐。 11·鍵盤上的數字小鍵盤與電話小鍵盤的等同化 已有技術文獻和本發明提供的小鍵盤可以以電話小 鍵盤的形式使用在各種應.用中,例如移動終端或標準鍵盤 的數字小鍵盤,以軟體形式在螢幕上實現的小鍵盤·,門鎖 等。已有技術文獻和本發明的小鍵盤在數字按鍵的佈局方 面與標準鍵盤中提供的數字按鍵不同。但是,㈣顯地, 根據已有技術文獻和本發明的小鍵盤上的按鍵佈局可以 應用於鍵盤上提供的小鍵盤。例如,把根據已有技術文獻 和本發明的按鍵[1]上的字符分配給鍵盤中提供的數字小 鍵盤的按鍵⑴。這種小键盤佈局可以應用於字符輸入的 目的、簡碼的使用、以及各種代碼的記憶。 爲減少混淆和增加使用的方便性,在鍵盤的數字小鍵 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 消 費 合 作 社 印 盤的結構方面 電話小鍵盤的數字佈局很有用。這就是 83 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() •說,類似於電話的小鍵盤,鍵盤上的數字小鍵盤具有這樣 的數字佈局:[1]、[2]和[3]分配給小鍵盤的第一行,按鍵 [3],[4]和[5]分配給第二行,按鍵[7]、[8]和[9]分配給第 三行。另外’鍵盤的小鍵盤具有如電話按鍵般的按鍵[*] .和[#] 〇 12·語言限制輸入方法(lrim) 語 5 限制輸入方法(Language Restricted Input Method) 為在一種語言中利用子音及母音關聯規則形成字、藉以降 低字輸入之模糊性的方法,以下有更詳細之說明。 吾人不難得知,某一語言之特徵得適用於其它語言 上,亦可適用於不使用羅馬字符之語言上,不再另行說明。V. Invention description () .疋Use [1] + [*] (Fig. 4-2) and enter "γ" by mistake. In this case, use the delete key to cancel the last input [*], and "qiao, restore." It is “π,,. This is very effective when repeatedly pressing the control button to input successive characters. The continuous keystroke of the key can delete the characters previously input by the known method. For example, the one-click key of the cancel key can be Enter "Revert to "^call. It makes . ' Another keystroke with the cancel button becomes ''section, and another keystroke with the cancel button becomes "bucket." For the Roman alphabet, enter "aba" in the input "aba·,, (where a·· is a base of the suffix character including "··,, and "a,") The other keystrokes using the delete key become "ab", and the keystrokes using the delete key become "a". That is to say, the words formed in the past are deleted in characters. 11. Equivalent of the numeric keypad and the telephone keypad on the keyboard. The prior art document and the keypad provided by the present invention can be used in the form of a telephone keypad, such as a mobile terminal or a standard keyboard. Keyboard, a small keyboard implemented in software on the screen, door locks, etc. The prior art document and the keypad of the present invention differ in the layout of the numeric keys from the numeric keys provided in the standard keyboard. However, (4) Explicitly, the key layout on the keypad according to the prior art document and the present invention can be applied to the keypad provided on the keyboard. For example, the characters on the button [1] according to the prior art document and the present invention are assigned to the keys (1) of the numeric keypad provided in the keyboard. This keypad layout can be applied to the purpose of character input, the use of short codes, and the memory of various codes. In order to reduce the confusion and increase the convenience of use, the digital layout of the telephone keypad is useful in the structure of the keyboard of the Digital Keys of the Ministry of Economics. This is 83 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description () • Say, similar to the keypad of the phone, the numeric keypad on the keyboard has such a digital layout: [1], [2], and [3] are assigned to the keypad. In the first line, buttons [3], [4], and [5] are assigned to the second line, and buttons [7], [8], and [9] are assigned to the third line. In addition, the keyboard of the keyboard has buttons such as telephone buttons [*]. and [#] 〇12·Language Restricted Input Method (Language Restricted Input Method) is used to use consonants in a language. The method in which the vowel association rule forms a word to reduce the ambiguity of the word input is described in more detail below. It is not difficult for us to know that the characteristics of a certain language can be applied to other languages, and can also be applied to languages that do not use Roman characters, and will not be separately described.

il: 1利用羅符於子__直^音分離小鍵盤上所為之 '中文限制RSM 12.1.1 中女娃崎 中文字符一般可分作兩部份,即21個聲母及16個韻 母(其中韻母牡(、)幾乎不被使用),其中聲母對應於子 音,而韻母對應於母音。在中國,中文發音之標記係依羅 馬拼音系統為之;在台灣,其發音之標記則為注音符號 (commented sound)系統(即V _门〔系統)。羅馬系統使 用拉丁子音及母音字母(即羅馬字母)拼出中文字之發 音,以下括號部份所示者即為注音符號之對應羅馬字符。 84 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公餐) (請先B3讀背面之注意事項 裝 i I 寫本頁) 如5J· · 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 勺⑻ >(p) 卩(m) 匸⑴ 力⑷ 太⑴ 孑⑻ 力⑴ «(g) 5(k) 厂(h) 対⑴ <(q) 丁(X) iii(zh) f(ch) 尸(sh) UJ⑴ P(z) 1(c) 厶(S) 單韻母 丫(a)乙(o) tT(e) tt(e) 1 (l)X(u) U( ϋ) 韻母 雙韻母 ^(ai) ^(ei) 么(ao) 只(〇11) 鼻音韻母 an) en) 尤(ang) 厶(eng) 捲舌韻母 儿(er) 接著,該者為複合韻母,其為一聲母母音(“i”、“u”及 “ϋ”之一者)及另一韻母之組合。下表即為此種複合韻母之 •表列。 單韻母 雙韻母 鼻音韻母. a 0 e Ai ei Ao Ou An En ang eng I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 <請先M讀背面之注意事項再_寫本頁)Il: 1Using Luo Fu on the __ straight ^ sound separation on the keyboard for the Chinese limit RSM 12.1.1 female wasaki Chinese characters can generally be divided into two parts, namely 21 initials and 16 finals (of which The vowel mother (,) is hardly used, where the initial corresponds to the consonant and the final corresponds to the vowel. In China, the Chinese pronunciation mark is based on the Elophone Pinyin system; in Taiwan, the pronunciation mark is the commented sound system (ie V _ door [system]). The Roman system uses Latin consonants and vowels (ie, Roman letters) to spell out the Chinese characters. The following brackets are the corresponding Roman characters of the phonetic symbols. 84 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public meals) (Please read the back of the B3 first reading i I write this page). For example, 5J· · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing 1282505 A7 B7 V. INSTRUCTIONS () Spoon (8) >(p) 卩(m) 匸(1) Force (4) Too (1) 孑(8) Force (1) «(g) 5(k) Factory (h) 対(1) <(q) (X) iii(zh) f(ch) corpse (sh) UJ(1) P(z) 1(c) 厶(S) single vowel 丫(a) B(o) tT(e) tt(e) 1 (l) X(u) U( ϋ) vowel double vowel ^(ai) ^(ei) 么(ao) only (〇11) nasal vowel an) en) 尤 (ang) 厶 (eng) 舌 韵 韵 (er) The person is a compound final, which is a combination of a mother sound (one of "i", "u", and "ϋ") and another final. The table below shows the list of such composite finals. Single vowel double vowel nasal vowel. a 0 e Ai ei Ao Ou An En ang eng I 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 < Matters again _ write this page)

I I 上δ · •t· 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 上述表格中,“i + a”是可能出現的,但“i + u”卻不 可能出現。 12.1.2 中文之羅馬拼音 由上述表格可知,在中文字符以羅馬字符進行羅馬拼 音時,21個聲母係以1 8個羅馬字符代表之,而16個韻 母則係以7個單韻母、或以羅馬字母母音及子音之組合代 85 * 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( .表之。 在各單韻母中,“ Λ 〇,,另“ ··, 及u分別被視為“e”及“u”之詞 綴,並以控制處理法輸入工也 〜,另,具四聲之五大基本母音 亦得以控制處理方法輸入夕 m 别八之。因此,對於所有利用羅馬字 •符拼成之中文字符而古,张士# 。所有韻母皆得利用五個羅馬字母 基本母0輸入之。此即為利用控制處理法輸入英文字母 (即羅馬字母)中所無之詞綴的方法,此以述及於前文對法 文及德文例之說明中。以下表格為利用控制處理方法輪入 中文韻母時指定基本字符(基本母音)及相繼字符(相繼母 音)間關係之範例。 (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再_寫本頁) f Μ 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 X 消 費 合 作 社 印 製I I 上··································································· 12.1.2 Roman Pinyin in Chinese As can be seen from the above table, when Chinese characters are Romanized in Roman characters, 21 initials are represented by 18 Roman characters, while 16 finals are represented by 7 single finals, or The combination of the Roman alphabet vowel and consonant 85 * This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (in the table. In each single vowel, “Λ 〇 , and "··, and u are respectively regarded as the suffixes of "e" and "u", and are input into the work by the control method. Also, the five basic vowels with four sounds are also controlled to be processed. Therefore, for all Chinese characters that use Roman characters and characters, Zhang Shi #. All vowels must be input with five Roman letters, the basic mother 0. This is the use of control processing to input English letters ( The method of affixes that are not included in the Roman alphabet, which is described in the previous description of the French and German examples. The following table specifies the basic characters (basic vowels) when the Chinese vowel is rotated by the control processing method. An example of the relationship between successive characters (successive vowels) (please read the following notes on the back and write this page) f Μ Ministry of Economic Affairs Zhihui Cai. Production Bureau X Consumer Cooperatives Printed

言 相 符 此時其它相繼字符之優先順序往後順延一。 舉例而言,當控制鍵為[*]、且在一基本字符輸The order of precedence of other consecutive characters is then extended one by one. For example, when the control key is [*] and the basic character is lost

12825051282505

五、發明說明( •予選擇一控制時,耠 时 輸入原則為“-e=e+[*],,、 “/e = e + [*] + [*],,、“ve==e+ 、 []+[*]+[*]”、 “、e=e+[*]+[*]4 []+[*]”、及 L J + [ ] + [*] + [*] + [*],,。若 pwSM 甩於 圖1-1中小鍵盤之“,,)被 “ 時’人的全碼(r/en:第二聲)便為 7 8 3 2 * * 6 5 ’’。明顧可去认η ”、、 的疋,鲸小鍵盤上“e,,的鍵入得以 PWSM外的其它方法么+ 匕方法為之(如間單重覆選擇法)。 因此’輸入方法可芮4卜盔认 00 間化為輪入早一控制鍵。該同樣方 法可❹使用㈠符號而無羅馬字母之例上(例如:㈣ 同方法可用於圖Μ小鍵盤上標以注音符號(對應於羅馬 字符)者之上)。 MM(crrsm> 中文字中的所有聲母皆得以18個羅馬字符輪入之 只有zh'ch及sh羅馬字母.子音需於後加以羅馬字母子 “y”或“w”則用於僅有母音無子音之中文音節的羅馬拼 上,”衣,(第一聲)”及”五=純(第三聲)”即為其中的輪 原則例。在以羅馬拼音成中文(利用羅馬字符)時,中文 一音即由至少羅馬字中的,,子音+母音,,構成,此為一 了解者。 3 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 如本案申請人於先前文獻發表者,以音節式起始聲 作一僅有單音節之中文字的簡碼為較方便之方式,因 1 8個羅馬字母以利用數字鍵代表為較佳。故本發明中 1 8個羅馬字母子音分作兩大組,並由數字鍵[1 ]至[ 之;其分類方式為: 87 1282505 A7 B7 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 诮 費 合 作 社V. INSTRUCTIONS (In the case of selecting a control, the input principle is “-e=e+[*],,” “/e = e + [*] + [*],,, “ve==e+ , []+[*]+[*]”, “,e=e+[*]+[*]4 []+[*]”, and LJ + [ ] + [*] + [*] + [*] If the pwSM is in the ",," of the keypad in Figure 1-1, the full code (r/en: second) of the "time" is 7 8 3 2 * * 6 5 ''. You can go to recognize η ”, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , Therefore, the 'input method can be used to turn into the early control button. The same method can use the (1) symbol instead of the Roman alphabet (for example: (4) The same method can be used on the keyboard with the phonetic symbol (corresponding to the Roman character). All the initials in MM (crrsm> Chinese characters can be rotated by 18 Roman characters, only zh'ch and sh Roman letters. The sub-tones need to be followed by the Roman alphabet "y" or "w" for only the vowels. The Roman syllable of the Chinese syllables of the consonants, "clothing, (first sound)" and "five = pure (third sound)" are examples of the wheel principle. When using Roman alphabet to become Chinese (using Roman characters), The Chinese one is composed of at least the Roman word, the consonant + the vowel, and this is an understanding. 3 The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Office, the employee consumption cooperative, printed as the applicant of the case in the previous literature, in syllable It is more convenient to make a short code with only a single syllable, because 18 Roman letters are better represented by numerical keys. Therefore, in the present invention, 18 Roman alphabets are divided into two groups. And by the number keys [1] to [;; its classification is: 87 1282505 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau staff levy cooperative

I 五、發明說明( bp/dt/gk/zj/Cq/sx/mri/lr/hf 由上分類例可知’羅馬字母子音在按發音相似性分類 時’若數個字或詞對應於相同簡碼時,此發音相似之多個 字或詞具有相同的音節式起始碼。該等分類方式僅為一 例’其它各種方式亦為可行,如以下列方式所今之分類亦 得為之.羅馬字之字典編排方式、羅馬字對應之注音符號 的字典排列順序、或發音相似性等 > 依發音相似性分類之 作法另有優點,即其模糊程度得變小,因發音相似之子音 絕少在以羅馬字母拼成時連續出現(對於各種語言皆 然)。此外,即便對應於同一簡碼之多字或詞有多者(簡碼 為音節式起始碼時尤為如此),該多者之發音相近(就其音 標而言),且此種分類方法得使使用混淆程度降至最低, 並得使簡碼之使甩變得自然。 “zh”、“ch”及“Sh”為中文字的聲母,且“z,,及“h”、“c” 及h 、或“s”及“h”不歸於同類中(此不歸於同類之舉並不 相當重要,因一中文音節通常皆由一聲母及一韻母構成; 不過對於“W,,、“y,,或“V,,輪入而言,“s,,、“h,,及“W,,不適歸 於同類,且“W”係以敲擊對應鍵三次之方式輸入)。 該九類分由[1]至[9]九個鍵代表之(如圖1〇1所示), 且各字符皆以重覆選擇方法輸入之。就中文特性而言,在 輸入聲母時’羅馬字子音鮮少連續出現,除“Zh”、“ch,,及 sh外疋以,在無模糊倩事發生之條件下以重覆選擇輸 入法輸入羅馬字符是可為的。以圖i 丨為例,其輸入原 則為“b = [l]”及“p = [1] + [1],,。當然,同一鍵所代表之字符 88 本紙張尺了適用了國國家標準(CNS)A_4_規格(210 X 297公釐)-—~ ----^. 1282505 A7 * —_— B7 五、發明說明(} .可按使用頻率加以排列順序,並以敲擊該對應鍵一次之方 式選擇之。 鮮少用於中文的羅馬字“V”可為該九類之一者所用,例 如“V”加至發音相似之“f”所屬類群中(或不加以明確規 •定)、並對相對鍵加以三次鍵擊。”衣=yi (第一聲或”五= (第二聲)中的“w”及“y”亦可分類於適當子音類中(或不 加以明定)’並以重覆選擇方法輪入之(如對對應按鍵敲擊 三次)。舉例而言,當“y”被分配於一包含/丨、r/、,,及“r,, 之分類中時,“y”係以對相對鍵分別鍵擊一次、二次或三 次之方式輸入之(圖1〇-丨之[8]鍵)。當“w”被分配於包含 /m、n/、 m及“1!’’之分類中時,〜,,係以對相對鍵分別鍵 擊一次、二次或三次之方式輸入 < (圖10-1之[7]鍊)。 該種利甩一羅馬字母子音及母音之重覆出現特性的 方法得顯著降低以重覆選擇方法所為之羅馬拼音的模糊 性,其被稱作“中文專屬重覆選擇方法(Chinese RestrictedI. Description of the invention (bp/dt/gk/zj/Cq/sx/mri/lr/hf From the above classification example, it can be seen that 'the Roman alphabet consonant is classified according to pronunciation similarity' if several words or words correspond to the same simple When the code is coded, the multiple words or words with similar pronunciations have the same syllable start code. The classification is only one case. 'Other various ways are also feasible. For example, the classification in the following way is also available. Rome The dictionary arrangement of words, the dictionary order of phonetic symbols corresponding to Roman characters, or pronunciation similarity, etc. > The method of classification according to pronunciation similarity has the advantage that the degree of blurring is small, and the sub-tones with similar pronunciation are rare. When appearing in Roman letters, it appears continuously (for all languages). In addition, even if there are many words or words corresponding to the same short code (especially when the short code is a syllable start code), the many The pronunciation is similar (in terms of its phonetic symbols), and this classification method has to minimize the confusion of use, and has to make the short code become natural. “zh”, “ch” and “Sh” are Chinese. The initials of the word, and "z,, and "h", c" and h, or "s" and "h" are not attributed to the same category (this is not very important for the same kind of action, because a Chinese syllable usually consists of an initial and a final; but for "W,,, "y,, or "V,, in terms of rounds, "s,,, "h,, and "W,, discomfort is attributed to the same type, and "W" is entered by tapping the corresponding key three times). The class is represented by nine keys [1] to [9] (as shown in Figure 1-1), and each character is input by repeated selection. In terms of Chinese characteristics, the word "roman" is used when inputting the initial. The sub-sounds appear in small numbers continuously. Except for "Zh", "ch,, and sh, it is possible to input Roman characters by repeated selection of input methods without the occurrence of fuzzy clues. Take Figure i 丨 as an example. The input principle is "b = [l]" and "p = [1] + [1],. Of course, the character represented by the same key 88 paper size is applicable to the national standard (CNS) A_4_ specification (210 X 297 mm)--~ ----^. 1282505 A7 * —_— B7 V. Invention description (}. The order can be sorted according to the frequency of use, and the corresponding key is tapped. The second choice is the Roman word "V", which is rarely used in Chinese. It can be used by one of the nine categories, for example, "V" is added to the group of "f" with similar pronunciation (or not explicitly defined). ) and three keystrokes on the relative keys. "clothing = yi (first sound or "five = (second sound) "w" and "y" can also be classified in the appropriate consonant class (or not specified) ) 'and round with the repeated selection method (such as hitting the corresponding button three times). For example, when "y" is assigned to a category containing /丨, r/,,, and "r," When "y" is selected by pressing the relative key one time, two times or three times (Fig. 1〇-丨[8] key). When "w" is assigned to the category containing /m, n/, m, and "1!", ~, is entered as a keystroke for the relative key, once or twice, respectively. 10-1 [7] chain). The method of reappearing the characteristics of the Raman-Roman alphabet and the vowels is significantly reduced to repeat the selection method as the ambiguity of Roman Pinyin, which is called "Chinese exclusive". Repeat selection method (Chinese Restricted

Repeat Selection Method(CRRSM)),,。這種可應用於中文 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 等任何語言之方法可就權宜稱為“語言限制重覆選擇方法 (Language Restricted Repeat Selection Method (LRRSM))” ;若其限制於中文上,稱之為‘‘中文專屬rsm (Chinese Rest];icte(i RSM)”。LRRSM 可降低朝鮮語及北印 度語因子音及母音交替出現所造成的模糊性,如在重覆選 擇方法中單一鍵指定為成對之基本子音及基本母音之時 所出現者。同樣地,在使用朝鮮語母音元素的方法中,送 氣音之控制係依母音“一”不連績出現之特性而以重覆選擇 89 本纸張尺度適用甲國國家標準(cns)A4 ------- 1282505 A7 _—-:______Β7 五、發明說明() 输入法輸入之,得稱為“朝鮮語限制RSM(K〇r_ Restricted RSM)59 〇 再就特定狀況言之,當子音所用按鍵(就權宜稱作“子 音按鍵”)與母音(就權宜稱作,,母音按鍵,,)所用按鍵分開時 (如圖10-1至10_4所示),重覆選擇方法可明顯降低模糊 性’其方式為利用每一種語言之特性而將母音及子音合成 一體。圖10-1至10_4中,其键盤中每一按鍵所代表之子 音或母音之數目小,(如一、二、或三>,且子音名鍵為母 音按鍵所分開,稱之為“子音母音分離小鍵盤(cvsK),,。 進行中文之羅馬拼音時,圖1〇-1鍵盤上羅馬字符子音 及母曰亦可利用重覆選擇方法在無模糊情形條件下為 之。當使用者在輸入聲母後選捧子音按鍵(圖之⑴ 至[9]鍵)之一時’系統能得知鍵盤所被鍵入者為第二子 音,此乃因相同羅馬字符不會在中文聲母輸入中連續出現 之故。當先前鍵擊兩次之按鍵被指定為“w”、、,,及“v,,時, 系統得輕易辨知再一次的鍵擊(即總共三次)係用以輸入 “w”、“y”或“V,,,即如先前該者。 次鍵擊[7]鍵代表“w==777,,之輸入 “mmm”、“mn”或“nm”等結構。 此外,系統亦得辨知三 ,因為中文絕不會出現 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 •產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 如圖1 0 -1所示Repeat Selection Method (CRRSM)),,. Such a method that can be applied to any language such as the printing of the Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Finance of the Ministry of Finance of the Chinese Ministry of Economic Affairs can be called the "Language Restricted Repeat Selection Method (LRRSM)"; if it is limited to In Chinese, it is called ''Chinese exclusive rsm (Chinese Rest);icte(i RSM).) LRRSM can reduce the ambiguity caused by the alternating occurrence of Korean and Hindi syllabic vowels, such as in the repeated selection method. The single key is specified as the pair of basic consonants and the basic vowel. Similarly, in the method of using the Korean vowel element, the control of the aspiration sound is based on the characteristics of the vowel "one". Repeated selection of 89 paper standards applicable to national standards (cns) A4 ------- 1282505 A7 _--: ______ Β 7 5, invention description () input method input, called "Korean restricted RSM" (K〇r_ Restricted RSM) 59 〇In other words, the keys used by the consonant (which are called “sub-tone buttons”) are separated from the keys used for the vowels (which are called vowels, vowels, and keys). (As shown in Figures 10-1 to 10_4), the repeated selection method can significantly reduce the ambiguity' by combining the vowel and the consonant with the characteristics of each language. In Figures 10-1 to 10_4, the keyboard The number of consonants or vowels represented by each button is small (such as one, two, or three), and the consonant name keys are separated by the vowel keys, which is called "sub-sound vowel separation keypad (cvsK),". In Chinese Roman Pinyin, the Roman character consonant and the mother-in-law on the keyboard of Figure 1〇-1 can also be used in the case of no blurring condition by using the repeated selection method. When the user inputs the initial consonant, the sub-tone button is selected (Fig. (1) When one of the [9] keys is pressed, the system can know that the keyboard is typed as the second sub sound. This is because the same Roman character does not appear continuously in the Chinese initial input. When the previous keystroke is pressed twice, the button is When specified as "w", ,,, and "v,, the system can easily recognize that another keystroke (that is, three times in total) is used to input "w", "y", or "V," Previously. The secondary keystroke [7] key represents the input of "w==777," mmm "," mn "or" nm "like structure. In addition, the system Yide identified three known, will not appear because the Chinese Ministry of Economy wise Property Office employee • financial consumer cooperatives PRINTED 10-1 shown in FIG.

ci” u _及 “..U” 個母音兩兩分作三組,即4 χ 及[#]鍵)4x3小鍵盤。接著, 在無模糊條件下輸入,其可行 母音甚少連續出現兩次之故。 六 3鍵盤之三鍵'上(如[*]、[〇] 各母音利用重覆選擇方法而 性係因中文中相同羅馬字母 举例而言,中文字不可能有 90Ci" u _ and "..U" vowels are divided into three groups, namely 4 χ and [#] keys) 4x3 keypad. Then, input without ambiguity, the feasible vowels rarely appear twice in succession. The reason is that the three keys of the three-keyboard are on the top of the keyboard (such as [*], [〇]. The vowels are repeated by the method of selecting the same Roman alphabet. For example, the Chinese characters cannot have 90 characters.

•如π…a a ·. ·π之拼音。 就雙韻母ai及ei”與複合韻母“〖a,,及“ “i,,、或“e,,及“i”不應歸作同類;若前者 le’言, 咿於同類中、 用相同的按鍵(如[*]按鍵),連續敲擊該按鍵一 & •會使“ai”及“ia”變得模糊難辨,圖ίο」 — 所不即為此棒、 例。當然,母音分類及分配並不完全如圖1 月乳 其可加以各種更動,只要不違原則即可 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 五、發明說明( a,,及 並使 (即 “***,,、 ) ^之 所示者, 談各母音浐、 覆選擇輸入法輸入之(圖10-丨),如輸入原 “ 于Μ重 . 〜苟 [〇],,、“ = [〇] + [〇],,及 “ia〇 = [0] + [*] + [0] + [0],,等。 只要“a”及“i”與“e,,及、,,不歸作同類,“a 这 e及〇” 即 可歸於同類中(請參閱圖10_2及圖10-4),Η π ’ 且 1、u及 ϋ” 歸於另一類中,當然此規則亦可加以變動。在3*4鍵盤 中’該兩類母音可由不同鍵負責(如分別為[* ]及[#]鍵 等),且子音“W、y及V”可歸為同一類,並為一鍵負責(如 [0]鍵冬)。當3個字符分作一類時(如本例中之“3、6及 0 ),對應鍵鍵擊三次可確被視作”而無模糊情事,此乃 因中文的羅馬拼音中不可能有某些母音組合之故(如 “ae”、“ea”及“aaa”等)。在本範例中,,’ao,,相對鍵之四次鍵 擊可清楚被辨識為”ao”,因”oa”不可能出現在中文的羅馬 拼音中。 在圖10-1及上述内容中,各羅馬字符在—對應鍵之鍵擊 時平均被鍵擊次數為1 5次。當考慮及中文的使用頻率 時,最常使用之字符可設為一次鍵擊者,以使每一字符之 鍵擊次數降至最少。 91 本紙張尺度適财國國家標準規格⑽x 297 ^• Pinyin such as π...a a ·. · π. As for the double vowels ai and ei" and the composite vowels "a,, and "i,, or "e,, and "i" should not be classified as the same kind; if the former is said, it is the same, using the same The button (such as [*] button), continuous tapping the button one & • will make "ai" and "ia" become obscure, Figure ίο" - not the case, the example. Of course, the classification and distribution of vowels is not completely as shown in Figure 1. It can be changed as long as it is not in violation of the principle. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Office, Staff Consumer Cooperatives, Printing 1,282,505 5, Invention Description (a, and "***,,, ) ^, as shown in the figure, talk about the input of each vowel, and select the input method (Figure 10-丨), such as input the original "Yu zhong. ~ 苟 [〇],,, " = [〇] + [〇],, and "ia〇= [0] + [*] + [0] + [0],, etc. As long as "a" and "i" and "e,, and,,,, Not classified as the same type, "a this e and 〇" can be attributed to the same type (see Figure 10_2 and Figure 10-4), Η π ' and 1, u and ϋ" belong to another category, of course, this rule can also be Change. In the 3*4 keyboard, the two types of vowels can be responsible for different keys (such as [*] and [#], respectively), and the consonants "W, y, and V" can be classified into the same category and are one. The key is responsible (such as [0] key winter). When 3 characters are classified into one category (such as "3, 6 and 0 in this example", the corresponding keystrokes can be regarded as "three times" without any ambiguity. In the Roman alphabet of Chinese It is impossible to have some vowel combinations (such as "ae", "ea", and "aaa", etc.). In this example, 'ao, the four keystrokes of the relative keys can be clearly recognized as "ao". Because "oa" cannot appear in Roman Pinyin in Chinese. In Figure 10-1 and above, the average number of keystrokes of each Roman character in the keystroke of the corresponding key is 15 times. When considering and Chinese When using the frequency, the most commonly used characters can be set as a keystroke to minimize the number of keystrokes per character. 91 This paper scale is suitable for national standards (10) x 297 ^

1282505 . A/ --------- _B7 _______ 五、發明說明() m.. 4_功能鍵之原始功能的冉回德 在圖10-1之3 *4鍵盤中輸入一羅馬字母母音的詞綴 時,一“分離鍵”可作為控制鍵。舉例而言,中文輸入模 式之左游標鍵[&lt;]的數入可為“-e = e + [&lt;],,、 “/Pe + M + M” 、 “ve = e + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] ” 、 e = e + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;]”及 “Ae = e + [〈] +[&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;]”。 左游標鍵連績五次鍵擊不能選擇”e,,之控制鍵,如此得使 該鍵之移動功能再啟動(“e”已輸入)。刪除鍵(就λ權宜簡記 作[X ])可作為㈣綴輸入之控制鍵,如“ _ e = e + [ X ],,、 67e = e + [X] + [Xr v &gt; ve = e +[X] + [X] + [X] - ^ e-e + [X] + [X] + [X] + [X]” &amp; “Ae = e + [x] + [x] + [x] + [x] + [X]”。刪除键連續鍵擊五次可刪除前此輸入之“e,,。此時, 另一功能鍵可作其原始功能控制鍵(如移動功能),其可於 控制選擇後未再有控制被選擇(控制鍵輸入次數)時復原 始功能。 上例之左游標鍵之移動功能可再度回復,因此左游桿 [&lt;]只需鍵下不超過一次即可動用左移功能;亦即,“e,,輸 入後鍵擊[&lt;]鍵五次可使游標往左移動一格(與“e,,相距: 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 格),再一次的[&lt;]鍵鍵擊可使游標往左一格。此規則適用 於各種語言之輸入。 青分離式羞 3*4鍵盤上綴詞之給入) 現介紹者為3*4鍵盤上具上標(如音調符號)之羅馬字 母母音的輸入方式。 921282505 . A/ --------- _B7 _______ V. Description of invention () m.. 4_ The original function of the function key is entered in the 3 *4 keyboard of Figure 10-1 When the vowel is affixed, a "split key" can be used as a control key. For example, the left cursor key [&lt;] of the Chinese input mode can be "-e = e + [&lt;],, "/Pe + M + M", "ve = e + [&lt; ] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] ” , e = e + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;]" and "Ae = e + [<] +[&lt; ] + [&lt;] + [&lt;] + [&lt;]". The left cursor key can not select "e," the control key for five consecutive keystrokes, so that the movement function of the key can be restarted ("e" has been input). The delete key (the λ expedient is abbreviated as [X]) As the control key of the (four) suffix input, such as " _ e = e + [ X ],,, 67e = e + [X] + [Xr v &gt; ve = e + [X] + [X] + [X] - ^ ee + [X] + [X] + [X] + [X]" &amp; "Ae = e + [x] + [x] + [x] + [x] + [X]". Delete key consecutively The keystrokes five times can delete the "e,," of this input. At this time, another function key can be used as its original function control key (such as the mobile function), which can restore the start function when no control is selected after the control selection (control key input times). In the above example, the movement function of the left cursor key can be restored again, so the left joystick [&lt;] can use the left shift function only when the key is pressed less than once; that is, "e, input keystroke [&lt;] Five times to move the cursor to the left by one space (with "e,, distance: printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperatives", once again [&lt;] keystrokes to make the cursor to the left. This rule applies to the input of various languages. The blue-separated shy 3*4 keyboard suffix is given.) The presenter is the input method of the Roman character with the superscript (such as the diacritic) on the 3*4 keyboard. 92

!282505 ^------- 五、發明說明() 在上述最後複合表格中,不出現於母音“i”之後者為 1”及“U”(換言之,“a”、“e,,或“〇,,出現於“i”之後),不出現 於母音“u”之後者為“u,,及“i”(換言之,“a,,、“e”或‘‘〇,,出 現於“u”之後),圖1〇-2之母音圖表因此得以構成。當欲加 以一音調符號至母音“丨”、“a,,或“e,,於之左侧時(圖1〇_2), 右側母音“u”所用[#]鍵被當作控制鍵。同樣地,左側[*] 鍵作為音調符號,藉以將音調符號加至母音“〇,,或“U”之右 側上。舉例而言,輸入原則可為“/〇(第、,二聲)=〇 + [*] + [*] = [0] + [0] + [0] + [*]十[*],,、“/a (第二聲) = a + [#] + [#卜 [〇] + [#] + [#]» A tc Λ e = e + [#] + [# ] + [ # ] + [ # ] + [ # ] = [ 〇 ] + [〇 ] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#]”;雙韻母“ao”之輸入方式為 “ao = a + o = [0] +[〇]+ [〇}+[〇]”。系統得輕易辨知上述而無模糊 情事’因母音“a”或“e”不出現於“a,,之後、且無“〇a,,存在可 能之故。母音“..u”之形狀.似於母音“u,,,其可由鍵擊兩次 “u”鍵輸入之(以隱藏重覆選擇方法(Hiding Repeat Selection Method)為之)。 上述方式係利用中文之特性而得,即中文中母音‘‘ 口,, 不出現於“a”或“e”之後’且母音“i”不出現於母音、,,後。 在前述“a”及“i”或“e”及“i”不歸於同類、也兩母音由每三 鍵負責輸入之規則下’欲如圖10-1中以母音鍵當作控制 鍵是不可能的。圖10-2中,“i”及“u,,由[*]·或[#]鍵負=, 如此使用者得輕易辨知鍵之使用係作為控制用,並將分配 均衡性納入考量。圖10-2甲,母音鍵擊平均次數約為\ 5 次,同於圖10-1中者。 93 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先Μ讀背面之注意事 裝---- 項*iSU本頁) =霣· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製!282505 ^------- V. Description of invention () In the last composite form above, those that do not appear after the vowel "i" are 1" and "U" (in other words, "a", "e,, Or "〇,, appears after "i"), does not appear after the vowel "u" is "u,, and "i" (in other words, "a,," "e" or "'〇, appears in After "u"), the vowel chart of Figure 1〇-2 is thus constructed. When a tonal symbol is to be added to the vowels “丨”, “a,, or “e, on the left side” (Fig. 1〇_2 ), the [#] key used for the right vowel “u” is used as the control key. Similarly, the left [*] key is used as the diacritic symbol to add the diacritic to the right side of the vowel “〇,” or “U”. For example, the input principle can be "/〇(第,二声)=〇+ [*] + [*] = [0] + [0] + [0] + [*] ten [*],, , /a (second sound) = a + [#] + [#卜[〇] + [#] + [#]» A tc Λ e = e + [#] + [# ] + [ # ] + [ # ] + [ # ] = [ 〇] + [〇] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#] + [#]"; Double vowel "ao" is entered as "ao = a + o = [0] +[〇]+ [〇}+[〇]". The system has to easily recognize the above and there is no ambiguity. 'Because the vowel "a" or "e" does not appear in "a, after, and No "〇a, there is a possibility. The shape of the vowel "..u" seems to be the vowel "u,,, which can be input by the keystroke twice "u" (to hide the repeated selection method (Hiding Repeat) Selection Method). The above method is obtained by using the characteristics of Chinese, that is, the Chinese vowel ‘‘mouth, does not appear after “a” or “e”’ and the vowel “i” does not appear in the vowel, after. In the foregoing "a" and "i" or "e" and "i" are not attributed to the same type, and the two vowels are under the rule of input by each three keys. "To use the vowel key as the control key in Figure 10-1 is not possible. In Figure 10-2, "i" and "u, by [*]· or [#] key negative =, so the user can easily recognize the use of the key as a control, and take the allocation balance into consideration. Figure 10-2 A, the average number of vowel keystrokes is about \ 5 times, same as in Figure 10-1. 93 This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please first Reading the back of the note---- item *iSU page) =霣· Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製. 1282505 * 再討論圖10-2之更動例,由[0]鍵負責之三字符之 些者可由4x3鍵中一,,分離鍵”負責之。舉例而言,上、下某 左、右鍵之任一者皆可用於獨立對三字符之某些者的八、 中。 、一、义配 在圖至圖10-4中,羅馬拼音得在無模糊情形條 件下達成輸入目的,此乃因子音鍵⑴至[9]從母音鍵[*]/、、 [0]及[#]中分離出、且中文字的羅馬拼音依羅馬字母之子 音及母音出覌規則之故。 音分離小盤上之英文限 同於中文輸入者,英文亦得利用重覆選擇方法而於攪 少模糊情形條件下於圖10_1至圖1〇-4中子音母音分離鍵 上進行輸入,此乃因每種語言之字在使用羅馬字母時由交 替出現之子音及母音組成之故。 在英文中,,,字首,,子音最高重覆使用率可表示成 “CCCCVCCCC”(如 “Strengths”),其中 C 代表子音,而 v 代表母音。三子音頂多可出現在字首,但此僅出現於”st〜,, 或 sp〜之例中(如 spree、spleen、strength 等)。 與圖10-1中者同,當使用者鍵入“622〜,,以輸入英文字 “student”於包含約二或三子音之鍵盤上時(為簡單說明, 假設只有’’tin未分配於圖1 〇-1中),系統將把,,字首,,出現後 輸入之“622”當作“st,,而非“sdd,,(因此例三子音連續出現 在一英文字中僅限於“st〜”或“sp〜,,、且系統必須重新回想 這樣的英文發音規則或字符連接規則之故。在輸入“stu~,, 之“u”時’對應母音按鍵須予選擇,以使系統得辨知母音 94 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative. 1282505 * Let's discuss the example of Figure 10-2. The three characters responsible for the [0] key can be one of the 4x3 keys, and the separation key is responsible. For example Any one of the left and right sides of the upper and lower sides can be used for the independence of the eight characters of the three characters. One, the right match is shown in Figure 10-4, the Roman pinyin is in no blur. The input purpose is achieved under the condition that the factor keys (1) to [9] are separated from the vowel keys [*]/, [0] and [#], and the Roman alphabet of the Chinese characters is pronounced according to the consonants and vowels of the Roman alphabet. The reason for the rule is that the English on the small disc is the same as the Chinese input, and the English has to use the repeated selection method to dissolve the less ambiguous conditions on the sub-tone vowel separation key in Figure 10_1 to Figure 1-4. Input is made because the words of each language are composed of alternating sub-sounds and vowels when using Roman letters. In English,,, prefix, and sub-tone maximum re-use rate can be expressed as "CCCCVCCCC" ( Such as "Strengths", where C is the consonant and v is the vowel At most three consonants may occur in the prefix, but this occurs only in the embodiment "st~ ,, or of sp~ (e.g. spree, spleen, strength, etc.). As in the case of Figure 10-1, when the user types "622~, to input the English word "student" on a keyboard containing about two or three consonants (for simplicity, assume that only ''tin is not assigned to the map) 1 〇-1), the system will put,, prefix, and input "622" as "st, instead of "sdd," (so the third subtone appears in an English word only " St~" or "sp~,,, and the system must revisit such English pronunciation rules or character connection rules. When inputting "stu~,, "u", the corresponding vowel button must be selected to make the system To identify the vowel 94 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

12825051282505

五、發明說明() .(如‘II,,)係出現於子音類( 頰(如St )後。在“Stu”輸入後,使用 者一經鍵入“2,,以輸入,,吐 .^ ^ d時’糸統能辨知子音出現了。同 樣地,當使用者鍵入“〜**, (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再琪寫本頁) //22 以輪入 “student” 的“〜ent” 時’系統能在使用者輪入“**,,後辨知為“e”而非“aa”之輸 ^ ^ ^ t ^ «a» ^ ^ Λ ^^ ^ m ^ ^ ^ ; 雖然“7722”可能被當作為“mmt”、“ 田外马 mmt、ndd”、“nt”或 “mmdd”, 但利用判定“連續鍵擊延遲碎門. 事 &lt; 遲日寻間(Successive Stroke Delay Tmer及‘‘分離鍵擊延遲時間^ st^ke DelayV. Invention Description (). (such as 'II,,) appears in the consonant class (behavior (such as St). After the input of "Stu", the user once typed "2, to input, spit. ^ ^ When d is used, the system can recognize the consonant. Similarly, when the user types "~**, (please read the back of the note first and then write this page) //22 to enter the "student" When ~ent", the system can turn "**," and then recognize the "e" instead of "aa". ^ ^ ^ t ^ «a» ^ ^ Λ ^^ ^ m ^ ^ ^ ; Although "7722" may be regarded as "mmt", "field horse mmt, ndd", "nt" or "mmdd", the use of the judgment "continuous keystroke delays the broken door. Things &lt; late search (Successive Stroke Delay Tmer and ''separate keystroke delay time^ st^ke Delay

Tme) ’重覆選擇輸入法所造成的模糊情形可大幅降低, 此非為先前文獻已述及者。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 就目前的標準英文鍵盤而言(圖„),子音及母音皆歸 於每一鍵負貝,重覆選擇法所造成的模糊情形得以降低, 即在顧及一語言字之發音規則(字符連接規則)後可降低 之。不過’此後語言限制輸入法(特別是以重覆選擇法當 作全輸入法)很難用於一單一鍵負責子音及母音的狀況 中。舉例而言,當使用者在圖丨」中以重覆選擇輸入法輸 入“student”時’ “stu〜”之輸入碼為“777888〜,,,此時系統不 能判斷“777”後(即” s”)之“888究為“ ut(即sut),,、“tu (即 Stu)”或‘‘以即3¥)’’(當然,系統可考慮判斷“888,,非為 “ttt”,因“ttt”在英文限制輸入法中不出現於“s,,之後)。同 樣地,當使用者鍵入“333”以輸入‘‘〜de〜,,時,“de,,及“ed,, 兩者之判斷會發生模糊,系統可考慮將“〜de〜,,前輸入之 “888777”當作“sut”、“stu”或“sv,,。故於三例中,系統可將 “3 3 3,,當作‘、de〜,,或“〜ed〜,、 95 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 , A7 ---—_____B7 五、發明說明() 因此’當作全輸入法之重覆選擇法便發生模糊情事, 即便使用語言限制法時亦同,因為系統不能在語言限制法 中利用母音及子音出現規則(即造字規則及字連接規則) 而明確判知該輪入值究為母音或子音。在子音與母音分開 之例中(如圖10」至10_4者),系統在重覆選擇法中得辨 知母音鍵之鍵擊為母音之輸入,而子音鍵之鍵擊則代表子 音之輸入,如此即得大幅降低模糊情事之發生。 至少兩母音在使用羅馬字母時遑續出現(如,captain” 中的“ai,,)。在實際字中,相同母音(“a,,、“e”、“i,,、“。,,及 “u”)連續出現之例極多,如“f00d,,或“teen,,中的‘‘〇〇,,或 “ee” ’但“uu”(如“vacuum”)卻相當罕見,本案申請人亦未 於英文字典中發現“…⑽…,,或‘‘_·_Π···,,等字。因此,很多 狀況出現之模糊情事可避免之,其方式為使五個英文基本 母音由[*]、[〇]或[#]鍵負責,即鍵擊一次可選擇“a,,,而 兩此鍵擊可選擇“e,,、“〇,,及“u”之一者。舉例而言,奮母音 “a”及“〇”在重覆選擇中由[*]鍵負責聘,系統將[*]鍵的兩 次鍵擊當作母音“〇,,之輸入而非“aa,,。同樣地,當“丨”及“u,, 在重覆選擇法中由[0]鍵負責,那麼系統就將[〇]鍵的兩次 鍵擊當作母音“u”之輸入而非兩母音“ii”之輸。即便真實字 中無aa或“ii”之存在的假設不為絕對,但模糊,但模糊 情事可藉由判定連續鍵擊延遲時間及分離键擊延遲時間 而近乎消除,此不同於先前文獻所载者。另一母音‘‘e,,由 [#]鍵負責,並以鍵擊該鍵一次代表之。 為以[*]、[0]及[#]鍵當作特殊用途鍵,使用者只需將 96 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再读寫本頁) 訂· ·% 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 11 Μ i t: N 0 N3 V 干srsr ) i - Μ 公 yv Μ 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( .母音e由一特定鍵代表之即可。舉例而言,“i”、“e,,或 “u”可由[0]負責之。母音“u,,之輸入由鍵擊[〇]鍵三次為 之,因其為英文中最少使用之母。最後,模糊情事難能發 生於1及e”間(該兩者為分別鍵擊一次及兩次),當“厂,、 “e”及“u”由[〇]鍵負責、且苺文中母音不連續出現(即不 出現…11…之時。然而,模糊情事確會發生於“U,,、“ie,, 及“ei”之間,當母音“u,,以連續鍵擊[〇]鍵三次輪入之時, 不過此狀況鮮少出現,因母音“u,,之使用頻率並不高。 由上可知,模糊情事可因子音母音分離小鍵盤的使用 而明顯減少。再者,以代表多母音之鍵輸入母音時幾無模 糊情事,其方式為鍵擊該鍵一次選擇字典中英文字不連續 出現之母音。: 相同法則可用於每一鍵約代表兩或三子音之鍵盤 上,與不連續出現之母音以對應鍵鍵擊一次之方式選擇 之、最少使用之母音則以連續鍵擊三次代表之方式相 上述羅馬拼音輸入係以英文例進行說明,不過相_、 則亦可用於其它語言之羅馬拼音輸入上。 法 11· _3子音母—音分離小鍵之印尼語 印尼語亦以羅馬字(英文字)來拼讀其文 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 ,產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 (請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再读寫本頁) 具音節槿 造說明如下(其中C代表子音,而V則代表母音)。 V : be-a (tariff) VC : am-bil (catch) CV : go-sok (rub) CVC : pon-dol (hut) 97Tme) 'The ambiguity caused by repeated selection of input methods can be greatly reduced, which is not mentioned in the previous literature. According to the current standard English keyboard (picture „), the sub-tones and vowels of the Ministry of Economic Affairs are printed on the standard English keyboard (picture „), and the ambiguity caused by the repeated selection method is reduced, that is, one is considered. The pronunciation rule of the language word can be reduced after the pronunciation rule (character connection rule). However, the language restriction input method (especially the repeated selection method is used as the full input method) is difficult to use in the case of a single key responsible for the consonant and the vowel. For example, when the user enters "student" by repeating the input method in the drawing, the input code of "stu~" is "777888~,", and the system cannot judge "777" at this time (ie, " s") "888" is "ut" (ie sut),, "tu (ie Stu)" or "'to 3¥)" (of course, the system can consider "888, not "ttt ", because "ttt" does not appear in "s, after," in the English restricted input method. Similarly, when the user types "333" to enter ''~de~,", "de,, and "ed , the judgment of the two will be blurred, the system can consider " De~,, before entering "888777" as "sut", "stu" or "sv,,. In three cases, the system can treat "3 3 3, as ', de~, or" ~ed~,, 95 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505, A7 ----_____B7 V. Invention Description () Therefore 'as a repeated choice of full input method The law is ambiguous, even when using the language restriction method, because the system cannot use the vowel and consonant appearance rules (ie, the word-making rules and word-connection rules) in the language restriction method to explicitly determine that the round-in value is a vowel. Or a consonant. In the case where the consonant is separated from the vowel (as shown in Figures 10 to 10_4), the system recognizes that the keystroke of the vowel key is the input of the vowel in the repeated selection method, and the keystroke of the consonant key represents the consonant. The input, so as to greatly reduce the occurrence of vagueness. At least two vowels appear successively when using the Roman alphabet (eg, ai,, in captain). In the actual word, the same vowel ("a,," "e", "i,", ".,", and "u") appears in many consecutive instances, such as "f00d,, or "teen," ''〇〇,, or "ee" 'but 'uu' (such as "vacuum") is quite rare, and the applicant in this case did not find "...(10)...,, or ''_·_Π··· ,, and so on. Therefore, the ambiguity of many situations can be avoided by making the five basic English vowels responsible by the [*], [〇] or [#] keys, that is, the keystroke can be selected once "a,,, and two Keystrokes can be selected as one of “e,,, “〇,, and “u.” For example, the euphonic sounds “a” and “〇” are used in the repeated selection by the [*] key, and the system will [ The keystroke of the *] key is used as the vowel "〇,, the input is not "aa,". Similarly, when "丨" and "u," are responsible for the [0] key in the repeated selection method, then The system will use the two keystrokes of the [〇] key as the input of the vowel "u" instead of the two vowels "ii". Even if the assumption that there is no aa or "ii" in the real word is not absolute, it is ambiguous, but the ambiguity can be almost eliminated by determining the continuous keystroke delay time and the separation keystroke delay time, which is different from the previous literature. By. The other vowel ‘‘e,, is responsible for the [#] key, and it is represented once by the keystroke. In order to use the [*], [0] and [#] keys as special-purpose keys, the user only needs to use 96 (please read the notes on the back and read this page first). ··% Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau Employees' consumption cooperatives print 11 Μ it: N 0 N3 V dry srsr ) i - Μ public yv Μ 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention description (The vowel e is represented by a specific key. For example, "i", “e,, or “u” can be responsible for [0]. The vowel “u,” is input by the keystroke [〇] key three times because it is the least used mother in English. Finally, the fuzzy situation can hardly occur. Between 1 and e" (the two are keystrokes once and twice respectively), when "factory, "e" and "u" are responsible for the [〇] key, and the vowels in the raspberry text do not appear continuously (ie, do not appear) At the time of ...11... However, the ambiguity does occur between "U,," "ie," and "ei". When the vowel "u," is continually hit [〇] for three rounds, However, this situation rarely occurs, because the vowel "u," is not used frequently. It can be seen from the above that the fuzzy situation can be significantly reduced by the use of the factor-tone sound separation keypad. There is no ambiguity when inputting the vowel by the key representing the multi-vowel. The method is to select the vowel of the dictionary in which the English characters do not appear in succession. The same rule can be used on the keyboard of each key representing two or three consonants. The vowels that are discontinuously appearing in the manner of corresponding keystrokes are selected, and the least-used vowels are represented by three consecutive keystrokes. The above-mentioned Roman Pinyin input system is described in English, but the phase _ can also be used. In the other languages, the Roman Pinyin input. The law 11· _3 sub-phonetic-sound separation key Indonesian Indonesian language also uses Roman characters (English characters) to spell out the wisdom of the Ministry of Economy and Economy, the production bureau employee consumption cooperative printing (Please read the notes on the back and read this page first) The descriptions of the syllables are as follows (where C is the consonant and V is the vowel) V : be-a (tariff) VC : am-bil (catch) CV : go-sok (rub) CVC : pon-dol (hut) 97

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公餐Y 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 GCV : tra-di-si (tradition) CCVC : con-trak (contract) CVCC : teks-tur (textile) CCCV : kon-struk-si (construction) CCCVC : strip-tis (striptease) 由上述字可知,含三或更多子音字之兔— &gt; 〜 、馬央文外來字, 因此現就假設英文字首中不會出展三或多個連續子立(除 印尼語中的“st~”或“SP~”。印尼語限制重覆選擇:法可^字 發音規則(字符連接規則)使用之。 “q”及“X”為科學類符號所,如物理或數學所角,且罕 為字符都入所用;故,該兩者不規為一特定鍵類中,立得 以一對應鍵連續鍵擊三*之方式輪人。與中文類似的^广 印尼語得以二或多羅馬字加以拼音,句” 曰 巴含 ny,,、“sy,,、“以,, 及“ng”等。 除“q” and “x”外之19個子音(油蚪加 丁曰叶2 1個英文字母子音) 之非類得以任何方式為之,伸皆♦ 1-白而配合印尼語之特性訂定 之。舉例而言,分類方式可為下述者: BP / DT / GK / CJ / MN / IR / N ’ LR / sz / FV / HWY “q”及“x”可規於適當類巾, 甲如將q”規於“GK,,類中,“x” 則規於“SZ”類中。 “a,,、“i” “u,, 6及〇’’用於印尼語母—音之拼音中, 其有雙母音“ai”、“an”及“〇i”,甘丄 Λ 01 ’其中“〇i”罕為所用。因此, 在將五母音規為二或三類時 貝f a及“i,,或“a,,即“u”以不規 於同類中為佳。舉例而言分 口,刀頸方式可為ae/uo/ i。與英文 98This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public meal Y 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (Ministry of Economics, Smart Finance, Production Bureau, Staff Consumption Cooperative, Printed GCV: tra-di-si (tradition) CCVC : con-trak (contract) CVCC : teks-tur (textile) CCCV : kon-struk-si (construction) CCCVC : strip-tis (striptease) From the above words, rabbits with three or more sub-words - &gt; ~, Ma Yangwen foreign words, so it is assumed that there will be no three or more consecutive sub-libraries in the English prefix (except for "st~" or "SP~" in Indonesian. Indonesian restrictions are repeated: 法可^ The word pronunciation rules (character connection rules) are used. "q" and "X" are scientific symbols, such as physics or mathematics, and rare characters are used; therefore, the two are not a specific key. In the class, Li can be a key player with a keystroke of three consecutive keystrokes. Similar to Chinese, the Cantonese-speaking Indonesian language can be used to pinyin two or more Roman characters. The sentence "曰巴 contains ny,,," sy,,," With ,, and "ng", etc. 19 sub-tones except "q" and "x" (The oil 蚪 蚪 曰 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 之 之 之 得以 得以 得以 ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ ♦ BP / DT / GK / CJ / MN / IR / N ' LR / sz / FV / HWY "q" and "x" can be applied to the appropriate type of towel, such as q" will be in the "GK, class," x” is in the “SZ” category. “a,,, “i” “u,, 6 and 〇” are used in the Indonesian mother-sound pinyin, which has double vowels “ai” and “an”. And "〇i", Ganzi 01 'where "〇i" is rarely used. Therefore, when the five vowels are two or three, fa and "i, or "a," "u" It is better not to be in the same category. For example, the splitting method can be ae/uo/i.

(請先M讀背面之注意事項再 · I I :^^本頁) 訂: 線· 1282505(Please read the notes on the back of the M first. I I :^^this page) Order: Line · 1282505

I B7 五、發明說明() •中同者為,不連續出現之母音(或不常連續出現之母音)以 由各類中對英鍵鍵及一次之方式選擇之為佳。 12.4 子音母音分離小鍵盤上日本語限制見8]\4 曰本語常用輸入方式為:利用羅馬字輸入日本語之聲 •音,並接著轉換為日本語;因此,圖10-1至10-4中子音 母音分離小鍵盤上羅馬字可用作為該四本語之聲音輪入 及曰本語之轉換,其中态、、、、々、之及分別以a、i、u、 e、及〇表示之而々、ί:、办、打及 ¢)分別以na、ni、nu、 ne及no表示之,其它字則以各種羅馬字符子音及母音表 示之。 . . · .... 在日文中,當使用促音(Soku-on)或#力音(You-on)(以小 寫字母表示)時,羅馬字子音連讀出現兩次。假設态、V、、 々、之及扫的組合鮮少在包含連續羅馬字之字中連讀出現, 頂多二或三羅馬字母母音連續出覌是相當少見的。因此, “a”、“i”、“u”、“e”及“〇”五個母音分成三類,如圖 10-1 至圖10-4所示,其輸入並由三鍵負責之。此時,母音以 重覆選擇輸入法輸入時鮮少有模糊情事之發生。在日文 中,“a”輸入對應於“态”,“na”輸入對應於”(此相同法 則適用於其它曰本字),因此系統在得知使用者輸入“na” 時便將其當作“。 五十音曰文字母表中,可對其進行拼音之羅馬字子音 14 個,包含 k、s、t、n、h、m、y、r、w、g、z、d、b 及p。就捣音而言,兩羅馬字符子音之組合(如“ c h a ”或 “sha”)、含“y”之組合(如“kya”)、或“j”被用於重音標記, 99 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先朋讀背面之注意事 項 頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505I B7 V. INSTRUCTIONS () • The same is true for unequal vowels (or vowels that do not often appear consecutively) in a variety of pairs of English keys and once. 12.4 Subsonic vowel separation On the Japanese keyboard, see 8]\4 曰 The common input method for this language is to use the Roman word to input the sound of the Japanese language, and then convert it to Japanese; therefore, Figures 10-1 to 10- 4 Roman syllables on the neutron-sounding vowels can be used as the rotation of the four-language sounds and the conversion of the slang, where states, ,, 々, and y, respectively, represent a, i, u, e, and 〇 However, 々, ί:, do, play, and ¢ are represented by na, ni, nu, ne, and no, respectively, and other words are represented by various Roman character consonants and vowels. . . . .... In Japanese, when using Soku-on or You-on (in lowercase letters), the Roman sub-note appears twice. It is assumed that the combination of the state, V, 々, 扫, and 鲜 is rarely read in the words containing consecutive Roman characters. It is quite rare for the vowels of the last two or three Roman letters to appear consecutively. Therefore, the five vowels of “a”, “i”, “u”, “e” and “〇” are divided into three categories, as shown in Figure 10-1 to Figure 10-4, and their inputs are responsible for the three keys. At this time, there is rarely a ambiguity in the vowel when the input method is repeatedly selected. In Japanese, the "a" input corresponds to "state" and the "na" input corresponds to "(this same rule applies to other transcripts), so the system treats the user as "na" as ". In the syllabary alphabet, there are 14 Roman sub-notes that can be pinyin, including k, s, t, n, h, m, y, r, w, g, z, d, b, and p. In the case of arpeggios, a combination of two Roman character consonants (such as "cha" or "sha"), a combination of "y" (such as "kya"), or "j" is used for accent marks, 99 paper scales. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (please read the note on the back of the first page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printed 1282505

經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 五、發明說明() .羅馬字子音在 eh、sh、ky、ny、hy、my、ry、訂、py 或 Py連續出現二或多次,並使用促音。當以拗音為之時, 相同字母k、s、t及p可能連續出現(如“ippai,,),因 此16個羅馬字符子音(14子音+c及j)在曰文字的輸入上 .是不可或缺的。該等輪人可經由對子音母音分離小鍵盤加 以設計而使輸入變得較為簡易。其它五個羅馬字子立 卜q、v及X亦為英文輸入所需,但主要加以分類者 個羅馬字子音1舉例而言,分類原則可為下述者^為16 BP / DT / GK / CJ / Η / MN / R / SZ / YW ; ^ BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / Y / SZ / R:W / ^ ^ ^ BP / DT / GK / CJ / HR / M;N / SZ / YW / 九类員 英文輸入所需之五羅馬字子音可適當加於八^ 中,與中文者似。以分成八類之分類原責言,、各分類 J Μ鐘把 其它四鍵作為母音鍵;若只使用三個母音由、盤上 那麼另 為英文輸入所需之子音所用。 …〜鍵 12·5語言限制之消哈 LRRSM之使用代價為犧牲其FIM可输入所有〜 其存在於字典中與否)之優點,因此使用者以能央=(不綸 限制存在與否為佳,·但,即便在語言限制輸入%^定語言 語言限制功能得以進行)中,使用者若欲輸入不存式(I使 中或有違字發音規則(字連接規則)之字時,〜其必/於字典 本字之輸入後輸入一特定功能鍵(如以空白鏠、、在〜基 鍵、或字作結束),以表其確係欲輸入該 二移動 “.…一 L、……… 知鍵’並輪A 進行輪 下一字符,此種作法得使所有可能之字符組合皆得 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4 (請先朋讀背面之注意事 丨—--- 項再埃寫本頁) 訂* * 100 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財^局員工湞費合作社印製 1282505 五、發明說明( .入。舉例而言,當使用者在圖 中以夬文限制絡入、+ 輸入“622~”,系統將其輸入值視^句輪入法 广兮 St〜,而非“ 若欲輸入“sdd〜”,使甩者只需輸入、2,,、一 *白〆〜; 動功能鍵及“2”、或輪入“62,,及啟動一結&quot;-字白之鍵=左移 .一結束字之控制鍵),,、並接著輸入“ 。(如 丄 右62輸入後鉍 動字結束功月、,系統將”2”後之輪入視作為“d,,,,,主,, 定語言限制輸入模式之語言限制的方式稱為,,語言限制之 消除”,上述“Sdd〜,,例為,,英文限制之消除,,例。 同樣地,在輪入英文之子音組合“ui,,(非圖10_2中中文 限制輸入模.式之中文羅馬拼音(以中文限制為之》 時,使用者只需鍵入“U”、一字結束機制(如上該者),並接 著輸入“i”。不然,若使用者在圖10-2中文限制輪入模式 (使用中文限制RSM)選擇”i”所用鍵時,“u,,之詞綴將以先 剷文獻中該方式輸入(例如:當系統設定將,,u,,上加有音調 符號(或一字符(如”u”上加有“··,,之,,u,,))視作,,u,,之詞綴 (因母音“U”或後輸入之代表“i”之鍵在文中限制RSM中 係為控制鍵之故)。因此使用者可在中文限制輸入模式中 輸入所有不出現在中文羅馬拼音之字(如字母組合(如英 文字))。換言之,主要使用中文之使用者可在中文限制輸 入模式中輸入所有不出現在中文中的字符組合(如使用中 文專利RSM之模式),且此時使用者可在不改變模式之條 件下完成之,此可謂中文限制之消除。 同樣法則可用於使用三母音元素之朝鮮語中一子音或 101 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公釐)Ministry of Economic Affairs, Smart Finance, Production Bureau, Consumer Cooperatives, Printing, V. Inventions (). Roman characters are appearing two or more times in eh, sh, ky, ny, hy, my, ry, order, py or Py, and use Promote sound. When the arpeggio is used, the same letters k, s, t, and p may appear continuously (such as "ippai,,"), so 16 Roman character consonants (14 consonants + c and j) are on the input of the 曰 text. Ordinary. These rounds can be designed to make the input easier by designing the sub-tone vowel separation keypad. The other five Roman characters, q, v and X, are also required for English input, but are mainly classified. For example, a Roman character 1 can be classified as follows: BP / DT / GK / CJ / Η / MN / R / SZ / YW ; ^ BP / DT / GK / CJ / H / MN / Y / SZ / R: W / ^ ^ ^ BP / DT / GK / CJ / HR / M; N / SZ / YW / The five roman sub-notes required for the English input of the nine categories can be added to the eight ^, Similar to the Chinese. It is divided into eight categories to be the original blame, and each category J Μ clock uses the other four keys as the vowel key; if only three vowels are used, the disc is used for the input of the desired sub-tones. ...~Keys 12·5 language restrictions eliminate the use of LRRSM at the expense of its FIM can input all ~ its existence in the dictionary or not), thus making It is better to be able to enter or not, but even if the language restriction function is enabled, the user wants to enter the non-existent type. When the word pronunciation rule (word connection rule) is used, it must be entered into a specific function key after the input of the dictionary word (such as blank 鏠, ~ base key, or word end) to confirm The system wants to input the two movements "....a L,......... know the key" and round A to carry the next character. This way, all the possible combinations of characters can be obtained according to the Chinese National Standard (CNS). A4 (Please read the back of the note first---- Item Re-Ai wrote this page) Order* * 100 A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Wisdom Treasury Bureau employee fee cooperative cooperative printing 1225055 V. Invention description (. In other words, when the user restricts the input in the figure and + enters "622~", the system enters the input value as a sentence into the method, instead of "if you want to input "sdd~", Let the reader only need to input, 2,,, a * white 〆 ~; move function keys and "2", or turn "62,, Start a knot &quot;-word white key = left shift. A control word of the end word),,, and then enter ". (If the right 62 input, after the end of the word, the system will be "2" after the round As the "d,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Similarly, when you turn in the English sub-sound combination "ui,, (in Chinese, if you limit Chinese input in the Chinese language, you can type "U", one word). End the mechanism (as above) and then enter "i". Otherwise, if the user selects the key used for "i" in the Chinese restricted wheeling mode (using Chinese restriction RSM) in Figure 10-2, the "u," affix will be entered in the first shovel document (for example: when the system is set up) Put, u,, with a diacritic (or a character (such as "u" with "··,,,,, u,,))), u, suffix (due to vowel "U" "The key that represents "i" after the input is restricted in the text to be the control key in the RSM.) Therefore, the user can input all the characters that do not appear in Chinese Roman Pinyin in the Chinese restricted input mode (such as letter combination (such as English word)). In other words, users who mainly use Chinese can enter all the character combinations that do not appear in Chinese in the Chinese restricted input mode (such as the Chinese patent RSM mode), and the user can change the mode at this time. Under the conditions, this can be said to eliminate the Chinese restrictions. The same rule can be used in the Korean language of the three vowel elements, or a paper size of 101. The Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm)

1282505 五、發明說明() .一母音當作一單字符上。舉例而言,在圖4_5中輸入子音 ‘‘π及母音‘‘〜”當作一單一字符時,使用者必須在’’字首’’ 狀態中選擇[1 ]鍵、一字結束功能機制,I接著再於”字首,, 狀態鍵入[*]鍵。[1]及[*]鍵之連續鍵擊町得刻。在標 •準鍵盤中(即標準英文及朝鮮語鍵盤中),右游標鍵之鍵擊 得啟動字結束功能,而非為輸入一空格。若該右游標鍵加 入,同樣法則亦可用於本發明中。 限制造成之時間延遲 “連續鍵及時間延遲,,及“分離鍵擊時間延遲”會出現在 一鍵代表三或多字之例中。舉例而言,當連續鍵擊時間 . · * — · · 在圖1-1之英文鍵盤上的延遲時間為〇1秒,那麼系統會 將[2]鍵的連續兩次鍵擊(〇1秒鐘以内)當作“B”字。 同樣地,·當[2]連續被選擇三次(即[2^121 + 1:2])、且第 一及第二輸入值([2]鍵的第一及第二次鍵擊)間碑間延遲 小於一預定時間(如〇· 1秒)、且第二及第三輸入值間的延 遲時間小於該預定時間(如Ο·〗秒)(即[2]+少於〇」秒+[2] + 少於0· 1秒+ [2]) ’系統將會認定此輸入為”C”字。當[2]鍵 連續被選擇二次(即[2] + [2] + [2])、且總時間延遲小於連續 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 鍵擊時間延遲之兩倍(如〇·2秒)’系統被設定成將該輸入 視為”C”。 在英文中,若”..u”不出現於圖1〇胃1中,且英文字中母 音“a”或“i”不連續出現之規則嚴格限定其中,那麼使用者 可輸入縮寫字,如在英文限制重覆選擇模式中藉由取消英 文限制而輸入“Nil”,其中取消英文限制需要啟動字結束 102 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() ’功能。不過,“NI”輸入可被確定,不需於,,NI,,輸入後一預 定時間完畢時啟動字結束功能,該預定時間可同於,,分離 鍵擊時間延遲”(如先前文獻中該者),並以長於“分離鍵擊 時間延遲”為佳。舉例而言,“NI,,輸入可在不需於其輸入 •後2秒鐘内啟動字結束功能之條件下確定之,系統又重新 回到”字首”狀態。這種時間延遲稱作“語言限制暫時取消 之時間延遲(Delay Time for Temporary Cancellation 〇f1282505 V. INSTRUCTIONS (). A vowel is treated as a single character. For example, when the input sub-sound ''π and vowel ''~" are regarded as a single character in Figure 4_5, the user must select the [1] key and the end-of-word function mechanism in the ''header'' state. I then type the [*] key in the "Words," state. The consecutive keystrokes of the [1] and [*] keys are engraved. In the standard keyboard (that is, in the standard English and Korean keyboards), the right cursor key hits the start word end function instead of entering a space. If the right cursor key is added, the same rule can be used in the present invention. The time delay caused by the limit "continuous key and time delay, and "separate keystroke time delay" will appear in the case of one or three keys. For example, when the continuous keystroke time. · * — · · In the English keyboard of Figure 1-1, the delay time is 〇1 second, then the system will treat the two consecutive keystrokes of the [2] key (within 1 second) as the word "B". Similarly, when [2] is selected three times in succession (ie [2^121 + 1:2]), and the first and second input values (the first and second keystrokes of the [2] key) are less than one predetermined. Time (such as 〇·1 second), and the delay time between the second and third input values is less than the predetermined time (such as Ο· y seconds) (ie [2] + less than 〇 seconds + [2] + less than 0·1 second + [2]) 'The system will recognize this input as "C". When the [2] key is selected twice in succession (ie [2] + [2] + [2]), and the total time delay is less than twice the delay of the printed keystrokes of the Employees' Consumer Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, 〇·2 seconds) 'The system is set to treat this input as "C". In English, if "..u" does not appear in the stomach 1 of Figure 1, and the rules for the vowel "a" or "i" in the English word are not strictly defined, the user can enter the abbreviation, such as In the English Restricted Repeat Selection mode, enter "Nil" by canceling the English restriction. The English restriction is required to start the word end. 102 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 B7 Fifth, the invention description () 'function. However, the "NI" input can be determined without the need to start the word end function at the end of a predetermined time after the input, the predetermined time can be the same as, separating the keystroke time delay" (as in the previous literature) It is better to be longer than the "separate keystroke time delay." For example, "NI, the input can be determined without starting the word end function within 2 seconds after the input is made, and the system is Go back to the "head" state. This time delay is called "the time delay for the temporary cancellation of the language limit (Delay Time for Temporary Cancellation 〇f

Language Restriction (DTTCLR)),,,並以得由使:;用者設定 * 為佳。很明顯地,此原則可用於每一種語言上。 各穠時間延遲可摘述如下: 連續鍵擊時間延遲(SSDT)S分離緣擊時間延遲 (DSDT)S語言限制暫時取消之時間延遲(DTTCLR)。 該三種時間延遲值可設為相同值,其中該分離鍵擊時 間延遲以長於連續鍵擊時.間延遲、且語言限制暫時取消之 • 時間延遲以長於分離鍵擊時間延遲為佳。 U·按輸入值長度所為之同時輸入法 簡碼索引中所存短碼長度可小於一預定數。就特定例 而言’使用者或系統可設定短碼類型(如類型1 (城市名)、 類型2 (銀行名)、…,其中類型丨及類型2係按先前文獻 之樹狀結構分類)。當於C1M模式(利用SIM當作基本輸 入模式)中,若輸入值長度超過3、短碼類·型指定為類型 1 (城市名)' 且短碼長度小於3,那麼系統將視輸入值為全 碼。相反地,當使用者在FIM式CIM(以FIM為基本輸入 之CIM)模式中輸入三輸入值、並啟動字結束功能(如空 103 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) &lt;請先Μ讀背面之注意事 訂·· --線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ’或“e”偶爾單 1282505 五、發明說明( •格),系統將视該輸入值 此法則對於-中文特定類碼)。 通集團、·.·)之短碼長度小於—市名-北京、公司名-四 (在朝鮮語或中文中, 丄、預疋長度之狀況特別有用 .定立銘盤夕立… 、疋類型名詞通常至少包含少一 ό ^ 式起始碼當作短碼之方式是相當 自;。舉例而言,大部份的々 也 巧朝鮮銀仃名皆由二音節組成 者,其音節式起始碼長度為2)。 上法則對於不需在輪入之初決定输人值究為一短 碼:-簡碼之情況相當有用’該狀況即系統可依輸入值長 度是否大於一預定值而判定輸入值為-簡碼或-全碼。亦 即,^統在一輪入值進入後只需核對输入值長度是否大於 預疋長度’不需參照其短碼索引,因此得簡化系統之動 作,並得加強系統性能。 14·語言限制同時輸入法(CI]VI) 在浯言限制同時輸入法中,當輸入值有違一特定語言,, 子發音規則”(即違反語言限制),系統將在F][M式CIM(以 FIM為基本輸入模式之CIM)中視該輸入值為一簡。當判 定簡碼索引中輸入值無同時值時,系統將再度視該輸入值 為一全碼。 14.1以 LRRSM作為FIM之語言限制同 (CIM) 14.1.1 中立 就特定例言,在圖10-1 to 10-4中的中文音節式起始 碼有一子音鍵([1]至[9])數字值.(母音“a”、‘ (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再本頁)Language Restriction (DTTCLR)),,, and the reason for:; user setting * is better. Obviously, this principle can be used in every language. The respective time delays can be summarized as follows: Continuous Keystroke Time Delay (SSDT) S Separation Margin Time Delay (DSDT) The S language limits the time delay for temporary cancellation (DTTCLR). The three time delay values can be set to the same value, wherein the split keystroke time delay is longer than the continuous keystroke delay, and the language limit is temporarily canceled. • The time delay is preferably longer than the split keystroke time delay. U· Simultaneous input method according to the length of the input value The length of the short code stored in the short code index can be less than a predetermined number. For a specific example, the user or system can set a short code type (e.g., type 1 (city name), type 2 (bank name), ..., where type 丨 and type 2 are classified according to the tree structure of the previous document). When in C1M mode (using SIM as the basic input mode), if the input value length exceeds 3, the short code class type is specified as type 1 (city name)', and the short code length is less than 3, then the system will regard the input value as Full size. Conversely, when the user enters a three-input value in the FIM-style CIM (CIM with FIM as the basic input) mode and starts the word end function (such as empty 103 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) &lt;Please read the note on the back first.· --Line Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative print 'or 'e' occasional single 1282505 V. Invention description (• grid), the system will see This input value is for the -Chinese specific class code). The short code length of the group, ···) is less than—the city name—Beijing, the company name—four (in Korean or Chinese, the length of the 丄 and the length of the 疋 特别 is particularly useful. 立立铭盘夕立... The way to include at least one less ό ^ start code as a short code is quite self; for example, most of the 々 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜 朝鲜For 2). The upper rule is that it is not necessary to determine the value of the input at the beginning of the round-up: a short code is quite useful. 'The situation is that the system can determine the input value according to whether the input value length is greater than a predetermined value - short code Or - full code. That is, after one round of entry, it is only necessary to check whether the length of the input value is greater than the length of the preview. It is not necessary to refer to the short code index, so the operation of the system is simplified, and the system performance is enhanced. 14·Language Restriction Simultaneous Input Method (CI) VI) In the simultaneous input method of rumors, when the input value violates a specific language, the sub-pronunciation rule (ie, the language restriction is violated), the system will be in F][M-style In CIM (CIM with FIM as the basic input mode), the input value is regarded as a simple. When the input value of the short code index is determined to have no simultaneous value, the system will again regard the input value as a full code. 14.1 Using LRRSM as FIM Language Limitation (CIM) 14.1.1 Neutral As a specific example, the Chinese syllable start code in Figures 10-1 to 10-4 has a sub-key ([1] to [9]) numerical value. (Matrix) a", ' (Please read the back of the note first page)

104104

本紙張尺度適用f國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 •1282505 彆This paper scale applies to national standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 • 1282505

經濟部智慧財j局員工湞費合作社印製 .獨使用,以使其不超過—個插人字具有意義,且甚少使 用;分別以“y”、“W”或“y,,開頭之母音“i,,、“u”或“ u”亦單 獨使用)。就一使用重覆選擇法之全碼而言,[*]、[〇]及 [#]鍵之一者必須加以選擇,以對圖1〇1至1〇 4例之第二 及第三輸入值輸入-母音’這對以同時輸入法(前文中按 本案申請人先前文獻以朝鮮語為例說明)中輸入值是否在 輪入之初構成一全瑪之判斷相當有用。 舉例而言,當使用者於同時輸入法(如FIM式CIM)中 輸入“693…=Shk…,,’並以全輸入碼當作一基本輸入碼, 麼系統將在第三值[3]輪入時認定該輸入值不構成―全 (音子音“k”不能出現在“sh,’之後),並判定該輸入值為一 碼0 當使用者輸入“112...n·,,時,系統將該輸入值視 不構成一全碼(因在中文中輸入“u,,不能被視作“bb,,,而 視作“p”,且出現在”p”之後的羅馬字母子音“d,,或“t,,不 構成一中文音節),並將在第三值[2]輸入時視輪入值為 簡碼。同樣地,當使用者輸入“7771 ···=_ ···,,時,系統 將在第四個輸入值[1 ]輸入時視該輸入值為一簡竭。 大部份狀況中,系統可在使用者輸入第二值或第三值時 定輸入值為一全碼或簡碼。 若使用者輸入“14 ···,,,系統將判定輪入值不構 有效的中文音節(因為“bj,’等羅馬字子音不出現於中文 韻母中),並將在第二輸入值[4]時視該輸入值為一簡碼 亦即,系統此時所提供之字為簡碼”14”對應之“Beijing,, 105 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) C請先B3讀背面之注意事項再 那 簡 作 能 在 決 成 的 或 ·.— ?&amp;本頁) 訂 •線. 1282505 鼈The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the wisdom and wealth bureau, is printed by the cooperative cooperatives. It is used independently so that it does not exceed the meaning of a human being, and it is rarely used; it starts with "y", "W" or "y". The vowel "i,,, "u" or "u" is also used separately). For the full code using the repeated selection method, one of the [*], [〇], and [#] keys must be selected to match the second and third inputs of Figure 1〇1 to 1〇4. The value input - vowel' is quite useful for judging whether the input value in the simultaneous input method (previously in the Korean case of the applicant's previous documents in the previous case) constitutes an omnipotent at the beginning of the round. For example, when the user enters "693...=Shk...," in the simultaneous input method (such as FIM-style CIM) and uses the full input code as a basic input code, the system will be at the third value [3]. When entering the wheel, it is determined that the input value does not constitute "all" (the sound "k" cannot appear after "sh,"), and it is determined that the input value is a code 0 when the user inputs "112...n·, The system does not consider the input value to constitute a full code (because the input "u in Chinese" can not be regarded as "bb,,, and is regarded as "p", and the Roman letter sub-note appearing after "p"" d,, or "t, does not constitute a Chinese syllable," and will enter the value as a shortcode when the third value [2] is input. Similarly, when the user enters "7771 ···=_ ·· ·,,, when the fourth input value [1] is input, the system will treat the input value as a simplification. In most cases, the system can input the value as a full code or shortcode when the user enters the second or third value. If the user enters "14 ···,, the system will determine that the turn-in value does not constitute a valid Chinese syllable (because "bj, 'and other Roman sub-sounds do not appear in Chinese vowels), and will be in the second input value [ 4] The input value is a short code, that is, the word provided by the system at this time is the short code "14" corresponding to "Beijing,, 105 paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297) C) Please read B3 first on the back of the note. Then the simple work can be done in the final or ·.. ? &amp; this page) Order • Line. 1282505 鳖

五、發明說明() 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 •‘‘北京”予使用者。在簡碼索引中無簡碼“ 14,,或“14···,,,系 統將視該輸入值為一全碼,並將“bj”提供予使用者。 該法則對於利用母音元素之朝鮮語亦同咖圖4_」 中)。圖4-5的全輸入方法不被視作朝鮮語限制rsm。當 使用者在FIM式同時輸入法中鍵入不有效形成朝鮮語音 即12時,系統將視該輸入值為一簡碼,並將一對應該簡 碼之字或詞參照簡碼索引提供予使用者。但若經判定簡碼 索引中無對應” 12 ”之簡碼,那麼系統將視該輸八:值為— 碼,並將“nu”提供予使用者。 為使便於了解,圖5-4及10-5中顯示簡碼在簡碼 引中以字母順序分類,但存於系統中之簡碼分類則無關 要;且若為簡碼索引之搜尋所需,系統可對簡碼加以 類,並核對該輸入值是否出現於簡碼索引中。 在以短碼输入法當作基本輪入模式(SIM式cim)之 時輸入法中(假設將被搜尋之簡碼索引只包含由圖1〇] [1]至[9]鍵之音節式起始碼),系統將在輸入值“/*...,,( 二值[*]輸入後視該輸入值為一全碼,此同於圖5_4中的 鮮語例。 11· 1·2英文及其它語言 當系統辨知-以“St〜”或“sp〜,,起始之字的第四個子 時,其將該輸入值當作一簡碼;且對於一不以“st〜,,或 起始之字,其在輸入值之第三個子音出現時即將其當作p 碼。 舉例而言,當使用者在圖鍵盤上以簡單重覆選 106 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297~^^ 全 所 緊 分 同 中 第 朝 音 簡 (請先B3讀背面之注意事項再 V! 本 ί 訂· 1282505V. Description of the invention () The Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the staff of the Intellectual Property Cooperative, printed the 'Beijing' to the user. There is no short code in the shortcode index, 14, or 14···, the system will see The input value is a full code and "bj" is provided to the user. The law is also used in the Korean language using the vowel element. The full input method of Figure 4-5 is not considered a Korean restriction rsm. When the user enters the FIM-type simultaneous input method and does not effectively form the Korean voice, that is, 12, the system will regard the input value as a short code, and provide a pair of short code words or words with a short code index to the user. . However, if it is determined that there is no short code corresponding to "12" in the shortcode index, then the system will treat the input eight: the value is - code, and "nu" is provided to the user. For ease of understanding, the short codes shown in Figures 5-4 and 10-5 are sorted alphabetically in the short code, but the short code classification stored in the system is irrelevant; and if needed for the short code index search The system can classify the shortcode and check whether the input value appears in the shortcode index. In the input method using the short code input method as the basic rounding mode (SIM type cim) (assuming that the short code index to be searched only contains the syllables from Fig. 1) [1] to [9] The initial code), the system will enter the value "/*...,, (the binary value [*] input, the input value is a full code, which is the same as the fresh language example in Figure 5_4. 11·1·2 English and other languages are recognized by the system - when "St~" or "sp~, the fourth sub-word of the initial word, the input value is treated as a short code; and for a not "st~, , or the initial word, which is used as the p code when the third subtone of the input value appears. For example, when the user simply selects 106 paper sizes on the keyboard, the Chinese national standard is applied. CNS)A4 specification (210 X 297~^^ All the points are in the same direction as the middle of the first sound (please first B3 read the back of the note and then V! Ben ί · 1282505

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 、:輸入467-gms…時,系統將在第三輸入值[7]輸入後視該輸入值為一簡碼,因該輪入值違反字發音規則。若簡1索引中包含“inSU11,,之完全相關簡碼“4678255”,系統將 &amp;供者㈣應該簡碼之“install,’。若在搜尋範圍巾未發現、碼索5丨中對應“467...”之簡碼,那㈣統將再次視該輸值為王碼。當兴文限制RSM在子音母音分離鍵盤上 作為FIΜ時(所上該者、,备 — 旧这考)糸統可判定該輸入值是否違反英 一字發日規則(如無&gt;x st〜”或“sp〜’’S始、且於開始處包含 三個子音之英文字),藉以使同時輸入法之使用更有效率。 言限刹同昧給入法 〜當使用者鍵下圖W之每―鍵的第―字—次作為代表 字付並以控制處理(即當使用者使帛cpmerc)輸入生它 字符’語言限制同時输入法可加於其中,已將輸入值當作 -簡碼,以防輸入值違反上述英文字發音規則。舉例而5 ’當使用者在圖i 】中輸入第一字符當作代 表ϋ字符且以控制處理輸入其他字符,系統將視該輸入 值為-簡碼,因該輸入值違反英文字發音規則,即輸入者 為“46 7···’’之第三輸入值[7]時。同樣地,相同法則可用於英文外之語言上,其使用細 則,、以RSM作為fim之語言限制同時輸人法(lrcim)相 似。 14.3 •言限 版況之克服 田使用者輪入“scope”之完全輸入簡碼“72673”,當 —三模糊(third ambiguit, 系 (請先M讀背面之注意事 i — 項再?ft本頁) 訂·Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative,: When inputting 467-gms..., the system will input the value of the input value as a short code after inputting the third input value [7], because the round-in value violates the word pronunciation rule. If the Jane 1 index contains "inSU11, the fully related shortcode "4678255", the system will &amp; the donor (4) should be the shortcode "install,". If the short code corresponding to "467..." is not found in the search range, and the code is corresponding to "467...", then (4) will again see the value as the king code. When Xingwen restricts RSM to be used as FIΜ on the sub-tone voicing keyboard (the one on the other, the old one), the system can determine whether the input value violates the English one-day rule (if not >gt st~ "Or "sp~''S start with English characters with three consonants at the beginning), so that the simultaneous input method is more efficient.言 限 昧 昧 〜 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当 当At the same time, the input method can be added to it, and the input value has been treated as a - short code to prevent the input value from violating the above English word pronunciation rules. For example, when the user enters the first character in the figure i as the representative character and inputs other characters in the control process, the system will regard the input value as a shortcode, because the input value violates the English word pronunciation rule. That is, when the input is the third input value [7] of "46 7···''. Similarly, the same rule can be used in languages other than English, and the usage rules are used, and RSM is used as the language limit of fim. The law (lrcim) is similar. 14.3 • The limit version of the situation overcomes the field user's full input short code "72673", when - three fuzzy (third ambiguit, system (please first read the back of the note i — Item again? ft this page)

•丨線J 107 本紙張尺度適用㈣目家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297 • 1282505 A7 ^_ B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工湞費合作社印製 五、發明說明() 、、先再第一階段認定該簡碼實為一全碼,並認定該“72673 = Pampd”輸入不違英文字發音規則。因此,系統首先就認定 該輸入值為全碼,接著將該螞解譯成一簡碼,並產生,,第 三模糊發生(thirdambiguity),,,即該輸入值亦被解譯作對 應該簡碼之’’scope”。 此時,系統先提供使用者以“pampd,,。但在使用者欲 輪入“scope,,時,一特定鍵之一次鍵擊即可選擇“sc〇pe”。 若字输入在“72673”輸入之後結束(如一空格 &lt; 輸入),系統 提供予使用者以包含“pampd,,及“sc〇pe,,之表列,並令使用 者選擇該雨者之一。在此,“pampd”是由對第一值之解譯 而得,“scope”則係由對該輸入值第二次解譯作一簡碼而 得。 相同法則可用於以CPMERC作為fim之同時輪入法 中,不僅對於FIM式CIM如此,其對SIM式CIM亦為如 此,即便在輸入值於”字尾,,輸入完成時出現於簡碼索弓 亦同’不過其前提為被視為全碼之輸入值不違祖士 =限制 原則(如第三模糊發生之時);此時,系統將令使用者選 其目標字或詞(以反覆壓下一特定鍵或從一給定表列中 J甲選 擇之方式)為之。 相同法則可用於英文外的其他語言上, 工I将別是以 CPMERC輸入曰本語時)。 15·違反文語言限制之文字(文字字串)簡碼的取出與 解譯 、 一客戶端或一伺服端可對一輸入值(全碼或簡碼皆然) 108 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再 · ^^ · 11 本頁) -·!* _ .•t 1282505 ν• 丨 line J 107 This paper scale applies (4) Head standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 • 1282505 A7 ^_ B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee levy cooperative printing 5, invention description (), first again In the first stage, the short code is considered to be a full code, and it is determined that the "72673 = Pampd" input does not violate the English word pronunciation rule. Therefore, the system first determines that the input value is a full code, and then translates the pea solution into a short code. And generate, third ambiguity (thirdambiguity), that is, the input value is also interpreted as the ''scope' corresponding to the shortcode. At this point, the system first provides the user with "pampd," but in use If you want to turn "scope", you can select "sc〇pe" with a single keystroke. If the word input ends after "72673" input (such as a space &lt; input), the system provides the user with Contains "pampd,, and "sc〇pe," and allows the user to select one of the rainers. Here, "pampd" is derived from the interpretation of the first value, and "scope" is From the second interpretation of the input value as a shortcode. The rule can be used in the simultaneous rounding method with CPMERC as the fim, not only for the FIM-style CIM, but also for the SIM-type CIM, even if the input value is at the end of the word, the input appears when the input is completed. Same as 'but the premise is that the input value regarded as full code does not violate the principle of the ancestor = limit (such as when the third ambiguity occurs); at this time, the system will let the user select the target word or word (to reverse the next The specific key or the way to choose from a given list of J.) The same rule can be used in other languages other than English, and I will not use CPMERC to input the corpus. 15.·Remove and interpret the text (text string) short code that violates the language restriction, one input value (one code or short code) for one client or one server. 108 This paper scale applies to Chinese national standards. (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the back of the note first · ^^ · 11 pages) -·!* _ .•t 1282505 ν

•進行解譯,圖ll_i及n-2顯示者即分別為客戶端〆 端所為之解譯說明,因此,,系統,,一詞所指為客戶j伺服 或伺服端系統之一者。當輸入值為一簡碼、 二、先 f請先¾讀背面之注意事項再«窝本頁) 儿各戶端系餘 將該輸入值解譯並送出對應該簡碼之字或詞至伺服二、、、 統時,词服端系統便以該文字提供予使用者。同樣地卞系 便再輸入值送至伺服端系統作為一數值、且服即 _ 服味糸統董子 該數值進行解譯時,伺服端系統仍會對簡碼解譯,並潢• Interpretation, Figure ll_i and n-2 are the explanations for the client terminal respectively. Therefore, the system, the term refers to one of the client j servo or server system. When the input value is a short code, second, first f, please read the back of the 3⁄4 and then read the back of the page. The household account will interpret the input value and send the word or word corresponding to the short code to the servo. Second, the system, the word service system will be provided to the user in this text. In the same way, the input value is sent to the servo system as a value, and the service is _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

提供多種不同服務。客戶端系統送出一 DTMF音认枸BP • 曰、、、σ和】服蠕 系統、而飼.服端系統使用該經傳送輸入值亦為客戶端送出 一數值予伺服器端之例。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 當一輪入值在語言限同時輸入方法中違反語言限制規 則(即輸入值不構成一特定語言之有效音節),系統將視輪 入值為一簡碼,且簡碼索引不可包含對應該輸入值之簡 碼’此時’糸統將視再度該輸入值為一全碼。舉例而言, 當使用者鍵入‘‘7799,,以在圖4-5中輸入“哲令3斗,、但客戶 端系統之簡碼索弓丨不儲存“7799,,或對應“7799,,之 “哲令否^^卜,此時該系統簡將該輸入當作“人入灭X”。舉例而 言,當客戶端送出輸入值“7799”或其對應之“哲令3冲,至 股票資訊系統之伺服端時,股票資訊伺服端毫無問題得到 “7799”(假設股票資訊伺服端儲存簡碼“7799”及其對應字 冲”)。但,當客戶端將該輸入值“7799”視作一簡 碼、且該客戶端系統之簡碼索引不包含“7799”時,客戶端 系統接著視該輸入值為一全碼,並送出文字“入入入入’’予該 伺服端。此時,儲存資訊伺服端不能使用該文字。 109 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1282505 A7 i __— _ B7 五、發明說明() 若客戶端送出之文字“入人灭;C,為無意義值,那麼股票 資訊伺服端將從輸入“AAX入,,所鍵入之碼中取出“7799”, 並搜尋對應字“哲名3斗,及使用該搜尋得字。另一種方法只 可為朝鮮語中音節式起始碼當作簡碼時用,此時系統搜尋 與字“入入入(在音節之第一子音中簡碼對應考)相符之 “哲令3斗,,以提供其將提供之服務。“哲增荀外,之音節式起 始碼亦為“7799,,;此時,“7799”被解譯作“哲名否斗,,因 此糸統搜尋音節第一子音為“从’’(屬‘‘A,,者)及“鐵,,或“太” (屬“π”者)之字或詞,並亦搜尋與‘‘哲,荀外,之音節第一子 音袓同之字或詞;亦即,系統搜尋之字或詞為音節第一子 音同於與“人”同屬一鍵之字符者(此時送氣子音及緊子音 實際上係由一基本子音鍵所負責)。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 同樣法則亦可用PC環境的鍵盤而非僅止於小鍵盤 上。在以現存PC當作客戶系統之股票資訊系統中,使用 者必須輸入“哲名2斗,以搜尋“哲名?]又卜,之股價。當使用者 輸入“入入入X”、並將該輸入值送至伺服端時,股價資訊伺 服端系統認定“入入入入,,不存在於公司股價列表上,其利用 上述兩種方法提供服務(一種方法為取出“77 99,,,並送出 “哲嚆2冲,;另一方法為搜尋與“入入灭灭,,之音節第一子音相 同之“哲召2冲,)。 在另一種方法中,伺服端索引儲存“入人入灭(對應該簡 碼之字符)’,及“7799 (簡碼),,與‘‘哲令34 (對應該簡碼之 字)”’並從客戶端處判定輸入值‘‘入入入;S;,,不構成有效的 朝鮮語音節,接著則比較輪入值與簡碼對應之儲存中字 110 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210x297公釐) Ϊ282505A variety of different services are available. The client system sends a DTMF tone 枸 BP • 曰, , σ, and 服 服 、 system, and the feed system uses the transmitted input value to also send a value to the server for the client. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Office, the employee consumption cooperative, prints a round-off value in the language limit simultaneous input method that violates the language restriction rule (that is, the input value does not constitute a valid syllable for a specific language), the system will regard the round-in value as a short code. And the short code index cannot contain the short code corresponding to the input value 'this time' will regard the input value as a full code again. For example, when the user types ''7799', enter "Zhe Ling 3 bucket" in Figure 4-5, but the client system's shortcode does not store "7799, or corresponds to "7799," "The philosophical order is no ^^ Bu, at this time the system simply refers to the input as "people into the X". For example, when the client sends the input value "7799" or its corresponding "Zhe Ling 3 rush, to the server of the stock information system, the stock information server has no problem to get "7799" (assuming the stock information server storage Shortcode "7799" and its corresponding word "". However, when the client regards the input value "7799" as a short code and the short code index of the client system does not include "7799", the client system then regards the input value as a full code and sends the text. “Enter” into the server. At this time, the text server cannot use the text. 109 The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1282505 A7 i __— _ B7 V. Invention Description () If the text sent by the client is “into the person; if C is a meaningless value, then the stock information server will input “AAX” from the input, enter the “7799”, and search for Corresponding to the word "Zhe name 3 buckets, and use the search for words. The other method can only be used as a shortcode for the Korean syllable start code. At this time, the system searches for the "Zhe Ling 3" which matches the word "into the input (in the first sub-sound of the syllable). Fight, to provide the services it will provide. "Zhe Zengqi, the syllable start code is also "7799,,; at this time, "7799" was interpreted as "Zhe name no fight, so the first sub-sound of the syllable search for "from" ( It is a word or word of ''A,') and "Iron," or "Tai" (of "π"), and also searches for the same word with the first syllable of "Zhe, 荀, 荀, or Word; that is, the word or word searched by the system is the first sub-sound of the syllable is the same as the one with the same name as the "person" (the aspirating sub-tone and the tight-sounding tone are actually handled by a basic sub-key). The Ministry of Intellectual Property's employee consumption cooperatives can print the same rules using the keyboard of the PC environment instead of just the keypad. In the stock information system that uses the existing PC as the client system, the user must enter "Zhe name 2 bucket, In order to search for the stock price of "Zhe name?", when the user inputs "into X" and sends the input value to the server, the stock information server system determines that "into," does not exist. On the company's stock price list, it uses the above two methods to provide services (a method is to take ",,, 7799 and sends" Zhe Hao punch 2,; Another method is to search and "off off ,, into the first consonant of the syllable with the same" red Zhe Zhao 2,). In another method, the server index stores "input and extinction (corresponding to short code characters)", and "7799 (simplified code), and ''zhouting 34 (corresponding to the shorthand word)" And from the client side to determine the input value ''into the entry; S;,, does not constitute a valid Korean vocabulary, then compare the rounding value with the short code corresponding to the stored word 110 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210x297 mm) Ϊ282505

五、發明說明( 符。耩此’系統得知ϋ苎冲,為使用者意欲輸入者。 上述内容可配合U-3進行研讀,其中(A)、(Β)或(c) 為選擇性使用者。 使用現存PC之客戶端經由一鍵盤等(如使用PC之 WORD編輯器)輸入字符時,音節式起始碼甩以輪入音節 第子 ' 客戶或飼服端系統則將該音節式起始碼轉換 成一目標字’以使字符可快速輸入,或使輸入該等字符得 於夕種不同 &gt; 訊系統中。舉例而言,當使用者輸入 非“制時,系統搜尋索引並將“哲韻冲,提 供予使用者,其中該“發^冲,為以“ΑΑχ灭”為音節第一子 音者。上述之另一種方法(取出一特定鍵盤上輸入值之 簡碼、搜尋簡碼索引、並儲存索引中簡碼對應之字符。請 參閱圖U_5,其中(Α)、(Β)或(C)為選擇性使用者。 目前已介紹過一種對常用字或詞加以註冊並簡單以特 定功能鍵或數字鍵輸入之方式,其不需理會字與詞之連 接。舉例而言,“哲令否斗,被儲存為一常用字,並以“ait+、” 輸入之。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 同樣地 四通集團(sat〇ngjipdan·•本案申請人對中文 發音並不了解’其係利用其朝鮮字發音加以羅馬拼音成),, 之音節式起始碼為“6242”,其對應於“s、t、.』及d”。當 使用者鍵入“6242” ,且“6242”及“四通集團 (satongjipdan)”不存於客戶端系統中,因此客戶端系統將 提供“sdjd”予使用纟。當使用者送出“,,,至伺服端時, 伺服端將不視“sdjd”得構成有效中文音節,其將於“sdjd,, 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) A7 1282505 五、發明說明() •中取出“6242”,並搜尋對應於該簡碼(在本例中為‘‘四通集 團’’之音節式起始碼)“6242,,(假設伺服端系統儲存簡碼及 對應於該簡碼之字或詞)。 如朝鮮語中系統搜尋一與“入入入入,,第—子音相同之字 •及與其共用子音之字一般’系統提供使用者以一同於 “sdjd”之第一子音之字及其它各種不同子音組合n(如 “xdjd”、“Stjt”、“sdjt”等十六種組合)(圖 1〇_2)。. 對應於簡碼之字符組“Sdjd”被存於伺服端系統中,且 客戶端送出之“Sdjd”不能構成有效中文音節.〆因此系統對 輸入值與對應索引中簡碼對應字符加以比較,並了解使用 係欲輸入“四通集團,,。 上述内容對應於圖U-4之說明,其中(A)、(B)或(c) 為選擇性使用者。 PC等資訊通訊裝置亦搜尋羅馬拼音中一音節第一子 音與使用者輸入之“Stjd”相同的字(“四通集圏提供該 字予使用者。此外,系統亦可於使用者輪入“stjd”時,系 統(即PC)將該簡碼(對應於簡碼之字符)註冊為猶立音節 “stjd”之第一子音;該系統並在使用者輪入第二子音時將 該輸入值視作一簡碼(假設使用者所為者為短碼輸入),因 為該輸入值違反中文語言限制規則f Φ · 况只U出現Sh、Ch或Zh外之 二羅馬字符子音)。簡碼(如6 2 4 2)之ό i/v 』炙自輪入值“stjd”的取V. Invention Description ( .耩The system knows the flood, and the user intends to input. The above content can be studied in conjunction with U-3, where (A), (Β) or (c) is optional. When using a client of an existing PC to input characters via a keyboard or the like (such as using a WORD editor of a PC), the syllable start code 甩 is to enter the syllable first child's customer or the feeding system to the syllable The initial code is converted into a target word 'so that the characters can be input quickly, or the input of the characters can be different in the system. For example, when the user inputs a non-"system, the system searches for an index and will" Zhe Yunchong, provided to the user, wherein the "fat" is the first consonant of the syllable with "annihilation". The other method mentioned above (take out the short code of the input value on a specific keyboard, search for the short code index And store the characters corresponding to the shortcode in the index. See Figure U_5, where (Α), (Β) or (C) is a selective user. A method for registering common words or words and simply specifying them has been introduced. The way the function keys or numeric keys are entered, There is no need to pay attention to the connection between words and words. For example, “the slogan is not a fight, it is stored as a common word, and it is entered as “ait+,”. The Ministry of Economic Affairs’ Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative prints the same Stone Group. (sat〇ngjipdan·• The applicant in this case does not understand Chinese pronunciation [the system uses its Korean pronunciation to make Roman Pinyin), and the syllable starting code is “6242”, which corresponds to “s, t,. 』and d". When the user types "6242" and "6242" and "sutongjipdan" are not stored in the client system, the client system will provide "sdjd" to the user. When the user Send ",,, to the servo terminal, the servo will not regard "sdjd" to constitute a valid Chinese syllable, which will be "sdjd,, this paper scale applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) A7 1282505 V. Invention description () • Take out "6242" and search for the short code (in this case, the syllable start code of ''Tetra Group'') "6242,, (assuming the server The system stores the short code and corresponds to the simple The word or word). For example, in the Korean language, the system searches for the first consonant of the "sdjd" together with the word "into the entry, the same word as the first consonant, and the word that shares the consonant." The word and other various consonant combinations n (such as "xdjd", "Stjt", "sdjt", etc.) (Figure 1〇_2). The character group "Sdjd" corresponding to the shortcode is stored in In the server system, the "Sdjd" sent by the client cannot constitute a valid Chinese syllable. Therefore, the system compares the input value with the corresponding character of the short code in the corresponding index, and understands that the user wants to input "Stone Group," The content corresponds to the description of Figure U-4, where (A), (B) or (c) is a selective user. The information communication device such as PC also searches for the first sub-sound of a syllable in Roman Pinyin and the same word as the user input "Stjd" ("The four-way set provides the word to the user. In addition, the system can also be rotated by the user" When stjd", the system (ie PC) registers the short code (corresponding to the character of the short code) as the first consonant of the syllable "stjd"; the system also inputs the input value when the user turns in the second consonant It is regarded as a short code (assuming that the user is a short code input), because the input value violates the Chinese language restriction rule f Φ · Only U appears as a second Roman character sub sound outside Sh, Ch or Zh. 6 2 4 2) ό i/v 』 炙 from the wheel value "stjd"

出得利用一談判鍵盤為之(如圖1 〇 _ 2於-A 口 2所不者)。在圖n_6 中,(A)、(B)或(C)為選擇性使用者。 上述相同法則亦可用於任何t /、匕修改過之字符組上 112 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) &lt;請先間讀背面之注意事 — ·«— 項再本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 A7 五、發明說明( ·(螢幕上可有多種不同字符 盤上。 ’亦可用於PC鍵盤或小鍵 &lt;請先Μ讀背面之注意事項再本頁) 16·不使用g節式起始碼輸入中簡碼之同時輪入法 ★在以音節式起始碼作為上述方法中簡碼時,對簡碼及 第-各獨立日即子音間的比較可有效用於客戶端無簡碼 索引(如6242 、“sat〇ngjipdan,,及“四通集團,,)、但有特定 字或詞之索引(如“satongjipdan,,及“四通集團,,〉之例中。舉 例而言,f用者選擇“ 62··.,,之第二鍵[2]時,系,、統將認文 該輸入值迷反中文語言限制規則,並將搜尋一索.弓丨值各獨 立音節中第一子音同於輪入值“ 62 =sd…、st 、xd 、xt 之字(可就權宜簡稱作“存在之字母組合,,)。當按鍵之鍵擊 數目增加時,存在之字母組合數亦增加,其中後者係用於 索引中自知比較與搜尋,此可參閱圖1]L_7而暸解之。 •線, 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 同樣地,假設客戶端不具有簡碼索引(如“7799,,及 “哲令否冲’),但具有特定字或詞之索引值(如“哲暫思冲,),且 使用者鍵入“77…”以輸入“哲名芒$卜。此時,當使用者選 擇第二鍵[7]時,系統將認定該輸入值違反朝鮮語語言規 則,並將搜尋一索引值之獨立音節第一子音同於輸入值 “77〜=人人〜、入从〜、从入..、从从。〜之字(其可就權宜稱 作”存在字母組合”)。,此可參閱圖丨丨_ 8之配合說明。 當未有任何同於索引中輸輸值時,系統-將視該輸入值 為一全碼’並將之提供出來;此種方式與在具字索引(非 簡碼索引)系統上使用同時輪入法有相同的效果,不過限 於使用者輸入音節式起始碼之時。此外,此種方式亦同於 113 本紙免尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(210 297公餐 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() ‘系統對輸入值是否違反FIM式同時輸入法、或FIM式語 。限制同時輸入法中全碼發音規則之辨認過程,但不同於 輸入值對應字或詞之搜尋過程;亦即,當系統辨知輸入值 違反王碼發音規則或語言限制時,系統將視該輸入值為非 王碼’並為使用者解譯(或搜尋)一對應該輸入值之字,但 此為輸入值係音節式起始碼時之結果。 系統得自動辨知輸入值違反全碼發音規則或語言限 制、並將輸入值視做一簡碼(即梘使用者使用短碼輸入而 非全碼輸入)堪為同時輪入法之一大重點,因此其為上述 同時輸入法之一應變使用,即其在特定例中(如使用音節 式起始碼時)搜尋對應於輸入值之字的步驟為上述同時輪 入法之一變體。 H功能之選擇 空格是字(詞)之輸入的一重要功能,刪除功能亦同。 確定輸入功能可在一輸入後一定時間中自動完成,何確定 輸=,功能通常也是很重要的。該三功能並稱為,,三大基本 功能”。此外’大小寫轉換功能對於具大寫字母之語言而 言是有必要的,如英文等語言。至於上、下、左及:移 動功能’左右游標移動功能可分別由刪除及空^功能代用 之,而上下功能並不那麼重要。 輸入-字或詞時,各不同功能按所需需.序列出之例說 明如下’該等例僅供參考’其實得按不同需要加以變更。 舉例而言,英文與中文間轉換對於在英文小鍵盤上輸入中 文字是相當重要的;在華裔區域(如韓文及日文中文 114 本纸張尺度適财關家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱1 (請先13讀背®·之注意事項一 - I I 再^^本頁)It can be used to use a negotiation keyboard (as shown in Figure 1 〇 _ 2 in -A 2). In Figure n_6, (A), (B) or (C) is a selective user. The same rules as above can also be applied to any t/, 匕 modified character group. 112 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x 297 mm) &lt;Please read the back note first - «- Item again page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printed 1225025 A7 V. Invention description ( · (The screen can have a variety of different characters on the disk. 'Can also be used for PC keyboard or small keys &lt; Note on the back side of this page) 16) Do not use the g-style start code to input the short code while the rounding method ★ When using the syllable start code as the short code in the above method, the short code and the first - The comparison between the independent days and the consonants can be effectively used for the client without a short code index (such as 6242, "sat〇ngjipdan," and "Tetong Group,"), but with a specific word or word index (such as "satongjipdan," For example, in the case of "Stone Group,", for example, when the user selects "62··.,, the second key [2], the system will recognize the input value and confuse the Chinese. Language restriction rules, and will search for the first subtone in each independent syllable The value of "62 = sd..., st, xd, xt (which may be referred to as "the combination of letters,") is added. When the number of keystrokes of the button increases, the number of letters combined increases. It is used for self-knowledge comparison and search in the index, which can be understood by referring to Figure 1] L_7. • Line, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, employee consumption cooperative, printing the same, assuming that the client does not have a shortcode index (such as "7799" , and "the slogan is not rushing"), but with the index value of a specific word or word (such as "Zhe temptation", and the user type "77..." to enter "Zhe Ming Mang Bu. At this time, When the user selects the second key [7], the system will determine that the input value violates the Korean language rule, and will search for an index value of the independent syllable first sub-sound with the input value "77~=人人~,入从~, from the input.., from the slave. ~ word (which can be called "existence of letter combinations"). This can be seen in Figure _ 8 with the description. When there is no same as the index in the input Value, the system - will regard the input value as a full code ' and provide it; The method has the same effect as using the simultaneous rounding method on a system with a word index (non-simplified index), but is limited to the time when the user inputs the syllable start code. In addition, this method is also the same as the 113 paper-free scale. China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 297 public meal 1225055 A7 B7 V. Invention description () 'The system does not violate the FIM-style simultaneous input method or FIM language for the input value. Limit the full-code pronunciation rule in the simultaneous input method The process of identification, but different from the search process of the word or word corresponding to the input value; that is, when the system recognizes that the input value violates the king code pronunciation rule or language restriction, the system will regard the input value as non-king code' and use The person interprets (or searches for) a pair of words that should be entered, but this is the result of the input value being the syllable start code. The system automatically recognizes that the input value violates the full-code pronunciation rule or language restriction, and treats the input value as a short code (ie, the user uses short code input instead of full code input), which is one of the key points of the simultaneous rounding method. Therefore, it is used for one of the above simultaneous input methods, that is, the step of searching for a word corresponding to the input value in a specific example (such as when a syllable start code is used) is a variant of the above-described simultaneous rounding method. Selection of H function Space is an important function of the input of words (words), and the deletion function is also the same. Determining the input function can be done automatically in a certain period of time after input. If you decide to lose =, the function is usually very important. The three functions are called, three basic functions. In addition, the 'case conversion function is necessary for languages with uppercase letters, such as English. As for the upper, lower, left and: mobile functions' The cursor movement function can be replaced by the delete and empty function respectively, and the up and down functions are not so important. When inputting - word or word, each function is required as required. The sequence example is as follows: 'These examples are for reference only. 'In fact, it has to be changed according to different needs. For example, the conversion between English and Chinese is very important for inputting Chinese characters on the English keypad; in the Chinese region (such as Korean and Japanese Chinese 114 paper scales Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love 1 (please read 13 first read back · · Note 1 - II then ^^ this page)

Is · 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 工 消 費 合 作 社 印 1282505 A7 ^_____ B7 五、發明說明() •轉換也有其相當之必要性。 1·空格-輸入—刪除—小寫/大寫轉換—母語/數字/英文 模式轉換-上/下/左/右移動; 2·空格-刪除一輸入一母語/數字/英文模式轉換—小寫/ 大寫轉換-上/下/左/右移動; 3·空格-輸入—刪除—中文轉換—母語/數字/英文模式轉 換-上/下/左/右移動;及 4·.中文轉換—空格,輸入_英文與數字模式轉換一移動 11_.丄,控制處理方為之功能微坪 刖文已述及以控制處理方式處理字符及各式符號之輸 入’其亦可用於各不同功能之選擇上。圖12-1為以數字 鍵負責各種不同功能及,,功能控制,,例之說明圖,其中各數 字鍵與功能間之對應設定以使使用者得輕易記下為原 則。在圖12-1中,左/右./上/下方向鍵得由直覺而輕易獲 知,輸入鍵則位於小鍵盤中央處,因此使用者得輕易被提 醒以數字及功能間的對應關係。此外,其它必用功能亦使 之與功能名稱相關鍵相關,用以使使用者得輕易受提醒。 在圖12-1中,平移功能與[7]鍵相關,[7]鍵又為“s,,所用。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在圖1 2-1中,假設送氣子音控制及緊子音控制利用 [*]鍵之鍵擊次數進行選擇(如先前文獻該韓文之輸入方 式),接著功能控制以鍵擊[*]鍵選擇,該輸入原則便為“輸 入 + + 。若[5]鍵鍵擊一次所 選得者不包含送氣子音/緊子音,那麼功能需待跳躍控制 處理法鍵入[5] + [*]鍵後方獲選得。 115 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1282505 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明() 各按鍵所對應的功能可標記於數字鍵上,亦可不標於 其上。刖文已述及與符號類相關之數字鍵得標於LCD螢 幕上而不祆於對應數字鍵上,如此得使標示簡單,並使 使用簡便;此作法同樣可用 _ 広N保J用於功能之標不上。請參閱圖 1 2-2,使甩者得重新設定功能與數字鍵間的對應關係,此 與前文所提之符號輸入一節相同。 右[*]或[#]鍵不如在英文輸入例中用於當作另一控制 鍵,那麼“功能控制,,係以鍵擊[*] 一次之方式為之。故而, 圖12 1中的功忐可以鍵擊功能對應之數字鍵一此及[*]鍵 選擇之。 II.·2 ’維控制處ϋ:為之功能選擇(使用搀毅鍵 义交叉组会、 一字符之輸入使用一控制键的方法稱為“一雉控制處 理”。當同一控制鍵重覆使用時,一維控制處理方式仍得 使用之。 當[*]及[#]鍵用作控制鍵、且以一維控制處理方式用於 子付及不同付號之輸入時,各不同功能可利用控制鍵之交 又組合使用而選擇之(其中控制鍵即+ 或。 當控制鍵不重覆使用時,功能得以控制鍵之組合選擇之, 如[*] + [*]或[#] + [#;]等。‘‘[*] + [#],,之輸入得構成一自左至右 之形狀’其亦可作為右游標功能(或空格功能),以輕易提 SM吏用者以功能之選擇方式。但若使用構成從右至左之 [#] + [*]鍵時,其可作為左游標功能(或刪除功能),以輕易 提醒使用者以功能輸入方式。 116 本纸h:尺度適用中國國豕標準(CNS)A4規格(2忉X 2犯公釐) (請先SI讀背面之注意事項再¾寫本頁) 士 ;線」 經濟部智慧財產局員工诮費合作社印製 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 上述觀念得由多維控制處理方式之觀點獲致了解。舉 例而言’若該控制係當於代表性字符輸入之後選擇,那麼 當使用者意欲輸入“Aa = a+[*],,及‘‘a+[*] + [#],,時,系統即在 使用者輸入“a+[*]’’時辨知輸入值為“、,,。[#〗鍵不能出現 •在後績階段中(即便當⑷鍵被用作為另一控制鍵時亦 同)’且系統在使甩者輪入[#]時即辨知‘‘[*] + [#],,之輸入為 右移動功能之選擇。此相同法則亦可用於控制當於代表性 字符出現之前選擇之場合中。 再就日文而言,其以二維控制處理方式處理之。此時, 功能係以二或多次之控制鍵鍵擊的不同組合啟用之。舉例 而言,輸入方式為 空格=[*] + [#] + [*],,及“刪除 -[#] + [*] + [#]。在使用空格功能時,鍵下[*] + [#] + [*]的選 擇方式產生一右箭頭影像,並得輕易提醒使用者以空格功 能之使用,同樣地,[#] + [*] + [#]之選擇方式產生一左箭頭 影像, 並輕易提醒使用者以刪除功能之使用,其理肴已列 經 濟 部 智 慧 財 .產 局 員 消 費 合 作 社 印 製 於上述Is · Ministry of Economic Affairs Zhihui Finance. Production Bureau Staff and Consumers Cooperatives Society Print 1282505 A7 ^_____ B7 V. Invention Description () • Conversion is also quite necessary. 1. Space-input-delete-lowercase/capital conversion—native/digital/English mode conversion-up/down/left/right movement; 2·space-delete one input one native/digital/English mode conversion—lowercase/capital conversion -Up/Down/Left/Right movement; 3.Space-input-delete-Chinese conversion-native/digital/English mode conversion-up/down/left/right movement; and 4·. Chinese conversion-space, input_English The conversion with the digital mode is a function of the various functions. The function of the control processor is that the input of characters and symbols is controlled in a controlled manner. Figure 12-1 shows the various functions and functions, control functions, and examples. The corresponding settings between each digital key and function are used to make it easy for the user to record it as a principle. In Figure 12-1, the left/right/up/down direction keys are easily and intuitively known, and the input keys are located at the center of the keypad, so the user can easily be reminded of the correspondence between numbers and functions. In addition, other required functions are also associated with the function name related keys to make the user easily reminded. In Figure 12-1, the translation function is related to the [7] key, and the [7] key is again “s,, used. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative is printed in Figure 1 2-1, assuming the air supply sub-tone control. The tight sound control is selected by the number of keystrokes of the [*] key (such as the Korean input method in the previous document), and then the function control is selected by the keystroke [*] key, and the input principle is "input + +." If the [5] keystroke is selected, the selected one does not contain the aspirating sub-tone/tight sub-tone, then the function needs to be selected after the jump control method is entered by typing [5] + [*]. 115 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) 1282505 Α7 Β7 5. Invention description () The functions corresponding to each button can be marked on the numeric keys or not marked on them. It has been mentioned that the number keys associated with the symbol class are marked on the LCD screen and are not tied to the corresponding numeric keys, so that the labeling is simple and easy to use; this method can also be used for _ 広N guarantee J for function The standard is not up. Please refer to Figure 1 2-2 for the latter to reset the function and the corresponding relationship between the numeric keys, which is the same as the symbol input section mentioned above. The right [*] or [#] key is not used as another control key in the English input example, then “function control, which is done by keystroke [*] once. Therefore, in Figure 12 1 The function can be selected by the number key corresponding to the keystroke function and the [*] key. II.·2 'Dimensional control position: for the function selection (use the 搀 键 key meaning cross group, one character input use one The method of controlling the keys is called “one-click control processing.” When the same control key is used repeatedly, the one-dimensional control processing method still needs to be used. When the [*] and [#] keys are used as control keys, and one-dimensional When the control processing mode is used for inputting sub-payments and different payment numbers, different functions can be selected by using the control keys and combining them (the control keys are + or . When the control keys are not used repeatedly, the functions can be controlled. The combination of keys is selected, such as [*] + [*] or [#] + [#;], etc. ''[*] + [#], the input forms a shape from left to right' Can be used as a right cursor function (or space function) to easily mention the user's choice of function, but if you use the composition from right to left [#] + When the [*] button is used, it can be used as the left cursor function (or delete function) to easily remind the user to input the function. 116 Paper h: The scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2忉X 2 commits () Please read the back of the SI first and then write this page) 士;线" Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau staff fee cooperative cooperative printing 1225025 A7 B7 V. Invention description () The above concept is handled by multi-dimensional control The viewpoint is known. For example, if the control is selected after the representative character input, then when the user intends to input "Aa = a+[*], and ''a+[*] + [#], When the user inputs "a+[*]'', the input value is ",,,. The [#] key cannot appear. • In the post-performance phase (even when the (4) key is used as another control key. It is also the same as 'and the system recognizes ''[*] + [#] when the player turns in [#], and the input is the choice of the right movement function. This same rule can also be used to control the representative. In the case where the character is selected before the appearance of the character. In Japanese, it is handled by the two-dimensional control method. At this point, the function is enabled with different combinations of two or more control keystrokes. For example, the input method is space = [*] + [#] + [*], and "delete - [#] + [*] + [#]. When using the space function, the selection of [*] + [#] + [*] under the key produces a right arrow image, and it is easy to remind the user to use the space function. The choice of [#] + [*] + [#] produces a left arrow image, and easily reminds the user to use the delete function. The food has been listed in the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Above

擊得使各不同功能受到選擇。 18·中文轉換Hit to make different functions are selected. 18·Chinese conversion

本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297^57This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297^57

五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505 •禮意、禮儀、銳意等)。 在中文中,對應於“beiHnff,,+丄 elJlng之中文字包含北京、背景 等,因此“中文連續牢,,椋丨v 士士 ’、 中文切換鍵的多次鍵擊為之 (如北厅、(第二)、背景(第二、笪、斑 (弟一 )4)舉例而言,在輸入“beijing,, 後,對中文切換鍵的—:欠鍵擊可選擇“北京”,接著中文切 定表列中選擇中文字符。 在中文中,一索引必須儲存所有將輸人之中 宜稱作“目標中文字,,)。因此,由系統確認之目標中文字 可提供予使用者,即便在中文的羅馬拼音輸入進行當中亦 同。舉例而言,除“北京,,外無其它字為以“beij ·,,為首者, 那麼系統便在“beij…,,時將“北京,,一詞提供予使用者。 在日文中,平假名及片假名間存在一對一關係,且平 假名或片假名與中文字間.存在一對多關係。如前文所述, 在平假名輪入後選擇片假名轉換控制(如圖2-1中的‘‘/,,控 制)可將平假名模式轉換為片假名模式。在圖2-1中,一 帶詞總字符以交叉控制處理法輸入之,‘‘/,,控制則以[〇] 鍵的兩次輸入選擇之 '平假名或片假名對應之中文字得以 [0]鍵的多次鍵擊選擇之。舉例而言,若“/,,控制設定為代 表性字符之後選擇之,一平假名字或詞輸入後的[〇] + [〇] 輸入可將輸入轉換為該輸入對應之片假名,[〇]鍵的再一 次鍵擊得將片假名轉換為中文字。相反地,若在片假名模 式中輸入片假名後輸入[0] + [0],那麼片假名被轉換成其對 應之平假名;[0]鍵的又再一次鍵擊得將該平假名轉換成 118 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公釐) (請先¾讀背面之注意事 ·丨丨 項再Sr本頁)V. Description of the invention (Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Staff Consumer Cooperatives 1282505 • Courtesy, etiquette, determination, etc.). In Chinese, corresponding to "beiHnff,, +丄elJlng Chinese characters include Beijing, background, etc., so "Chinese continuous prison, 椋丨v 士士', Chinese switch key multiple keystrokes (such as the North Hall) , (second), background (second, 笪, 斑 (弟一) 4) For example, after entering "beijing,,, for the Chinese switch button -: under the keystroke, you can select "Beijing", then Chinese Select Chinese characters in the table. In Chinese, an index must be stored in all the input will be called "target Chinese characters,". Therefore, the target Chinese text confirmed by the system can be provided to the user, even if the Chinese Pinyin input is in progress. For example, except for "Beijing, there is no other word for "beij ·,, as the first one, then the system will be "beij...," and the word "Beijing" will be provided to the user. In Japanese, there is a one-to-one relationship between hiragana and katakana, and there is a one-to-many relationship between hiragana or katakana and Chinese characters. As described above, the katakana conversion control (such as ‘‘,, control) in Fig. 2-1 can be used to convert the hiragana mode to the katakana mode after the hiragana rounding. In Figure 2-1, the total character of a word is input by the cross-control processing method, and the ''/, control is selected by the two input of the [〇] key. The hiragana or katakana corresponds to the middle text. ] Multiple keystrokes of the key are selected. For example, if "/," is selected after the control is set to a representative character, the [〇] + [〇] input after a flat name or word input can convert the input to the katakana corresponding to the input, [〇] The keystroke of the key again converts the katakana to Chinese characters. Conversely, if you enter [0] + [0] after entering the katakana in katakana mode, the katakana is converted into its corresponding hiragana; The 0] key again hits the hiragana into 118 paper sizes for the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 297 297 mm) (please read the back note) Sr this page)

A 1282505 ♦A 1282505 ♦

•中文字。 發明蛛』^ 本發明能夠有效在小鍵盤上輸入字符;更具體而言, 本發明能透過使用控制處理方法來輪入各種符號,從而維 持小鍵盤的簡單佈扃。 /而且本發明使用分配給按鍵的字符和數字之間的關 ''麥提供種簡碼’使用簡碼實現快捷輸入方法,以及使 用同時輸八方法以較少的擊鍵次數來輸入目標字或詞。 利用用來解释簡碼的交換伺服器,甚至當第三飼服器 需要字而非簡碼時,使用者也可以輸入簡碼,交換伺服器 解釋由使用者輸入的簡碼,並將與簡碼相對應的字或詞發 运到第三伺服器,它並不存儲簡碼和與該簡碼行對應的字 或詞。 明 說 單 簡 式 圖 例其 範 ’ 的·例 盤範 j ^ilr 基鍵β 文續餘 英連其 係係 1 2 符 龜 I 1 1 《予 圖圖表 代 為 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製· 匕曰 符 字 的 央 中( 於符 位字 中續 il 為 定 定 例 範 的 盤 鐽 本 基 S文 1-英 圖之 \7 上 #e 為 類 歸 符 字 個 四 或 三 當 例 範 的 盤 建 續 ii 文 伯 係為&amp; 2 4 拉 2 2 阿 ~ ~ 為 13 1 - -2 2 3 圖圖圖 曰 例 為 文 英 以 按 於 置 配 並 /IV 時 法 方 。 理 例處 範制 的控 盤用 鍵使 續重 連多 文維 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明() 圖3-2為使用兩個阿拉伯文控制按鍵的連續鍵盤範 例 圖3-3為位於中央的字符指定為代表字符而其餘字符 才曰疋為連續子付之連續鍵盤範例(以阿拉伯文為例)。 圖4-1〜4-3為基本子音與基本母音都歸類為一群組 (並配置於按鍵上)之範例。 圖4 - 4係在一對子音與母音歸類為一群組時表示重複 選擇方法過程的流程圖範例。 圖4-5〜4-8為利用韓文母音之鍵盤範例。 圖5 -1為利用拼音索引輸入中文字符的拉例。 圖5-2為利用完全相關簡碼輸入英文字或詞的範何。 圖5-3〜5-4係將輪入值識別及處理為同時輸入法中 之間碼的範例。 圖5-5為經由客戶及伺服器之完全輸入法的範例。 圖5-6為將索引中字或詞作歸類的範例。 圖6-1為第一伺服器(即切換伺服器)解釋由客戶傳來 之簡碼,並將該簡碼解釋所得資訊傳至使用該資訊之第二 伺服器。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖7-1〜7-2係藉控制處理方法輸入各種特定字符之 連續鍵盤範例。 圖8 -1為可將功能按鍵容納於3 x 4之數字鍵盤上方的 行動電話範例。 圖8-2〜8-3為功能按鍵配置於3X4之數字鍵盤下方的 範例。 120 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1282505 A7 B7 五、發明說明( 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖8-4為功能按鍵配置於3χ4之數字鍵盤左側或右側 的範例。 . 、.+' . 圖8-5〜8-8係利用功能按鍵作為控制按鍵的範例。 圖9 -1儀告r u , 、 田 、下、左及右」移動鍵用作計算機模 式中+、—、X及、按鍵時對應功能表示為圖禪的範例。 圖9-2為特定字符之範例,其等與代表圖標之各數字 按鍵有關。 圖1CK1〜10_4為利用羅馬系統(U之語言中數字手音_ 母音分離鍵盤的範例。 …^ ^ 曰 圖10-5為子音_母音分離鍵盤中快捷輪入法的範例, 以及將輸入值識別及處理為同時輸入法(中文)中之簡碼 的範例。 圖u-i係當輪入值(群)於客戶端處解釋時系統配置 的範例。 ’ · . ... 圖1 1-2係當輸入值(群)於伺服器端處解釋時系統配 置的範例。 圖1 1-3〜丨丨-8係展開快捷輸入法及處理簡碼(於同時 輸入法中)之範例。· 圖12-1係藉控制處理方法輸入功能的範例。 圖12-2為與代表圖標之各數字按鍵有關之控制 範例。 的 圖5虎對照說明:無 121 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公愛) (請先Μ讀背面之注意事 — I I i I 項再本頁) -丨線-•Chinese characters. The present invention is capable of efficiently inputting characters on a keypad; more specifically, the present invention can maintain a simple layout of a keypad by using a control processing method to wheel various symbols. / and the present invention uses the key between the character and the number assigned to the button, 'the wheat provides a short code', uses the short code to implement the shortcut input method, and uses the simultaneous input method to input the target word with a small number of keystrokes or word. Using the exchange server used to interpret the short code, even when the third feeder requires a word instead of a short code, the user can enter the short code, exchange the server to interpret the short code input by the user, and The word or word corresponding to the code is shipped to the third server, which does not store the short code and the word or word corresponding to the short code line. Ming said that the simple example of the legendary example of the example of the van's example of the model j ^ilr base key β text continued Yu Yinglian's department 1 2 Fu Gui I 1 1 "The map is printed for the Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing · The central part of the 匕曰 字 ( ( ( 于 于 il il il il il il il il il il il il il il 鐽 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- e e e e e e e e e e e e Jian continued ii Wenbo is &amp; 2 4 pull 2 2 A ~ ~ is 13 1 - -2 2 3 The diagram of the diagram is the English version of the method according to the formula and /IV when the law. The control panel uses the key to make the continuous reconnection multi-dimensional dimension 1282505 A7 B7 V. Invention description () Figure 3-2 shows an example of a continuous keyboard using two Arabic control buttons. Figure 3-3 shows the characters in the center as the representative characters and the rest. The character is a continuous keyboard example of continuous continuation (in Arabic). Figure 4-1~4-3 shows an example of the basic sub-tone and the basic vowel being classified into a group (and configured on the button). Figure 4 - 4 shows repeated selection when a pair of consonants and vowels are grouped into a group. An example of the flow chart of the method process. Figures 4-5 to 4-8 are examples of keyboards using Korean vowels. Figure 5-1 shows a pull example for inputting Chinese characters using the Pinyin index. Figure 5-2 shows the input of English characters using fully relevant short codes. Figure 5-3~5-4 are examples of identifying and processing the round-in value as a code between simultaneous input methods. Figure 5-5 shows an example of a full input method via client and server. Figure 5-6 shows an example of categorizing words or words in an index. Figure 6-1 shows the first server (ie, the switching server) interpreting the short code sent by the client and interpreting the shortcode. To the second server that uses this information. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Office, and the Consumer Cooperatives, Figures 7-1 to 7-2 are examples of continuous keyboard input with various specific characters by means of control processing. Figure 8.1 shows the functions. An example of a mobile phone with a button placed above the 3 x 4 number keypad. Figures 8-2 to 8-3 show examples of function buttons placed under the 3X4 numeric keypad. 120 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 public) 1282505 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Ministry of Economics Figure 8-4 shows the example of the function button being placed on the left or right side of the 3χ4 numeric keypad. . . . . '. Figure 8-5~8-8 is an example of using the function button as a control button. Figure 9-1 shows the ru, , field, down, left and right "moving keys" used as the example of the zen, +, -, X, and button functions in the computer mode. Figure 9-2 shows an example of a particular character that is associated with each of the numeric buttons representing the icon. Figure 1CK1~10_4 is an example of using the Roman system (the digital phonetic _ vowel separation keyboard in U language. ...^ ^ 曰 Figure 10-5 is an example of the shortcut wheel entry method in the consonant vowel separation keyboard, and the input value is recognized. And processing is an example of the short code in the simultaneous input method (Chinese). Figure ui is an example of system configuration when the round-robin value (group) is interpreted at the client. ' · . . . Figure 1 1-2 An example of the system configuration when the input value (group) is interpreted at the server end. Figure 1 1-3~丨丨-8 is an example of expanding the shortcut input method and processing the short code (in the simultaneous input method). 1 is an example of input function by control processing method. Figure 12-2 is an example of control related to each digital button representing the icon. Figure 5: Comparison of the tiger: No 121 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210 X 297 public) (Please read the note on the back - II i I and then on this page) - 丨 line -

Claims (1)

1282505 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 種自—鍵盤輪人字符的方法,該鍵盤具有數個按鍵’ 且各按鍵係配置至少一字母字符或控制,其中配置於一 按鍵上之-第_字母字符係藉由制—次來選擇、一結 =在,按鍵上之第二字母字符係藉由按壓兩次來選 擇。在該按鍵上之第三字母字符係藉由按壓三次 來選擇’重€如此(亦即,酉己置或結合在按鍵上之字母 字符係由傳統重複選擇方法來選擇),該方法異少包含: (a) 偵測按鍵之選择,其中該按鍵上配置有至少一 字母字符; (b) 識別一目標文字或詞,當按鍵選擇數目為二或 以上時係利用除無效之子母字符結合以外之有效字母 字符結合來進行識別。 讀背 面 之 注 項 訂 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 2.如申請專利範圍第】項所述之方法,其中該二或以上之 按鍵選擇係選擇相同按鍵。 3 ·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之方法,其中該鍵盤之子音 按鍵與該鍵盤之母音按鍵分開,而各子音按鍵配置一或 多個子音且各母音按鍵配置一或多個母音。 4·如申請專利範圍第1至3項所述之方法,其中該目標文 字或詞係由中文符號組成’該步驟(b)係利用一語言限 制規則(亦即,文字形成規則或字符結合規則)來辨識目 122 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4痕格(21G x 297公愛) 線 AS B8 C8 D81282505 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. The patent application range is from the method of the keyboard wheel human character. The keyboard has several buttons' and each button is configured with at least one alphabetic character or control, wherein the letter _ is arranged on a button Characters are selected by system-by-time, one-tie=at, and the second-letter character on the button is selected by pressing twice. The third alphabetic character on the button is selected by pressing three times (that is, the alphabetic characters that are set or combined on the button are selected by the conventional repeated selection method), and the method includes : (a) Detecting the selection of a button, wherein the button is configured with at least one alphabetic character; (b) identifying a target text or word, when the number of button selections is two or more, using the combination of the invalid parent and child characters The effective alphabetic characters are combined for identification. Note on the back of the book Item Printed by the Intellectual Property Office of the Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2. For the method described in the scope of the patent application, the second or more button selections select the same button. 3. The method of claim 1, wherein the subtone button of the keyboard is separate from the vowel button of the keyboard, and each of the subtone buttons is configured with one or more consonants and each vowel button is configured with one or more vowels. 4. The method of claim 1 to 3, wherein the target text or word is composed of Chinese symbols 'this step (b) utilizes a language restriction rule (ie, a word formation rule or a character combination rule) ) to identify the target 122 This paper scale applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 mark (21G x 297 public) line AS B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 於 1282505 標文字或詞,於該規則中羅馬字母 问立十 仰Μ子音或母音 中文拼音上並不適用。 5. 如申請專利範圍第U 3項所述之方法,其中該子音按 鍵或該母音按鍵係利甩羅馬字母 一〜 A入一語言(包括中 文拼曰),而母音” a”及母音,,i”並不歸 个听頬至相同族群,且 不配置於母音按鍵上。 6. 如申請專利範圍第1至3項所 士 心万法,其中該子音按 鍵或該母音按鍵係利用羅馬字 、 可M輸入一語言(包括中 文拼音),而母音,,e”及母音,,丨,,並 个歸類至相同族群,且 不配置於母音按鍵上。 (請先¾讀背面之注意事項再填寓本·!) 經濟部智慧財產局員工滴費合作社印製 7.如申請專利範圍第〗至3項所之 ,Κ方法,其中該子音 鍵或該母音按鍵係利用羅馬字 ★似立、 ^ I Μ輸入一語言(包括 文拼音),而由包括母音” a,,、,ν, ” 上々 、〇”之字母字符所選 出之一或多個字母字符以及由括 I括母音,,i”、,,u”之字 字符所選出一或多個字母字餘 ^ 子付並不—起歸類至相同 群,且不配置於相同之母音按鍵上。 按 中 母 族 •線 盤上輸入字符的方 去,該鍵盤具有 8. —種自一鍵 一,〜々砍,該鍵盤 ,且各按鍵配置至少一字母 于付或控制,豆中 子音按鍵奧該蚀般+ 1 a 音 鍵 數 予符或控制,呈 之子音按鍵與該鍵盤之母音按鐽八 /、吸刀開,而各+ . 置一或多個子音且各母音接絲 士可s相:鍵配置一 罝· 或多個母 音 123 297公愛) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製Sixth, the scope of application for patents in 1282505 standard text or words, in the rules of the Roman alphabet, the question of ten Μ Μ Μ or vowel Chinese Pinyin does not apply. 5. The method of claim U3, wherein the consonant button or the vowel button is a Roman alphabet 1 to A into a language (including Chinese spelling), and the vowel "a" and vowel, i" does not belong to the same ethnic group, and is not placed on the vowel button. 6. As in the patent application scope 1 to 3, the sub-tone button or the vowel button uses Roman characters, M can input a language (including Chinese Pinyin), while vowels, e" and vowels, 丨, and categorize into the same group, and are not configured on the vowel button. (Please read the note on the back first and then fill in the book!) Printed by the Intellectual Property Office of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 7. If you apply for the patent range 〖 to 3, the method, where the sub-key or the The vowel button uses the Roman word ★, I, Μ input a language (including the pinyin), and one or more letters are selected by the alphabetic characters including the vowels a,,,, ν, 上上, 〇 Characters and one or more alphabetic characters selected by the characters including i, y, and u" are not classified into the same group and are not placed on the same vowel button. According to the Chinese mother family • the input character on the reel, the keyboard has 8. One kind of one-key one, ~ 々 ,, the keyboard, and each button is configured with at least one letter for paying or controlling, the bean neutron sound button The eclipse + 1 a key is given to the symbol or control, and the sub-tone button and the vowel of the keyboard are pressed by 鐽 eight /, the suction knife is opened, and each + is set. One or more consonants are set and the vowels are connected to each other. s phase: key configuration one or more vowels 123 297 public) Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employees consumer cooperatives printed A2 B8 C8 D8 1282505 、申請專利範圍 群’且不配置於相同之母音按鍵上。 13. 如申請專利範圍第8或9項所述之方法,其中該子音 按鍵或母音按鍵係用於輸入印尼語,而母音”a”及母 音’,i”並未歸類至相同族群,且不配置於母音按鍵上。 14. 如申請專利範圍第8或9項所述之方法,其中該子音 按鍵或該母音按鍵係用於輸入印尼語,而母音” a,,及^ 音”u”並未歸類至相同族群,且不配置於母音按鍵上。 15·如申請專利範圍第12項所述之方法,其中鍵擊一次配 置有母音”a”之按鍵可選擇該母音”a,,。 16·如申請專利範圍第12項所述之方法,其中鍵擊一次配 置有母音”i”之按鍵可選擇該母音,,i ”。 (請先«讀背面之注意事項再 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 17. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符的方法,該鍵盤具有數個 鍵,且各按鍵係配置至少一字母字符或控制,其中配 於一按鍵上之一第一字母字符係藉由接壓一次來 擇、一結合在該按鍵上之第二字母字符係藉由按壓兩 來選擇、一結合在該按鍵上之第三字母字符係藉由按 三次來選擇,重複如此(亦即,配置或結合在按鍵上 字母字符係由傳統重複選擇方法來選擇),該方法至 包含: 125 置 選 次 壓 之 少 '線 本紙張尺度適用中圉國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21Q X 297公愛) A3 BS C8 D8 1282505 六、申請專利範圍 U)偵測配置有一或多個字母字符之按鍵的選擇; (b) 當按鍵選擇數目為二個或以上時依據一特定 語言之語言限制規則來判定該輸.入值(亦即所選之按鍵 值)是否形成有效之字母字符組合; (c) 當所選按鍵被判定為無效之字母字符組合 時’將所選之按鍵值處理為簡碼。 18.如申請專利範圍第17項所述之方法,其中當與所選按 鍵值相對應之該詞被判定不存在於索引中時,該所選按 鍵值會被處理為一預定之全碼。 19·如申請專利範圍第17或18項所述之方法,其中該步 驟(c)至少包括: 、 ^ 合; 辨識一與該所選按鍵相對應之有效字 母字符組 之該字或 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 由依據一預定簡碼類型儲存於該索引中 詞取得該字母字符組合;以及 比較該經辨識之字母字符組合與該取得之字母字 符組合以處理該簡碼。 20·如申請專利範圍第17或18項所述之方法,其中該步 驟(c)係藉由比較該經選擇之按鍵值與儲存於索引中之 一特定簡碼以處理該簡碼。 126 本紙張尺度適甬中國國家標莩(CNS)A4規格(210^ 297^¾- AS B8 C8 D8 [282505 六、申請專利乾圍 2 1.如申請專利範圍第1 7或1 8項所述之方法,其中該步 驟(c)至少包含: (請先«讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 辨識一與該所選按鍵相對應之有效字母字符組 合;以及 比較該經辨識之字母字符組合與依據特定之簡碼 儲存於索引中之字母字符組合以處理該簡碼。 22.如申請專利範圍第17或18項所述之方法,、其中該語 言限制規則係依據中文拼音之文字形成規則,該步驟(Ο 係利用子音不會連續出現在除”ch〜’’、”sh〜’’、’’zh”以外 的字首之該語言限制規則以將該所選按鍵值處理為簡 碼或全碼。 2 3.如申請專利範圍第17或18項所述之方法,其中該語 言限制規則係利用羅馬字母以輸入字母字符,該步驟(Ο 係利用子音不會連續出現在除’’ s t〜” S ρ〜”以外的字首 之該語言限制規則以將該所選按鍵值處理為簡碼或全 碼。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 24. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符之方法,該鍵盤具有數個按 鍵,且各按鍵係配置至少一字母字符或控制,該方法至 少包含: (a)彳貞測一按鍵之選擇,其中該按鍵上配置有至少 一字母字符; 127 本紙張尺度適周中國圉家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公窆) AS BS C8 D8 1282505 申請專利範圍 (b) 計算按鍵選擇之數目;以及 (c) 當該按鍵選擇數目不超過一預定數目時處理 為簡碼,而當該按鍵選擇數目大於該預定數目時處理為 全碼。 2 5. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符之方法,'該鍵盤具有數個按 鍵,且各按鍵係配置至少一字母字符或控制,該方法至 少包含: (a) 偵測簡碼之輸入; (b) 按簡碼比較該經辨識之字母字符組合與依據 待定之簡碼儲存於索引中之字母字符組合以處理該簡 碼。 26. 如申請專利範圍第25項所述之方法,其中該鍵盤之子 音按鍵與該鍵盤之母音按鍵分開,而各子音按鍵配置一 或多個子音且各母音按鍵配置一或多個母音。 27. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符的方法,該鍵盤具有數個按 鍵,且各按鍵係配置至少一字母字符或控制,該方法至 少包含」 (a) 偵測簡碼之輸入; (b) 由依據一預定簡碼之類型儲存於該索引中之 該文字或詞取得該字母字符組合;以及 (c) 以該簡碼比較該經辨識之字母字符組合與該 128 本紙張尺度適兩中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21Q X 297公爱) 請 先 讀 背 δ 之 注 意 事 項A2 B8 C8 D8 1282505, patent scope group ' is not configured on the same vowel button. 13. The method of claim 8 or 9, wherein the consonant button or the vowel button is for inputting Indonesian, and the vowel "a" and the vowel ', i" are not classified into the same ethnic group, and 14. The method of claim 8 or claim 9, wherein the consonant button or the vowel button is used to input Indonesian, and the vowels "a,, and ^" u" Not classified to the same group and not configured on the vowel button. The method of claim 12, wherein the method of the vowel "a" is configured by a keystroke to select the vowel "a", wherein the method of claim 12, wherein the method of claim 12, wherein Keystrokes can be selected by a button configured with a vowel "i", i". (Please read the note on the back first and then print it on the back of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Office, Employees' Cooperatives. 17. A method of inputting characters from a keyboard. The keyboard has several keys, and each key is configured with at least one alphabetic character or control. One of the first alphabet characters on a button is selected by pressing once, and the second letter character combined on the button is selected by pressing two, and the third is combined on the button. The alphabetic characters are selected by pressing three times, that is to say (that is, the alphabetic characters arranged or combined on the keys are selected by the conventional repeated selection method), the method includes: 125 selecting the second pressure less than the line paper The scale applies to the China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21Q X 297 public) A3 BS C8 D8 1282505 VI. Patent application scope U) Detect the selection of one or more alphabetic characters; (b) When the button is selected When the number is two or more, it is determined according to a language-specific language restriction rule whether the input value (that is, the selected key value) forms a valid alphabetic character combination; (c) When the selected key is determined to be invalid combinations of alphabetical characters' of the key value of the selected process is a simple code. 18. The method of claim 17, wherein the selected key value is processed as a predetermined full code when the word corresponding to the selected key value is determined not to be present in the index. 19. The method of claim 17 or 18, wherein the step (c) comprises at least: , ^; identifying a word or economic ministry of a valid alphabetic character set corresponding to the selected key; The property bureau employee consumption cooperative prints the alphabetic character combination obtained by storing the word in the index according to a predetermined shortcode type; and comparing the recognized alphabetic character combination with the obtained alphabetic character to process the shortcode. The method of claim 17 or 18, wherein the step (c) processes the short code by comparing the selected key value with a particular short code stored in the index. 126 The paper size is suitable for China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210^ 297^3⁄4- AS B8 C8 D8 [282505 VI. Applying for patented circumstance 2 1. As stated in patent application No. 17 or 18) The method, wherein the step (c) comprises at least: (please first «read the back note and then fill in the page) to identify a valid alphabetic character combination corresponding to the selected button; and compare the recognized alphabetic character combination The short code is processed in combination with an alphabetic character stored in an index according to a specific short code. 22. The method of claim 17 or 18, wherein the language restriction rule is based on a Chinese pinyin text forming rule , the step (the use of the consonant does not continuously appear in the prefix of the word except the "ch~'', "sh~'", ''zh", the language restriction rule to process the selected key value as a shortcode Or the full code. 2 3. The method of claim 17 or 18, wherein the language restriction rule uses a Roman alphabet to input an alphabetic character, and the step (the use of the consonant does not continuously appear in addition to '' St~” S ρ The language restriction rule other than the prefix of the word is to process the selected key value as a short code or a full code. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative prints 24. A method for inputting characters from a keyboard, the keyboard has a plurality of buttons, and each button is configured with at least one alphabetic character or control. The method includes at least: (a) selecting a button selection, wherein the button is configured with at least one alphabetic character; 127 the paper size is suitable for China圉家标准 (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 窆) AS BS C8 D8 1282505 Patent application scope (b) Calculate the number of button selections; and (c) Process the simplification when the number of button selections does not exceed a predetermined number Code, and when the number of button selections is greater than the predetermined number, the processing is full code. 2 5. A method for inputting characters from a keyboard, 'the keyboard has a plurality of buttons, and each button is configured with at least one alphabetic character or control The method comprises at least: (a) detecting the input of the short code; (b) comparing the recognized alphabetic character combination with the word stored in the index according to the short code to be determined according to the shortcode The method of claim 25, wherein the sub-tone button of the keyboard is separated from the vowel button of the keyboard, and each sub-tone button is configured with one or more consonants and each vowel button One or more vowels are configured. 27. A method for inputting characters from a keyboard having a plurality of buttons, and each button is configured with at least one alphabetic character or control, the method comprising at least " (a) detecting a shortcode (b) obtaining the alphabetic character combination from the word or word stored in the index according to a type of a predetermined shortcode; and (c) comparing the recognized alphabetic character combination with the 128-book with the shortcode Paper size is suitable for two Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (21Q X 297 public) Please read the back δ precautions 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1282505Ministry of Economic Affairs, Intellectual Property Bureau, Staff Consumption Cooperative, Printing 1282505 、申請專利範圍 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 取侍之字母字符組合以處理該簡碼。 2 8 ·如申請專利範圍第2 7項所述之古 立 峭所遑之方法,其中該鍵盤之子 曰按鍵與該鍵盤之母音接 ^ 母9杈鍵77開,而各子音按鍵配置一 ^多個?音且各母音按鍵配置-或多個母音。 29· 一種自一鍵盤輸入字符的方法,該鍵盤具有數個按 鍵,且各按鍵係配置至少一字连 卞可予付或控制,·、其中該鍵 盤之子音按鍵與該鍵盤之舟立地μ、 现盤之母曰按鍵分開,而各子音按鍵 配置一或多個子音且各母音 分可曰技鍵配置一或多個母音,該 方法至少包含: (a)偵測簡碼之輸入; ()比較攻鉍輸入之簡碼與儲存於索引中之簡碼 以處理該簡碼。 30.一種自一鍵盤輸入字符之方法,該鍵盤具有數個按 鍵’且各按鍵係配置至少—字母字符或控制,當按鍵有 兩個或以上之控制按鍵時,各控制按鍵會定義各作用 (亦即控制(群)會配置於各控制按鍵上),該方法至少勺 含: 匕 (a) 偵測一第一控制按鍵之輸入,並接著偵測一第 二控制按鍵(連續地); (b) 將該第二控制按鍵之輸入處理為另一預定押 制(群),其不同於該第二控制按鍵之原始定義控制(群)。 — I1III1I II 1 1 · I 1 I 1 I f I ^ 0 I — I I I 1 1 1 (請先铟讀背面之注意事項再填寓本-1) 129The scope of application for patents is printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the Intellectual Property Office, and the Consumer Cooperatives. The letter character combination of the service is processed to process the short code. 2 8 · The method of Gu Liqi, as described in claim 27, wherein the keyboard sub-key and the vowel of the keyboard are opened, and each sub-key is configured. One? Sound and each vowel button configuration - or multiple vowels. 29· A method for inputting characters from a keyboard, the keyboard has a plurality of buttons, and each button is configured to be at least one word can be paid or controlled, wherein the keyboard of the keyboard and the keyboard of the keyboard are opposite to each other. The mother button is separated, and each of the voice buttons is configured with one or more consonants and each of the vowel buttons can be configured with one or more vowels. The method includes at least: (a) detecting the input of the short code;铋 Enter the shortcode and the shortcode stored in the index to process the shortcode. 30. A method for inputting characters from a keyboard, the keyboard having a plurality of buttons 'and each button is configured with at least one letter character or control. When the button has two or more control buttons, each control button defines each function ( That is, the control (group) is disposed on each control button), and the method at least includes: 匕 (a) detecting an input of a first control button, and then detecting a second control button (continuously); b) processing the input of the second control button into another predetermined lock (group) that is different from the original defined control (group) of the second control button. — I1III1I II 1 1 · I 1 I 1 I f I ^ 0 I — I I I 1 1 1 (Please note the indium read the back side and fill in the copy-1) 129 本紙張尺雜财目si#辣NS)A4麟 i282505 霞 六、申請專利範圍 31. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符的系統,其中配置於一按鍵上 之一第一字母字符係藉由按壓一.次來選擇、一結合在該 按鍵上之第二字母字符係藉由按壓兩次來選擇一結合 在該按鍵上之第三字母字符係籍由按壓三次來選擇 複如此(亦即’配置或結合在按鍵上之字母字符係由傳 統重複選擇方法來選擇),該系統至少包含: (a) —鍵盤,其具有數個按鍵,且各按鍵具有至少 一字母字符或控制; (b) —偵測裝置,用於偵測按鍵之選擇,其中該按 鍵上配置有至少一字母字符;以及 (c) 一處理裝置,當所選按鍵之數目為兩個或更多 時利用除無效字母字符組合以外之一特定語古的有效 字母字符組合來處理、或將該輸入值辨識為一目標文字 或詞。 32. —種用於輪入字母字符之鍵盤裝置,該裝置至少包含· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 (a) —鍵盤,其具有數個按鍵,且各按鍵配置有至 少一字母字符或控制,而該鍵盤之子音按鍵與該鍵盤之 母音按鍵分開’各子音按鍵配置一或多個子音且各母立 按鍵配置一或多個母音; (b) 偵測裝置,甩以偵測子音按鍵或母音按鍵之選 擇;以及 (c) 辨識裝置,回應按鍵之選擇以辨識一目样文a 130 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規袼(21Q X 297公愛) 1282505 f AS B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 或詞 3 3. —種自一鍵盤輸入字符之系統,·該系統至少包含: (a) —鍵盤,其具有數個按鍵,且各按鍵配置有至 少一字母字符或控制; (b) 偵測裝置,用以偵測配置有一或多個字母字符 之按鍵的選擇; (c) 判別裝置,其當所選之按鍵數目為兩.個或以上 時係依據一特定語言之語言限制規則來判定該輸入值 (亦即所選之按鍵值)是否形成有效的字母字符組合;及 (d) 處理裝置,其當該所選按鍵被判定為無效字母 字符組合時會將該經選擇之按鍵值處理為簡碼。 讀 背 δ 之 注 I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 3 4. —種簡碼系統,該系統至少包含: (a) 具有數個按鍵之鍵盤,各鍵盤配置至少一字母 字符或控制; (b) 具有”文字或詞”之索引,其係與簡碼及依據該 簡碼之字母字符或控制相對應; (c) 一偵測裝置,用於偵測配置有至’少一或多個字 母字符之按鍵的選擇;以及 (d) —處理裝置,其係按該輸入值比較該經辨識之 字母字符組合與依據特定簡碼儲存於索引中之該字母 字符組合以處理該輸入值。 131 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 1282505'、申請專利範圍This paper ruler miscellaneous goods si# spicy NS) A4 Lin i282505 Xia Six, the scope of application for patents 31. - A system for inputting characters from a keyboard, wherein one of the first alphabet characters placed on a button is pressed by one. The second letter character selected by the button is selected by pressing twice to select a third letter character combined on the button to be selected by pressing three times (ie, 'configuration or combination The alphabetic characters on the keys are selected by the traditional repeat selection method. The system includes at least: (a) a keyboard having a plurality of keys, each of which has at least one alphabetic character or control; (b) - detection a device for detecting a selection of a button, wherein the button is configured with at least one alphabetic character; and (c) a processing device that utilizes a combination of invalid alphabetic characters when the number of selected buttons is two or more A specific combination of valid alphabetic characters to process, or to recognize the input value as a target text or word. 32. A keyboard device for wheeling alphabetic characters, the device comprising at least a printed matter (a) of a Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Office employee consumption cooperative (a) - a keyboard having a plurality of buttons, each button being configured with at least one alphabetic character Or control, and the sub-tone button of the keyboard is separated from the vowel button of the keyboard. Each sub-tone button is configured with one or more consonants and each parent button is configured with one or more vowels; (b) detecting device, detecting sub-tones The selection of the button or vowel button; and (c) the identification device, responding to the selection of the button to identify the first item a 130 The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21Q X 297 public) 1282505 f AS B8 C8 D8 VI. Application for Patent Scope or Word 3 3. A system for inputting characters from a keyboard. The system includes at least: (a) a keyboard having a plurality of keys, each of which is configured with at least one alphabetic character or (b) detecting means for detecting the selection of a button configured with one or more alphabetic characters; (c) discriminating means for when the number of selected keys is two or more a language-limiting rule for determining whether the input value (ie, the selected key value) forms a valid alphabetic character combination; and (d) processing means that when the selected key is determined to be an invalid alphabetic character combination The selected key value is processed as a short code. Notes on Reading Back δ I Economic Intelligence Department Intellectual Property Bureau Employees Consumption Cooperative Printing 3 4. A short code system, the system includes at least: (a) a keyboard with a plurality of keys, each keyboard configured with at least one alphabetic character or control; (b) has an index of "text or word" which corresponds to the short code and the alphabetic characters or controls in accordance with the short code; (c) a detecting means for detecting the configuration to "less one or more" And (d) a processing device that compares the recognized alphabetic character combination with the alphabetic character stored in the index according to the particular shortcode to process the input value. 131 The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public) 1282505', the scope of patent application •種簡碼系統,該系統至少包含: (a) 具有數個按鍵之鍵盤,各按鍵配置有至少—〜 母字符或控制; 予 (b) 具有”文字或詞,,之索引,其係與簡碼相對應. (c) 一偵測裝置,用於偵測配置有至少一或多個 母字符之按鍵的選擇;以及 〜⑷——處理裝置,其係按該輸入值比較該經辨識 字母字符組合與自該,,文字或詞,,取得之該字、母字^ 合以處理該輸入值。 个 字 η背面 之 之 組 I !· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 3 6 · 一種簡碼系統,該系統至少包含: (a) 具有數個按鍵之鍵盤,各按鍵配置有至少一 母字符或控制,而該鍵盤之子音按鍵與該鍵盤之ζ音 鏠分離,各子音按鍵配置一或多各子音且各母音按^ 置有一或多個母音; (b) 具有簡碼及/或”文字或詞,,之索雜 '、Ή ’其係與簡螞相對應; (c) 一偵測裝置,用於偵測配置有至小 、 R y 或多個 母子符之按鍵的選擇;以及 ⑷-處理裝置’藉由比較該輪人值與错存 t之簡碼以處理該等輸入值。 ’、 132 本纸張尺度適周中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公愛) 字 該 字 引 訂 線• A short code system, the system comprising at least: (a) a keyboard having a plurality of keys, each of which is configured with at least a ~ mother character or control; (b) having "text or words, an index, Corresponding to the short code. (c) a detecting device for detecting a selection of a button configured with at least one or more mother characters; and a (4) processing device for comparing the recognized letter by the input value The character combination is combined with the word, the word, and the word, and the obtained word is used to process the input value. The group of the back of the word y I! · Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumption cooperative printing 3 6 · A short code system, the system comprising at least: (a) a keyboard having a plurality of buttons, each button being configured with at least one mother character or control, and the subtone button of the keyboard is separated from the voice of the keyboard, and each of the subtone buttons is configured One or more sub-tones and each vowel is set to have one or more vowels; (b) has a short code and/or "word or word, which is a miscellaneous ', 'Ή' corresponds to Jane's; (c) a detecting device for detecting the configuration to be small, R y Or a selection of a plurality of parent-child keys; and (4)-processing means&apos; processing the input values by comparing the rounds of the person values with the short codes of the missing bits. ‘, 132 paper size appropriate week China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇 X 297 public) word This word
TW091114098A 2000-12-26 2002-06-26 Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad TWI282505B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20000081475 2000-12-26
KR20010000105 2001-01-03
KR20010000464 2001-01-04
KR20010000878 2001-01-06
PCT/KR2001/002267 WO2002052816A1 (en) 2000-12-26 2001-12-26 Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TWI282505B true TWI282505B (en) 2007-06-11

Family

ID=38823750

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW091114098A TWI282505B (en) 2000-12-26 2002-06-26 Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI282505B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8738644B2 (en) 2008-07-01 2014-05-27 Htc Corporation Single-tap input remote server access

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8738644B2 (en) 2008-07-01 2014-05-27 Htc Corporation Single-tap input remote server access

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP3523343B2 (en) Key input device and key input method
US6567549B1 (en) Method and apparatus for immediate response handwriting recognition system that handles multiple character sets
JP2007133884A5 (en)
JP2001509290A (en) Reduced keyboard disambiguation system
CN109844696A (en) Multilingual character entry apparatus
EP1586191A1 (en) Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters
US11467727B2 (en) Character input device
JP2002534733A (en) Text input system for ideographic and non-ideographic languages
JP2010198241A (en) Chinese input device and program
KR20250019602A (en) Input method and device by directional drag on a button arranged with less than 5 alphabets on one button
JP4968601B2 (en) English input method for portable input terminals
JP4262981B2 (en) Keypad character input device and method thereof
TWI282505B (en) Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad
AU2889301A (en) Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters on keypad
JP2009187510A (en) Mobile input terminal
WO2004010674A1 (en) Apparatus and method for inputting alphabet characters
JP5751537B2 (en) International Japanese input system
WO2010131759A1 (en) Computer allowing chinese language input
JP2010282507A (en) Electronic device and program with dictionary function
KR102122611B1 (en) Korean input method on the keypad processed in a cyclic and non-cyclic manner depending on the state of the consonant and the final consonant
KR101304352B1 (en) Korean syllable input method by continuous directional drag on screen keyboard
KR20010083120A (en) Alphabet input device on keypad and its method
KR101355377B1 (en) Korean syllable input method by continuous dragging on screen keyboard
CN106095126A (en) The generation method of dummy keyboard and the method and system of input Sanskrit
JP4974010B2 (en) Input method of portable input terminal

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees